V. Prisacaru Basic Course

INTRODUCTORY COURSE

LESSON I

ENGLISH ALPHABET (alfabetul englez)

VOWELS (vocale)

COMBINATIONS OF VOWELS (combnaţii de vocale)

1

GRAMMARTHE ARTICLE (articolul)

Type of article singular plural examples

indefinite a (an) - a man, a student, an economistdefinite the the the man, the students, the economist

Examples: This is a bag. Give me the bag, please.This is a dog. It is a black dog. The dog is black.That is a cap. The cap is red. It is a red cap.

EXERCISES

1. Read the following words aloud (Citiţi următorele cuvinte).

cake, name, pane, game, Jane, lane, same, dame, tame, stage;bat, flat, cat, rat, fat, sat, sad, mad, Tad, bad;large, far, car, star, Mark, shark, dark, spark, card, park;note, vote, cote, rope, hope, role, stole, whole, mole, sole;hot, not, sot, dot, lot, mot, pot, pop, hop, God;fork, more, sore, core, tore, fore, bore, lore, gore, core;pen, hen, Ben, men, bed, red, fed, let, set, met;term, firm, fur, blur, germ, stir, occur, sir, bur, hurt;here, there, mere;fine, mine, shine, line, tine, pine, my, sky, by, fly;sit, bit, fit, tip, trip, stick, Nick, flip, sick, zip;fire, tire, dire, lire, sire; tune, mute, acute;cup, but, cut, sun, sum, sup, run, suffer, such, much, summer.

2. Read and compare (Citiţi şi comparaţi).

[i:] dee – deed – deep Meet Ted.be – been – beef Meet Pete.me – meed – meet Tell Pete.fee – feed – feet. Tell Ben. Meet me.

Tell me.

2

3. Work on the model (Lucraţi după model).

Ex: [mi:t] – meet[di:p], [ki:p], [sıt] [sli:p], [si:], [tıp], [fıt], [peı], [meı], [fju:], [ku:l], [boı], [flo:], [kraun], [buk]

4. Use the indefinite and the definite article with the following nouns. Translate them (Folosiţi articolul hotărât şi nehotărât cu următoarele cuvinte. Traduceţi-le).

match, page, patch, dish, cage, mass, boy, cup, sum, fire, tune, fly, line, hat, stick, firm, man, hat, map, rat.

5. Write in transcription the following words (Scrieţi în transcripţie următoarele cuvinte).

name, day, line, style, fine, deep, beat, fit, deep, stale, sad, fail.

3

LESSON II

CONSONANTS HAVING TWO PRONUNCIATIONS(consoane având două pronunţări)

consonant position pronunciation examples

c1. înainte de e, i, y;2. înainte de a, o, u şi de toate con-

soanele de la sfârşitul cuvintelor.

[s][k]

cent, pencil, icycap, come, cup,

black

g3. înainte de e, i, y; (excepţie get)4. înainte de a, o, u şi de toate con-

soanele de la sfârşitul cuvintelor.

[dз][g]

page, cagegood, green, big

s

1. la începutul şi la sfârşitul cuvîntului înainte de consoanele surde;

2. între vocale şi la sfârşitul cuvântului după vocale şi consoane sonore.

[s]

[z]

sit, student, lists

please, ties, pens

x1. înainte de consoane şi la sfârşitul

cuvântului;2. înainte de o vocală accentuată.

[ks]

[gz]

text, six

exam, example

COMBINATIONS OF CONSONANTS(combinaţii de consoane)

consonants position pronunciation examples

sh în orice poziţie. [ş] she, ship, wash

ch în orice poziţie. [tş] chess, cheese

tch după vocalele scurte. [tş] match

ck după vocalele scurte. [k] black, Nick

th 1. la începutul cuvintelor semnificative şi la sfârşitul cuvintelor;

2. la începutul pronumelor, cuvintelor auxiliare şi între vocale.

[θ]

[ð]

thick, myth, think, path

they, this, bathe

wh 1. la începutul cuvântului, înainte de toate vocalele, în afară de o;

2. înainte de o.

[w]

[h]

what, when, why

who, whose, whom

qu înainte de vocale. [kw] question, quick, quote

ng după vocale la sfârşitul cuvântului. [ŋ] long, sing

nk după vocale. [ŋk] thank, think

wr la începutul cuvântului înainte de vocale. [r] write

4

COMBINATIONS OF VOWELS AND CONSONANTS(combinaţii de vocale şi consoane)

letters position pronunciation examples

al1. înainte de k într-o silabă accentuată;

2. înainte de celelalte consoane într-o silabă accentuată.

[o:]

[o:l]

chalk, talk

wall, also

wo înainte de consoane într-o silabă accen-tuată.

[wэ:] work

wa1. înainte de consoanele finale în afară

de r şi combinaţiile de consoane;

2. înainte de r.

[wo]

[wo:]

want

warm, war

igh în orice poziţie. [aı] light, tight, night

GRAMMARTO BE (PRESENT SIMPLE)

affirmative

I am (I’m)You are (You’re)He (she, it) isWe are (We’re)You are (You’re)They are (They’re)

negative

I am not (I’m not)You are not (You aren’t)He (she, it) is not (He isn’t)We are not (We aren’t)You are not (You aren’t)They are not (They aren’t)

interrogative

Am I?Are you? Is he (she, it)? Are we?Are you? Are they?

Examples: I am a student. I am not a student. Am I a student?Nick is my friend. Nick isn’t my friend. Is Nick my friend?Ann and Tess are friends. Ann and Tess aren’t friends. Are Ann and Tess friends?

TEXT

Find my pen. Send me my pen. Meet me. Send Ted five ties. Send Tess nine pens.Tell Pete my name. My name is Ann. Send Pete my map. Send Tess my map and my plan.I am a student. You are a student too. We are friends. She is my sister. They are good economists.

Vocabulary

a pen - un stilou to find - a găsia tie - o cravată to send - a trimitea name - un nume to meet - a întâlnimy – meu to tell - a spunea map - o hartă five - cincia plan - un plan nine - nouă (num)

5

EXERCISES


century, pencil, cent, ice, vice, mice;cup, come, cap, black, back, car, cat, Nick, lack, sac, cut;page, cage, mage, image, rage, gem, germ;good, God, green, dig, big, gone, grain, gun, dog, fog;sit, sat, sun, student, list, mist, best, stir, sin, sort, sport;please, ties, cease, disease, dies;text, six, fax, expert, excellent, extract, taxi;

2. Work on the model (Lucraţi după model).

Ex: [şıp] – ship[şo:t], [şeıp], [şeık], [tşın], [tşoıs], [bэk], [blэk], [θık], [θın], [θıŋk], [θıŋ], [ðeı], [ðem], [ðen], [ðэt], [wo:t], [wen], [waı], [kwaıt], [kwi:n], [kweşn], [soŋ], [loŋ], [raıt], [tşo:k], [to:k], [o:l], [to:l], [wo:m], [wo:], [wэ:d].

3. Read the sentences (Citiţi propoziţiile).

This is a bag. The bag is big. It is a big bag.This is a cap. The cap is black. It is a black cap.This is a thin pencil. Give me the pencil, please.

4. Insert the right article (Folosiţi articolul potrivit).

1. This is ___ cap. ___ cap is black. 2. This is ___ match. It is ___ thin match. That is ___ thick match. 3. ___ film is fine. 4. This is ___ pen. ___ pen is black. 5. Pete, give me ___ pen, please. 6. Tess, take that pencil. Give me ___ pencil, please. It is ___ bad pencil.

5. Insert the right form of the verb “to be” (Folosiţi forma potrivită a verbului “to be”).

1. I ___ a student. 2. My friend ___ a good student. 3. We ___ in the classroom now. 4. Nick ___ my best friend. 5. They ___ economists. 6. You ___ the first student in our group. 7. She ___ my sister.

6. Translate (Traduceţi).

1. Aceasta este o casă. Casa este mare. 2. Prietenul meu este student. El învaţă la universitate. 3. Acest creion este negru. 4. Această geantă este rea. Daţi-mi geanta ceea, vă rog. 5. Daţi-mi un chibrit, vă rog. 6. Acesta este un stilou. Acesta este un stilou negru. Acest stilou este negru. 7. Acest apartament este curat. 8. Daţi-i lui Tom aceste creioane. 9. Ben, ia acest stilou albastru. 10. Sora mea este profesoară.

7. Write the transcription of the following words (Scrieţi transcripţia următoarelor cuvinte).

a) film, bag, match, cap, page, black, big, this, that, Jane, give, take;b) still, cape, cent, fill, gap, gem, chain, latch, lack, theme, need, best, pack.

6

LESSON III

NUMERALS (numerale)

Cardinal numerals (numerale cardinale) Ordinal numerals (numerale ordinale)number spelling pronunciation number spelling pronunciation

0 Zero [´ziэrou]1 One [wΛn] I first [fэ:st]2 two [tu:] II second [´seknd]3 Three [θri:] III third [θırd]4 Four [fo:] IV fourth [fo: θ]5 Five [faıv] V fifth [fıfθ]6 Six [sıks] VI sixth [sıksθ]7 Seven [´sevn] VII seventh [´sevnθ]8 Eight [eıt] VIII eighth [eıtθ]9 Nine [naın] IX ninth [naınθ]10 Ten [ten] X tenth [tenθ]11 Eleven [ı´levn] XI eleventh [ı´levnθ]12 Twelve [twelv] XII twelfth [twelvθ]13 Thirteen [´θэ:´ti:n] XIII thirteenth [´θэ:´ti:nθ]14 fourteen [´fo:´ti:n] XIV fourteenth [´fo:´ti:nθ]15 Fifteen [´fıf´ti:n] XV fifteenth [´fıf´ti:nθ]16 Sixteen [´sıks´ti:n] XVI sixteenth [´sıks´ti:nθ]17 seventeen [´sevn´ti:n] XVII seventeenth [´sevn´ti:nθ]18 eighteen [éı´ti:n] XVIII eighteenth [éı´ti:nθ]19 nineteen [ńaın´ti:n] XIX nineteenth [ńaın´ti:nθ]20 Twenty [´twentı] XX twentieth [´twentıθ]21 twenty-one [´twentı´wΛn] XXI twenty-first [´twentı´fэ:st]30 Thirty [´θэ:tı] XXX thirtieth [´θэ:tı]31 thirty-one [´θэ:tı´wΛn] XXXI thirty-first [´θэ:tı´fэ:st]40 Forty [´fo:tı] XL fortieth [´fo:tıθ]50 Fifty [´fıftı] L fiftieth [´fıftıθ]60 Sixty [´sıkstı] LX sixtieth [´sıkstıθ]70 seventy [´sevntı] LXX seventieth [´sevntıθ]80 Eighty [éıtı] LXXX eightieth [éıtıθ]90 Ninety [ńaıntı] XC ninetieth [ńaıntıθ]100 one hundred [´wΛn´hΛndrıd] C one hundredth [´wΛn´hΛndrıdθ]101 one hundred and

one[´wΛn´hΛndrıd эnd´wΛn] CI one hundred and

first[´wΛn´hΛndrıd эn

´fэ:st]200 two hundred [´tu:´hΛndrıd] CC two hundredth [´tu:´hΛndrıdθ]

1 000 one thousand [´wΛn´θauznd] M one thousandth [´wΛn´θauzndθ]2 000 two thousand [´tu:´θauznd] MM two thousandth [´tu:´θauzndθ]

1 000 000 one million [´wΛn´mıljэn] M one millionth [´wΛn´mıljэnθ]

TEXT

My name is Gabriel. I am 17. I am from Bălţi. I am a student. I study economics. I have many friends. This is my flat. It is large and clean. My flat is in Bălţi. Bălţi is a beautiful town. I like my town.Is Bălţi a town? Yes, it is. Is it a beautiful town? Yes, it is.

* * *Give me an ink-stand and a pen, please. My pen is bad.

7

Give me that red pencil, please.Jack, take text six and read page seven.

Vocabulary

economics – economie to like - a placea student - un/o student(ă) large - marea friend - un/o prieten(ă) clean - curat(ă)a flat - un apartament beautiful - frumos(oasă)a town - un oraş from - din, de lato study - a studia

EXERCISES


a text, a city, an exam, an ink-stand;the text, the city, the exam, the ink-stand.risk, red, ripe, read, rest, rhythm, rally;farm, lark, star, cart, far, darn, mark, arm, army;hand, hay, hill, hate, heap, help, hide;yes, yell, easy, daddy, yet, yelp, my, by, myth;next, text, exam, six, sixty.

2. Read and compare (Citiţi şi comparaţi).

[ŋ]

bang ringsang singfang thing

[ŋ - n]

bang – banfang – fansing – sinthing – thin

[ŋ - ŋk]

bang – banksang – sanksing – sinkthing – think

3. Make the following sentences interrogative (Faceţi următoarele propoziţii interogative).

1. My tie is black. 2. His flat is large and clean. 3. His ink-stand is blue. 4. My pen is bad. 5. His hat is black. 6. Jane is in London. 7. I am an economist.

4. Insert the right article (Folosiţi articolul potrivit).

1. This is ___ black ink-stand. 2. ___ pen is red and ___ ink-stand is black. 3. Give Tess ___ pen and ___ pencil. 4. Read ___ page ten. 5. Chişinău is ___ fine town. 6. Send Jane ___ text. 7. This is his ___ flat. 8. Give me ___ black pencil, please. 9. This is ___ text. Read ___ text, please. 10. Ben, take ___ text six and read ___ page five.

5. Answer the questions (Răspundeţi la întrebări).

1. Is this a pen?2. Is this pen red?3. Is that a pencil?4. Is his name Nick?

8

5. Is this map large?6. Is this an ink-stand?7. Is this a bag?8. Is this flat clean?9. Is this bag big?10. Is Bălţi a town?

6. Use the right form of the verb “to be” (Folosiţi forma corerctă a verbului “to be”).

1. This ___ a note. 2. These texts ___ long and those texts ___ short. 3. ___ this book good? 4. Those doors ___ black. 5. That pencil ___ not black. It ___ red.

7. Make these sentences negative (Transformaţi la forma negativă).

1. This tie is good. 2. That text is long. 3. Those bags are big. 4. These rooms are clean. 5. That pencil is short. 6. His ties are black.


1. Acest apartament este mare. 2. Numele lui este Pete? – Da. 3. Luaţi textul numărul şase. 4. Citiţi acest text. 5. Citiţi a şasea pagină. 6. Luaţi trei cărţi. 7. Daţi-i lui Gabriel această călimară. 8. Acesta este creionul lui? – Da. 9. Acest stilou este roşu. 10. Acest oraş este frumos. 11. Eu sunt primul în grupă. 12. Care este numărul apartamentului tău? – Numărul zece. 13. Unde este apartamentul Anei? 14. Ia al doilea text şi traduce-l. 15. El este al doilea la citit (at reading).

9

LESSON IV

TEXT

Tom is my friend. He is a doctor. I am not a doctor, I am a student. Tess is not a student. She is a teacher. We are in my room now. We are at the table. Tess, give me three cups, please. Thank you. Tom, put a spoon into your cup.– Are you a student. – Yes, I am.– Is your friend a student too? – No, he isn’t. He is a doctor.– Is Tess a doctor or a teacher? – She is a teacher.

Vocabulary

a friend - un prieten a cup - o ceaşcăa doctor - un medic a spoon - o lingurăa student - un student to put - a punea teacher - un profesor (o profesoară) to thank - a mulţumia room - o cameră now - acuma table - o masă

GRAMMAR

TO HAVE (PRESENT SIMPLE)

affirmative

I have (I’ve)You have (You’ve)He (she, it) hasWe have (We’ve)You have (You’ve)They have (They’ve)

negative

I have not (I haven’t)You have not (You haven’t)He (she, it) has not (He hasn’t)We have not (We haven’t)You have not (You haven’t)They have not (They haven’t)

interrogative

Have I?Have you? Has he (she, it)? Have we?Have you? Have they?

Examples: I have a book. I haven’t a book. Have I a book?Nick has a friend. Nick hasn’t a friend. Has Nick a friend?Ann and Tess have lessons. Ann and Tess haven’t lessons. Have Ann and Tess lessons?

10

PREPOSITIONS INDICATING PLACE AND DIRECTION(prepoziţii care indică locul şi direcţia)

EXERCISES


note, lote, lone, nod, code, cot, tone, cope, dot, sock, pope, doll, hot, hop, bone;tool, moon, look, doom, took, fool, cool, shook, loop, cook, choose, hook;sport, torn, corn, gorge, cork, or, fort;lead, steel, meat, bet, lest, Pete, tip, tiny, type, myth, mice, stay, plain; star, farm, cart, cell, cod, sing, cling, bank, rank, spin.

2. Insert the right form of the verb “to have” (Folosiţi forma potrivită a verbului “to have”).

1. Ben ____ a firend. 2. I ____ an interesting book. 3. ____ this magazine? – Yes, I ____ . 4. We ____ a new student in our group. 5. Nick ____ a new car. 6. They ____ an English lesson now. 7. ____ I a sister?

3. Insert the right form of the verb “to be” (Folosiţi forma potrivită a verbului “to be”).

1. He ___ a teacher. 2. I ___ in my room now. 3. ___ Tom and Tess students? Yes, they ___. 4. We ___ students. 5. She ___ a doctor. 6. ___ you a teacher? No, I ___. 7. ___ they economists? No, they ___ . 8. This ___ a cup. It ___ yellow. 9. The spoons ___ on the table. 10. The table ___ in the room.

4. Use the right preposition and translate (Folosiţi prepoziţia adecvată şi traduceţi).

1. Ted, take that long pencil ___ ___ your bag and put it ___ the table. 2. The black pen is ___ the table. The brown pen is ___ my bag. The red pencil is ___ that book. 3. Take these books ___ the table, please. 4. Go ___ the blackboard, please. 5. Close your book and put it ___ your bag. It is ___ the bag now. 6. Pete, go ___ the door and close it. 7. Ben, put a spoon ___ your cup. 8. Go ___ ___ the room, please! 9. Take a pen ___ that student, please. 10. Fred is __ his room now. 11. Jane, take your pencil ___ the table and put it ___ your bag. Now take it ___ ___ your bag and put it ___ the book. 12. Go ___ your table and take your book ___ ___ your bag. 13. Look ___ the blackboard! Now go ___ the blackboard. 14. Take the cup ___ Jane and put it ___ the table.

11

5. Answer the questions (Răspundeţi la întrebări).

1. Are you a student? 2. Is your friend a teacher or a doctor? 3. Is this boy my friend? 4. Is he a teacher? 5. Am I a doctor? 6. Is Pete or Ted your friend? 7. Is your sister in the room? 8. Are they friends? 9. Is Nick a good student? 10. Is this a cup or a spoon? 11. Has he a sister? 12. Have you a friend? 13. Have I a new book?

6. Make these sentences negative (Puneţi propoziţiile la forma negativă).

1. Those men are doctors. 2. Kate is a teacher. 3. The students are in that room. 4. My friend is a student. 5. These books are good. 6. Those cups are brown. 7. These pencils are short. 8. They are friends. 9. Nick has a nice flat. 10. They have many friends.


a) 1. Sunteţi profesor? – Nu. Eu nu sunt profesor. Eu sunt student. 2. Fred, dă acestui băiat cartea ta, te rog. 3. Această cravată este galbenă sau neagră? – Ea este galbenă. 4. Luaţi ceştile de pe masă ceea. Puneţi, vă rog, ceştile pe această masă. Mulţumesc. 5. Puneţi această carte în geanta dumneavoastră. 6. Luaţi, vă rog, lingura de la acest băiat. 7. Pete este medic. El este prietenul meu. El este un medic bun. 8. Prietenul vostru este medic sau profesor?b) Numele meu este Nick. Eu sunt student. Fred este prietenul meu. El tot este student. El este un student bun. Notele lui sunt bune. Acum ne aflăm în apartamentul lui. Apartamentul lui este mare şi curat. – Fred, dă-mi, te rog, stiloul şi călimara.– Poftim, ia stiloul şi călimara.– Mulţumesc, Fred.– Nick, ia te rog cartea mea de pe masă, deschide-o, găseşte al treilea text şi citeşte-l.– Acest text este scurt sau lung?– El este scurt.

8. Write the transcription of the following words (Scrieţi transcripţia următoarelor cuvinte).

a) cup, cube, but, nut, mute, butter, rung, huge;b) now, how, yellow, bow, town, vow, window;c) gown, down, out, ounce, foul, noun, scout, count.

12

LESSON V

TEXT

We are at the university. We have an English class now. This is our classroom. It’s small, but it’s light and clean. The walls of our classroom are blue. Its floor is brown. Its ceiling is white. The door and the windows are white too. We are at the table. It’s brown. The chairs are brown too. We have a good teacher. Jack, come to the blackboard, please. Don’t take your book! Take a piece of chalk and write the new English words on the blakboard. Thank you. Write four questions at home.

* * *– What is this? – It’s a newspaper.– What kind of newspaper is it?– It’s an English newspaper.– Is it interesting?– Yes, it is.

Vocabulary

English - englez(ă) at home - acasăa class - o lecţie small - mic(ă)a classroom - o clasă light - luminos(oasă)a wall - un perete clean - curat(ă)a floor - o podea new - nou(ă)a ceiling - un tavan blue - albastru(ă)a door - o uşă brown - brun(ă)a window - o fereastră white - alb(ă)a chair - un scaun to take - a luaa blackboard - o tablă to write - a scriea piece - o bucată but - dar (conj.)chalk – cretă a newspaper - un ziara word - un cuvânt interesting - interesant(ă)a question - o întrebare What kind of... ? - Ce fel de... ?

GRAMMAR

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES (adjectivele posesive)

singular pluralmy

yourhis, her, its

ouryourtheir

Example: I have a book. This is my book; You have a pen. This is your pen; He (she) has a car. This is his (her) car. Autumn is a nice season. I like its beauty.We have a friend. This is our friend. They have a house. This is their house.

13

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES (propoziţii interogative)

My name is John. – Is my name John? I am a student. – Am I a student?

I have a friend. – Have I a friend? Nick has a book. – Has Nick a book?

EXERCISES


term, first, bird, third, stern, turn, fur, curl, curt, serf, curb, herb;whale, wharf, wheat, ward, when, whether, which, whiff, whip, whirl, warn, whole, warp, whose, why;cat, bunch, pinch, rice, will, chest, sister, frost, lick, sly, pace, lunch, rib, from, luck; cry, chat, shy, chill, sky, hale, rose, spine, till, spider, vine, sniff, maze, pan, reader;leer, beer, peer, veer, teem, fee, wee, bee, feel;fire, mire, tire, shire, care, fare, mare, stare, bare, rare;

2. Insert the right article if necessary (Folosiţi articolul potrivit unde este nevoie).

1. What colour is ___ floor of your room? 2. Write ___ question on ___ blackboard. 3. Open ___ window, please. 4. Close ___ door, please. 5. Write ___ new words at home. 6. Give Tom ___ piece of ___ chalk, please. 7. Where is ___ chalk? 8. Where is ___ room six? 9. ___ text-book is on ___ table. 10. They are at ___ home now. 11. What are you? – I am ___ student. 12. Where is ___ white copy-book? – It is in ___ bag. 13. Where is ___ table? – It is near ___ window. 14. Jane is ___ economist and Ben is ___ economist too. Their friends are ___ economists too. 15. Open ___ your books at ___ page ten and read ___ text nine.

3. Use the right preposition where necessary (Folosiţi prepoziţia necesară unde trebuie).

1. The walls ___ the rooms of my flat are yellow and blue. 2. Go ___ the blackboard, Pete. Pete is ___ the blackboard now. 3. Take a piece ___ chalk ____ the table. 4. Write these words ___ the blackboard. 5. Come ___ the room, please. 6. Go ___ the classroom. 7. Come ___ here! 8. Don’t go ___ there! 9. The blackboard is ___ the wall ___ our classroom. 10. Put these matches ___ your bag. 11. Open that book ___ page eight. 12. Look ___ the blackboard. 13. Where is Jack? – He is ___ the table. 14. Ben, open your book ___ page six, please. 15. Where is the red pencil? – It is ___ my copy-book.

4. Insert the appropriate possessive adjective (Folosiţi adjectivul posesiv potrivit).

1. We are students. This is ___ classroom. The door of ___ classroom is white. 2. I am at home now. ___ room is small, but it’s light and clean. 3. This is a room. ___ walls are green. 4. These are my sisters. ___ names are Mary and Ann. 5. Ben and Nick, open ___ books at page ten. 6. Sit down, Peter. ___ mark is good. 7. My sister is a teacher. These boys and girls are ___ pupils. 8. This man is an economist. ___ name is Smith. 9. Jane and Kate are at ___ English lesson now. 10. I am an economist. ___ name is Ben. 11. Bob is a pupil. ___ marks are good. 12. Ann and Nick are students. ___ friends are students too. 13. What are ___ names, boys? ___ name is Nick, ___ name is Jack.

14

5. Make these sentences interrogative (Faceţi aceste propoziţii interogative).

1. This is our classroom. 2. That is a light room. 3. The walls of my room are green. 4. This cup is white. 5. The table is at the window. 6. The chairs are at the table. 7. She is our teacher. 8. Pete is a good student. 9. This girl is my sister. 10. We have a good friend. 11. My sister has many new books. 12. This flat has many windows. 13. Pete and Ted have an English lesson now.

6. Answer the following questions (Răspundeţi la următoarele întrebări).

1. Where are you? 2. Are you at the lesson or at home? 3. Is this a classroom? 4. What is this? 5. Is your classroom at the university? 6. What kind of classroom is it? 7. Is it large or small? 8. What colour are its walls? 9. Where is the blackboard? 10. What colour is it? 11. Where is a piece of chalk? 12. Is the word blackboard long or short? 13. Is Ann at the blackboard or at the table? 14. Is your bag new? 15. Have you an English class today? 16. How many books has Nick at home?


1. Aceasta este clasa noastră. De ce culoare sunt pereţii ei? – Ei sunt galbeni. – Ea este mare sau mică? – Ea nu este mare, dar e luminoasă. 2. De ce culoare este tavanul? – El este alb. – De ce culoare este podeaua? – Ea este brună. 3. Unde este masa dumneavoastră? – Ea este la fereastră. 4. Tom, deschideţi cartea la pagina opt. Nu citiţi textul. Citiţi întrebările, vă rog. 5. Veniţi încoace, vă rog. 6. Luaţi o bucată de cretă şi scrieţi întrebarea dumneavoatră la tablă. 7. De ce culoare este caietul ei? – El este albastru. 8. Trimiteţi-mi, vă rog, cartea dumneavoatră nouă. 9. Daţi-mi opt creioane noi. 10. De ce culoare sunt scaunele în camera dumneavoastră? – Ele sunt brune. 11. Citiţi textul nou acasă.

8. Write in transcription the following words (Scrieţi în transcripţie următoarele cuvinte).

economist, wife, son, our, their, who, whose, where, here, there, ceiling, window, chair, piece, chalk, word, question, colour, light, blue, cone, eight.

9. Describe your classroom using the active vocabulary of the lesson (Descrieţi clasa voastră folosind vocabularul activ al lecţiei).

15

BASIC COURSE

LESSON ONE (THE FIRST LESSON)

WE STUDY FOREIGN LANGUAGES

My name is Gabriel. I live in the centre of Chişinău. I work at an office. I am an economist and I am also a student. Many economists from my office study foreign languages. I study English. In the morning I take my English textbook and my exercise-books and go to the office. After the work we have English classes. The teacher and the students come into the classroom and sit down at the tables. The students open their textbooks and their exercise-books. I also open them. During the lesson we read texts, write sentences on the blackboard and do exercises. We do not write many exercises at the lesson. We sometimes write dictations. We usually write exercises at home. We usually speak English to our teacher. We sometimes speak Romanian at the lesson. After the lesson we go home.

* * *

– What is your name? – My name is Gabriel.– Do you live in Chişnău? – Yes, I do.– Where do you work? – I work at an office.– Do you study French? – No, I do not (No, I don’t).– What language do you study? – I study English.– When do you usually study English? – I usually study English in the evening.– What do you do during the lessons? – We read, write and speak English during the lessons.– Do you write many or few exercises at the lessons? – We write few exercises at the lessons.

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to study - a studia, a învăţa often - des, deseoriforeign - străin(ă) seldom - rar, rareoria language - o limbă, un limbaj always - întotdeaunato live - a trăi, a locui a textbook - un manual(the) centre - centru(l) an exercise - un exerciţiuto work (at) - a lucra (la) an exercise-book - o carte de exerciţiian office - un oficiu during - în timpulalso - de asemeni, tot a sentence - o propoziţiemany - mulţi (multe) a dictation - o dictarefew - puţini (puţine) to speak (to) - a vorbi (cu)morning – dimineaţă Romanian - limba românăin the morning – dimineaţa French - limba francezăin the evening – seara after - dupăevery evening - în fiecare seară before - înainteusually - de obicei when - cândsometimes - câteodată

16

GRAMMAR

PRESENT INDEFINITE (SIMPLE) TENSE

Affirmative Formsingular plural

I readYou readHe (She, It) reads

We readYou readThey read

Negative Formsingular plural

I don’t readYou don’t readHe (She, It) doesn’t read

We don’t readYou don’t readThey don’t read

Interrogative Formsingular plural

Do I readDo you readDoes he (she, it) read

Do we readDo you readDo they read

consonant + y -ies (ex.: to study – He studies, to fly – He flies, to try – He tries)

-ss, -sh, -ch, -x, -o + es (ex.: to pass – He passes, to wash – He washes, to fix – He fixes, to go – He goes)

17

FORMAREA CUVINTELOR

-ion – sufix de formare a substantivelor în limba engleză. De regulă substantivele sunt formate de la verbe. Combinaţia acestui sufix cu o consoană (de obicei cu -t-, -s-, -ss- ) se pronunţă [şn]:

to dictate (a dicta) dictation [dık’teişn] dictare

-er – sufix de formare a substantivelor de la radicalul verbal:to speak (a vorbi) speaker (vorbitor)

Dacă verbul se termină în e surd, atunci la adăugarea sufixului dat e se omite.

-ly [lı] – sufixul formării adverbelor de la adjective:

usual (obişnuit) usually [‘ju:зuэlı]

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Put the following sentences into negative and interrogative forms and pay attention to the use of the adverbs.

1. I often meet this economist here. 2. You seldom go to the blackboard. 3. They read their textbooks every day. 4. His sisters always give me books to read. 5. They go there every day. 6. You usually read these notes at home. 7. They often come here. 8. We often write questions at home.

2. Answer these questions.

1. Do you often meet your friends at the office?2. Do they sometimes take your books?3. Where do you usually read books and newspapers?4. What do you usually do at the lesson?5. What do you often copy?6. What do you read every day?7. Where do you go every day?8. Do you read your English books at home or at the lesson?

3. Ask questions to the bold words.

1. Ann is in her room now (1). 2. This is a room (1). 3. The walls of this room are blue (1). 4. We read good books (2). 5. You often go there (1). 6. I sometimes give Pete my copy-book (2). 7. They read books and newspapers in this room (2). 8. My sons read these textbooks every day (2).

4. Insert the prepositions where necessary.

1. We live ___ Bălţi. 2. They work ___ the office. 3. I usually go ___ the office ___ the morning. 4. My friends seldom speak English ___ me. 5. Do you speak English or Romanian ___ your parents? 6. Where is your pencil? Is it ___ the table? – No, it isn’t. It is ___ the floor. 7. Take your pen ___ ___ your bag and write this sentence. 8. I usually go ___ the office _____ the lessons. 9. ___ our lessons we usually write many exercises ___ the blackboard. ___ home we usually write ___ our copy-books. 10. ___ the morning the teacher and the students come ___ the classroom and sit down ___ their tables. 11. What do you usually do ___ your English lessons? – We read, write and speak English ___ our lessons.

5. Insert the definite or the indefinite article if necessary.

My sister is ___ student. Her friends are also ___ students. They live in Chişinău. They study ___ English. They usually study in ___ morning. Their classroom is large. ___ walls of ___ classroom are yellow. ___ students come into ___ classroom and sit down at ___ tables. They usually do ___ exercises, write ___ dictations and study English grammar at ___ lessons. They also often write on ___ blackboard. They do ___ exercises at ___ home too.

6. Translate these sentences. Use the right tense form.

1. Deschideţi manualele, găsiţi pagina opt şi citiţi textul. 2. Unde mergeţi în fiecare zi? 3. Ce citesc studenţii dumneavoastră de obicei? 4. Aşezaţi-vă la masă, luaţi manualele, stilourile şi caietele şi copiaţi textul numărul cinci. 5. Prietenii lui citesc cărţi în engleză? – Da. 6. Nu

18

închideţi cartea, citiţi textul numărul patru. 7. Aceşti businessmani nu vin aici în fiecare zi. 8. Surorile mele nu-mi trimit cărţi şi ziare. 9. Ce fel de texte copiaţi de obicei acasă? – Noi copiem texte noi. 10. Ce fel de film este acesta? – Acesta este un film bun. 11. Ce fel de ziare citesc studenţii din grupa voastră? 12. Aceşti elevi iau des cărţi de aici? – Da. 13. Aceşti economişti vin rar aici. 14. Unde mergeţi de obicei seara? 15. Vă întâlniţi des cu aceşti economişti?

VOCABULARY EXERCISES

7. Notice how the following nouns are formed.

teacher, exercise-book, blackboard, usually, writer, reader, doer, speaker, worker, dictation, ink-stand, badly.

8. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. What is your name?2. Do you live in Chişinău or in Bălţi?3. Do you live in the centre of the town?4. Where do you work?5. Are you a doctor?6. What are you?7. Do you study?8. Where do you study?9. What do you do during your lessons?10. Where do you write exercises?11. Do you usually do many exercises at the lesson?12. Do you often write dictations?13. Do you do many or few exercises at home?14. Do you often or seldom speak English to your teacher?15. What language do you sometimes speak at the lessons?16. Where do you go after lessons?17. What kind of books do you usually read?18. Where do you usually go in the evening?


1. I work at an office (1). 2. In the evening we usually study foreign languages (3). 3. They often speak English at their lessons (2). 4. We write many sentences on the blackboard (2). 5. After my English lesson I go to the office (2). 6. You read English books at home (2). 7. We read, write and speak English during our lessons (1). 8. We always come to the office in the morning (2).

10. Insert the appropriate word from the list below.

(a blackboard, to speak, to study, to write, to live, to go, to work, a lesson, an engineer, an office, to do)I am __________ . I ______ in Chşinău and _________ at an office. I also _________ English there. At the lesson we ________ many exercises and _________ many sentences on _______ . We usually ______ English to our teacher at _______ . After the lessons I ________ to the _______ .

19

11. Arrange the following words to make sentences.

1) the classroom, we, sit down, come, into, and, the, at, tables.2) write, do, many, we, not, sentences, our, at, lessons.3) to, speak, usually, you, teacher, English, your, do?4) the lessons, sometimes, Romanian, they, at, speak.5) study, foreign, in the evening, you, languages, do?

12. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. În ce oficiu lucrează aceşti economişti? – Ei tot lucrează în oficiul nostru. 2. Dimineaţa eu intru în clasă şi mă aşez la masa mea. 3. În timpul lecţiei noi citim, scriem dictări şi exerciţii şi vorbim în engleză. 4. Acest exerciţiu este foarte (very) lung. Scrieţi-l acasă. 5. În ce limbă vorbiţi de obicei cu surorile dumneavoastră? – De obieci vorbim în română. Noi vorbim de asemeni în franceză. Surorile mele studiază limba franceză. 6. Eu nu vorbesc în engleză acasă. Eu vorbesc în engleză la lecţiile de limbă engleză. 7. Nu faceţi primul exerciţiu acum. Faceţi-l acasă. 8. Citiţi cărţi franceze? – Nu, eu nu studiez limba franceză. 9. Surorile dumneavoastră trăiesc în Chişinău? – Nu, ele nu trăiesc în Chişinău. Ele trăiesc în Bălţi. Ele lucrează acolo. 10. Ce faceţi după lucru? – Câteodată mergem la lecţii. 11. Ale cui sunt aceste cărţi? – Acestea sunt cărţile mele. – Aceste cărţi sunt franceze sau engleze? – Acestea sunt cărţi engleze. 12. Ce limbi studiaţi? 13. De obicei scrieţi multe propoziţii la tablă? – De obicei noi scriem la tablă cinci sau şase propoziţii. Câteodată scriem şapte sau opt propoziţii. 14. Eu locuiesc la Bălţi. Eu învăţ acolo. Bălţi este un oraş liniştit (quiet). El nu este mare. Eu studiez limba franceză. Merg la lecţii seara. În timpul lecţiilor de obicei scriem puţine exerciţii. Noi vorbim în franceză cu profesorul nostru. Câteodată noi vorbim franceza după lecţii. 15. Unde trăiţi? – Eu trăiesc în Chişinău în centrul oraşului. – Studiaţi şi lucraţi? – Da, eu studiez şi lucrez. – Studiaţi limba engleză? – Da. – Unde studiaţi engleza? – În oficiul meu. – Când mergeţi la lecţii? – Seara. – Ce faceţi de obicei în timpul lecţiilor? – Studiem gramatica, facem exerciţii, citim şi discutăm. – Citiţi multe sau puţine cărţi engleze? – Noi citim puţine cărţi engleze. – Ce fel de cărţi citiţi? – Noi citim manualele noastre. – Vorbiţi englezeşte sau româneşte cu profesorul dumneavoastră? – De obicei noi vorbim englezeşte, iar câteodată româneşte.

20

LESSON TWO (THE SECOND LESSON)

WE STUDY FOREIGN LANGUAGES (continued)

My sister is an economist. She works together with me. She goes to the office every day. My sister does not study English. She already knows English very well. She reads many English books, magazines and newspapers. She also knows French. At her office she sometimes writes letters to foreign firms. She often translates telegrams from Romanian into English and from English into Romanian.

My sister is also a student. She studies German. She is a very good student. She usually gets good marks. She always comes to her lessons in time.

My sister and I usually go home together.In the evening we prepare our home task. We learn new words, read texts and write

exercises. We also repeat grammar rules. We sometimes speak English at home. We speak about our work and our lessons.

* * *– Does your sister study or does she work? – She works.– Where does she work? – She works together with me.– Is your sister an economist? – Yes, she is.– Does she know English well? – Yes, she does.– Does she study French? – No, she does not. (No, she doesn’t).– What language does she study? – She studies German.– How does she know German? – She knows German well.– What does she usually speak about* at the lessons? – She speaks about her work.

* What does she usually speak about? – Despre ce ea vorbşte de obicei?În cazul acestui tip de întrebare, în limba engleză prepoziţia about este plasată direct după verb, cu toate că este posibilă şi varianta când această prepoziţie se plasează după pronumele interogativ what: What about does she speak?


second - al doilea to get - a primi, a obţinean economist - un economist time - timptogether – împreună to be in time - a fi la timpalready – deja home - acasăto know - a şti, a cunoaşte a home-task - lucru pentru acasăvery – foarte a homework – tema de acasăwell - bine (adv.) to prepare – a (se) pregătia magazine - o revistă to prepare for – a (se) pregăti pentrua letter - o scrisoare to learn - a învăţa, a studiaa firm - o firmă to repeat - a repetato translate (from... into ...) - a traduce (din... în...) a rule - o regulăa telegram - o telegramă about - despreGerman - limba germană how - cum

21

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Put the following verbs in the Present Indefinite Tense.

to close, to go, to open, to read, to sit down, to live, to work, to study, to come, to write, to do, to speak, to send, to meet, to give, to take, to copy, to put.

2. Insert the right pronoun.

1. ___ lives in Bălţi. 2. ____ come into their classroom and sit down at the tables. 3. Does ___ sometimes meet his friends at the office? Yes, ___ does. 4. ___ study English at the office in the morning. 5. ___ does not speak English to her teacher. 6. Do ____ sometimes speak Romanian at their lessons? Yes, ____ do. 7. Where do ___ study? ___ study at the university. 8. ___ do not study English. ___ study French. 9. ___ am also a student. 10. Does ___ work or study? ___ works at an office. 11. Do ____ go to the office in the morning? Yes, ____ do. 12. ___ does not often write sentences on the blackboard. 13. ___ do not read English books every day. 14. What do ___ usually read at the lessons? ___ usually read our textbooks. 15. Where does ___ go every day? ___ goes to the office every day.

3. Put the following sentences into negative and interrogative forms.

1. His name is John. 2. His sister lives in London. 3. My friend studies English. 4. Our teacher speaks French. 5. This economist works at our office. 6. His sister goes to the office in the morning. 7. Her friend writes English sentences at home. 8. They do many exercises at home.

4. Answer these questions.

1. Does your sister work?2. Where does she work?3. Does she study a foreign language?4. What language does she study?5. Does your friend go to English lessons every day?6. Does he study French too?7. What does he do during the English lessons?8. Does your sister work or study?9. When does she go to the office?10. Are you a student?11. Do you study German?12. Does your friend study German too?13. Is he a good student?14. Where does your sister work?15. Where do you study?16. What kind of books do you read?17. When do you study English?

5. Translate.

1. Unde trăieşte acest medic? 2. Aceşti studenţi trăiesc în Chişinău. 3. Sora lui studiază engleza şi franceza. 4. Unde lucrează acest profesor? – El lucrează la universitate. 5. Surorile lui trăiesc la Chişinău sau la Bălţi? – Ele trăiesc la Bălţi. 6. Prietenul său nu lucrează, el învaţă. 7. Ce fel de exerciţii el face de obicei acasă? 8. Prietenii lui nu studiază engleza. 9. Gabriel scrie multe

22

exerciţii engleze acasă. El studiază limba engleză, dar nu citeşte cărţi engleze. 10. Aceşti economişti vin des în oficiul dumneavoastră? – Nu. 11. Acest om nu vorbeşte franceza. 12. Ce fel de cărţi citeşte acest economist? 13. Faceţi multe exerciţii acasă? – Da. – Când faceţi de obicei lecţiile? – De obicei îmi fac lecţiile seara. 14. Unde trimiteţi câteodată scrisori şi telegrame? 15. Când prietenul dumneavoastră face de obicei tema de acasă? 16. Sora lui nu lucrează, ea învaţă.

6. Insert the preposition if necessary.

1. Don’t translate these letters ____ English. Translate these letters ___ French. 2. Peter always comes ___ the office ___ time. 3. We sometimes read Romanian and English books ___ the evening. 4. ___ our English lessons we often go ___ the blackboard. We write many sentences ___ blackboard. 5. Where does he usually go ____ his work? – He usually goes ___ his English lesson. 6. Does your sister speak ___ German? – No, she doesn’t. She speaks ___ English and French. 7. ___ the morning our teacher comes ___ the classroom, puts his bag ___ the table and sits down ___ his table. 8. I sometimes speak ___ English ____ my son. 9. Tell her ____ your friends. 10. Gabriel, translate this text ____ Romanian ____ English, please. 11. Do you usually speak ____ books ___ your friends? – Yes, I do. 12. My friends usually go ___ their lessons and then go ___ home. 13. What do you usually speak ____ ___ your friends ____ the lesson ___ the morning?


My friend is ___ economist. He works at ___ office. He knows ___ French and ___ German. He studies ___ English. He is ___ good student. He often reads ___ English books at ___ home. He usually goes to his lessons in ___ morning. He always comes there in ___ time. At ___ office he gets ___ English magazines and newspapers. In ___ evening he prepares his home task. He often translates ___ sentences from ___ Romanian into ___ English. He often gets ___ good marks.

8. Use the verbs in brackets in the right form.

1. He often (to meet) Peter at his office. 2. You (to speak) English? – Yes, I (to do). 3. I usually (to come) home in the evening. 4. Ann (to be) an economist. She (to live) far from her office? – No, she (not to do). She (not to live) far from her office. 5. He sometimes (to translate) letters and telegrams from Romanian into English. 6. His sister (not to study) German. 7. We often (to send) e-mails to our boss. 8. Your friend (to be) a student? 9. He always (to prepare) his lessons well? What marks he usually (to get)? – He usually (to get) good marks. 10. They (to take) English lessons every day? 11. You often (to repeat) the words of these texts? 12. The words of the second lesson (not to be) new. We already (to know) these words very well.


9. Read aloud the following words and text fragments.

writes, works, translates, lives, knows, studies, letters, firms, telegrams;knife, know, knock, knave, knee, knit, knew, knot;rule, blue, flute, rude, ruby, allude.

My ´sister is an economist. At her office | she ´sometimes ´writes letters | to ´foreign firms. She óften trans´lates telegrams | from ´Romanian into English | and from Énglish into Romanian.

23

* * *– ´Does your ´sister study | or ´does she work? – She works. – ´How does she ´know German? – She ´knows ´German well.


1. My sister is an economist (1). 2. His sister lives in Chişinău (1). 3. My sister often sends me letters (1). 4. They speak German well (1). 5. This student goes to his lessons in the morning (1). 6. He usually gets good marks (1). 7. My friend prepares her home task in the evening (3). 8. My sister learns many new words at her lessons (2).

11. Translate and pay attention to the bold words.

a) 1. Ştiţi tema voastră de acasă? – Da, eu ştiu bine tema mea de acasă. 2. El scrie des scrisori prietenilor săi. 3. Ea îşi face de obicei lecţiile seara. 4. Noi vorbim des engleza cu profesorul nostru. 5. Ei discută câteodată cu prietenii lor despre cărţi noi. 6. Prietenul meu dă des prietenilor săi cărţile sale. 7. Povesteşte-mi despre lucrul tău. 8. Scrieţi prietenilor voştri o scrisoare.b) 1. Ce limbă studiaţi? 2. Noi învăţăm multe cuvinte noi. 3. Voi învăţaţi regulile gramaticale acasă? 4. Eu studiez gramatica limbii engleze.

12. Translate.

1. Cine este fata aceasta? – Ea este sora mea. – Ce este sora dumneavoatră (după profesie)? – Ea este economist. 2. Ce limbă ştiţi foarte bine? – Eu ştiu foarte bine limba germană. 3. Când prietenul dumneavoastră face de obicei lecţiile? – El face de obicei lecţiile seara. 4. Cum învaţă prietenul dumneavoastră? – El învaţă bine. 5. Sora dumneavoastră studiază gramatica limbii germane? 6. Ea învaţă multe cuvinte noi din reviste. 7. Traduceţi des texte în timpul lecţiilor? – Nu. Noi de obicei traducem textele acasă. 8. Eu îl cunosc pe acest om. El lucrează împreună cu mine. 9. Nu repetaţi exerciţiile de la a doua lecţie acum. Faceţi aceasta acasă. 10. Gabriel ştie deja multe cuvinte în limba engleză. El deja citeşte reviste şi ziare engleze. 11. Fiecare student citeşte de obicei câte două sau trei propoziţii la fiecare lecţie. 12. Nu trimiteţi această telegramă dimineaţa. Trimiteţi-o seara. 13. Unde lucrează acest economist? – El lucrează aici împreună cu mine. 14. Ana este o studentă bună? Ea cum învaţă? – Ea învaţă bine. 15. Unde lucrează sora dumneavoastră? – Ea lucrează în acest oficiu. – Ea vă povesteşte des despre lucrul ei? – Da. 16. Acest student de obicei traduce multe articole din reviste străine. 17. Când vă faceţi de obicei lecţiile? – Eu îmi fac de obicei lecţiile seara. 18. Prietenul dumneavoastră primeşte note bune sau rele? – El întotdeauna primeşte note bune. 19. Aceşti studenţi vin la lecţii la timp? 20. Repetaţi această propoziţie, vă rog. 21. Învăţaţi această regulă gramaticală acasă. 22. Nu vorbiţi cu Ana în germană. Ea vorbeşte rău în această limbă. 23. Voi nu ştiţi aceste cuvinte. Repetaţi aceste cuvinte acasă.

13. Make a short story about your friend using the words given below.

to live, a name, to work, an economist, to know, to go, to come, in time, to translate, foreign, many, a magazine, in the evening, in the morning, an office, to speak, very well, together, about, with, in the centre of.

24

LESSON THREE (THE THIRD LESSON)

THE WORKING DAY OF AN ECONOMIST

Mihai works at an office. He lives near his office. He usually walks there. He works on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. He does not work on Saturday and Sunday.His working day lasts eight hours, but on Friday he works only six hours. In the morning he receives very many letters and e-mails. He always answers them.He sometimes translates articles from foreign newspapers and magazines. He often receives colleagues from other firms. They discuss many questions with him. He usually finishes work at five o’clock in the evening. On Friday he finishes work at three o’clock in the afternoon.Mihai studies English. He works hard at his English. He sometimes stays at his office after work to take English lessons. After the lessons he returns home.

* * *– Who works at this office? – Mihai does.– Whom does he often receive at the office? – He often receives economists from other firms.– Does he live far from his office? – No, he doesn’t. He lives near it.– When does he usually finish work? – He finishes work at five o’clock in the evening.– (At) what time does he usually return home on Friday? – He usually returnes home at three o’clock on Friday.– What language does he study? – He studies English.– Does he study English in the morning or in the evening? – He studies English in the evening.


a working day - o zi de lucru to discuss - a discutaMonday – luni to finish - a terminaTuesday – marţi to stay - a staWednesday – miercuri to return - a se întoarceThursday – joi at five o’clock - la ora cinciFriday – vineri in the afternoon - după amiazăSaturday – sâmbătă near (ant. far) - lângă (ant. departe)Sunday – duminică hard - greu, din greuarticle – articol other - alt(a), alţi (altele)colleague – coleg only - doar, numaito walk - a merge (pe jos) to last - a durato answer - a răspunde

25

GRAMMAR

PLURAL OF THE NOUNS

General rule: noun (sing.) + sEx.: cat – cats, boy – boys, girl – girls, article – articles, etc.

Nouns ending in: -ss, -sh, -ch, -x, -o + esEx.: kiss – kisses, bush – bushes, arch – arches, box – boxes, potato – potatoes, etc.

Nouns ending in: -f, -fe “f” changes in “v” + esEx.: leaf – leaves, life – lives, loaf – loaves, knife – knives, wife – wives, etc.

Nouns ending in: consonant + y, “y” changes in “i” + esEx.: sky – skies, fly – flies, cry – cries, etc.

☼ Exceptions:

analysis – analysesantenna – antennaebasis – basesboar – boarbob – bobbusinessman – businessmenchild – childrencrisis – crisesdatum – datadeer – deererratum – erratafocus – focifoot – feet

goose – geesehypothesis – hypotheseslouse – liceman – menmoose – moosemouse – miceox – oxenphenomenon – phenomenaquid – quidsheep – sheepswine – swinethesis – theseswoman – women

many, few – with countable nouns (ex.: many/few boys, many/few books, many/few people, etc.)I have many friends. How many friends do I have?

much, little – with uncountable nouns (ex.: much/little sugar, much/little water, much/little work, etc.)I have much work to do. How much work do I have to do?He works very much.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS

Subject case Object caseWho? Whom? Pe cine? Cui?

Iyou

he, she, itweyouthey

me you

him, her, itus

youthem

pe mine miepe tine ţiepe el, pe ea lui, eipe noi nouăpe voi vouăpe ei lor

26

Examples: I am at the lesson now. The teacher asks me this question.Who is at the lesson now? Whom does the teacher ask this question?

He has no book. She gives this book to him.Who has no book? Whom does she give this book? They are in the classroom. Nick shows them that map. Who is in the classroom? Whom does Nick show that map?

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Give the plural of the following nouns.

boy, mark, teacher, lesson, student, fly, sentence, office, wife, letter, economist, firm, girl, worker, magazine, engineer, sister, knife, book, man, friend, mouse, word, name, cry, day, task, research, cash, leaf, fox, tomato, child, woman, analysis, hat, datum, goose, film, thesis, tooth, spy.

2. Use the appropriate pronoun in object case.

1. These exercises are very good. Prepare ____ at home. 2. This economist lives in our house. I know ___ well. 3. Write these words in your copybooks and learn ____. 4. Read this letter and translate ___ from English into Romanian. 5. Ann is my sister. She usually prepares her home task together with ___. 6. He knows that girl. She studies English with ___. 7. This book is very interesting. Take ___ from Nick. 8. My friends are in my flat now. I show ____ all the rooms. 9. Bob, give ___ that red pencil, please. 10. Take this magazine and read ___ at home. 11. Does he often speak to ___ about his problems? 12. These books are very good. Where do you get ____? 13. My sister knows English well. I often prepare my home task together with ___. 14. Read these words and learn ___ well. 15. I don’t know ___. What is his name?


1. These boys usually get good marks (2). 2. Our teacher always speaks English at our lessons (3). 3. The students often translate sentences from Romanian into English (3). 4. At the office my sister usually writes letters and e-mails (4). 5. We sometimes study English in the evening (3). 6. In the morning these economists go to their offices (3). 7. Those girls are economists (2). 8. These students read foreign magazines in the evening (4). 9. I am a teacher (2). 10. His sisters already know French (3).

4. Insert the right article where necessary.

Ann is ___ economist. She works at ___ foreign firm. ___ office is not far from ___ centre of the town. Ann usually goes there in ___ morning. She finishes work at four o’clock in ___ afternoon. Her sister is ___ student, she lives in Bălţi. She studies ___ German. Ann often receives ___ letters from her sister. She sometimes goes to ___ Bălţi to stay with her sister.

5. Use the verbs in brackets in the right form.

1. They (to finish) their lesson at ten o’clock? 2. He usually (to walk) home after work. 3. At what office (to work) Mihai? 4. He (not to work) hard at his German. 5. Whose working day (to last) six hours? 6. Your working day (to last) eight hours? 7. How long your working day (to

27

last)? 8. This economist usually (to return) home at seven o’clock in the evening. 9. You (to answer) many questions at your lessons? 10. Your sister often (to stay) at the office after work? 11. I often (not to receive) letters from my friends. I (to receive) many e-mails from them. 12. Mihai often (to answer) many letters and e-mails. 13. Who often (to discuss) many questions with these students? 14. How they (to know) English? – They (to know) English very well. 15. The students (to repeat) the new words at home or at the lesson? – They (to repeat) them at home.

6. Translate.

a) 1. Cine vă dă să citiţi cărţi engleze? – Profesorul meu. 2. Cine dintre ei lucrează în acest oficiu? – Mihai. 3. Cine dintre voi cunoaşte bine limba engleză? – Gabriel. 4. Cine vine la oficiu la ora opt dimineaţa? – Noi. 5. Cine dintre voi de obicei traduce articole din reviste străine? – Domnul Brown. 6. Cine scrie scrisori firmelor străine? – Eu. 7. A cui soră studiază limba franceză? – Sora mea. 8. A cui este această carte? – Aceasta este cartea lui. 9. A cui carte o luaţi de obicei la lecţie? 10. Cine studiază limba germană la oficiul nostru? – Ana şi Kate. 11. Al cui prieten primeşte des note bune? – Prietenul lui.b) 1. Sora mea lucrează foarte mult. 2. Ei citesc multe cărţi engleze. 3. Prietenul tău lucrează mult? – Nu. Acum el lucrează puţin. 4. Profesorul ne pune multe întrebări. 5. Cine în grupa voastră învaţă puţin? – Tom. 6. Eu citesc puţine cărţi franceze. 7. Prietenii voştri învaţă mult sau puţin? – Prietenii noştri învaţă mult. 8. Noi citim foarte mult şi scriem puţin în timpul lecţiei. 9. Fiul dumneavoastră citeşte mult? – Da. El citeşte mult după lecţii şi duminica în timpul zilei.


7. Read the following words aloud.

lasts, does, receives, answers, translates, discusses, finishes, studies, returns, stays, letters, telegrams, questions, tells, texts, cities, books, articles;

Tuesday, Monday, holiday, Sunday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Wednesday, stay, play, gay, day, hockey, money, storey, steel, leap, feel, fear, deer, dear, clear, deep, steer.

8. Answer the questions.

1. Who works at an office?2. Does your friend live far from his office?3. Does he walk to his office?4. On what days does he work?5. Does he work hard on weekdays?6. What does he do on his days off?7. Where does he usually spend his weekends?8. How long does his working day last?9. How many hours a day does he work?10. When does your friend receive letters and e-mails?11. Does he always answer them?12. What does he sometimes translate?13. Whom does he often receive?14. What do they discuss?15. When does he usually finish work?

28

9. Ask alternative questions to the bold words.

1. He lives near Chişinău. 2. My wife works at an office. 3. My friend often receives many letters and e-mails. 4. Our English lesson lasts two hours. 5. Tom answers many letters and e-mails every day. 6. This economist always finishes work at six o’clock in the evening. 7. My sister reads many articles in foreign newspapers every day.

10. Finish the following sentences.

1. I receive ...2. My sister comes ...3. We usually finish ...4. He goes ...5. Our lesson lasts ...

6. My friend lives ...7. I have classes on ...8. Every day you receive ...9. They discuss about ...10. He comes to the university ...

11. Make sentences using the given words.

on Saturday, to discuss (with), to stay, questions, to go home, after work, before the lessons, together with, to live, working day, to answer, to translate (from... into... ), in time, to prepare (for), to walk, at home, very much, in the centre of, to work (at), during the lesson, to speak (about), near my house, far from the office.

12. Translate.

a) 1. Pe cine întâlniţi des în oficiul dumneavoastră? – Eu îl întâlnesc des acolo pe Mihai. 2. Eu locuiesc nu departe (aproape) de oficiul meu. Eu merg de obieci pe jos acolo. 3. În ce zile lucraţi aici? – Eu lucrez aici lunea, marţea şi joia. Eu nu vin aici miercurea şi sâmbăta. 4. Lucraţi duminica? – Nu. Eu nu lucrez duminica. 5. Cât durează ziua dumneavoastră de lucru? – Ea durează opt ore. Eu de obicei termin lucrul la ora şase seara. 6. Ce este sora dumneavoastră? – Sora mea este medic. Ea trăieşte departe de noi. Eu primesc des scrisori de la ea. – Despre ce ea vă scrie? – Ea scrie despre viaţa sa. 7. Al cui prieten lucrează la o firmă nu departe de Bălţi? – Prietenul nostru. 8. Noi lucrăm la oficiu opt ore. Noi venim acasă la ora şase seara. 9. Cine dintre ei traduce întotdeauna articole din ziare străine? – Gabriel. 10. Mergeţi la oficiu dimineaţa? – Da. – Cine rămâne cu fiul dumneavoastră? – Sora mea. Ea nu lucrează. – La ce oră vă întoarceţi de obicei acasă? – De obicei mă întorc acasă la ora şapte seara. 11. Rămâneţi des după lucru la oficiu? – Nu. De obicei termin lucrul la ora şase seara şi plec acasă. Eu rămân acolo după ora şase doar joia. 12. Repetaţi întrebarea dumneavoastră, vă rog. 13. Cum învaţă Tom? – El învaţă foarte bine. El lucrează foarte mult (din greu) acasă. 14. Nu discutaţi această întrebare acum. 15. Cu cine vă întoarceţi de obicei acasă? – Eu mă întorc de bicei acasă cu prietenii. 16. Sâmbăta şi duminica de obicei nu lucrez. Dimineaţa merg în parc (park). Seara scriu des e-mailuri prietenilor mei. Ei trăiesc în Londra. Acesta este un oraş mare şi frumos. Eu merg foarte rar (seldom) acolo. 17. Eu câteodată nu lucrez în zilele de lucru ale săptămânii, dar studiez. 18. Eu cunosc doar o singură limbă străină.

b) Cât durează ziua dumneavoastră de lucru? – Ea durează opt ore. – Ce faceţi la oficiu? – Eu răspund la scrisori şi e-mailuri. Eu citesc reviste, traduc articole din aceste reviste şi discut multe întrebări cu colegii mei. – Când de obicei terminaţi lucrul? – De obicei termin lucrul la ora cinci. – Trăiţi departe de oficiul dumneavoastră? – Nu. Eu trăiesc aproape de el şi întotdeauna merg acasă pe jos. – Studiaţi limba germană sau deja o cunoaşteţi bine? – Eu studiez limba germană. – Când studiaţi? – Studiem lunea, miercurea şi vinerea seara, iar marţia şi joia dimineaţa. – Cât durează lecţia dumneavoastră? – Două ore. Când mă întorc acasă eu citesc de obicei reviste, fac tema de acasă şi scriu e-mailuri. Eu primesc multe e-mailuri şi întotdeauna răspund la ele. – Cine

29

traduce articole din reviste străine la oficiul dumneavoastră? – Mihai. El cunoaşte limba engleză şi limba franceză. – Cum cunoaşte el aceste limbi? – El le cunoaşte bine. – Cine traduce scrisorile din limba germană? – Eu.

13. Make a dialog on the topic “Our English Lesson” using the words given below.

colleague, near, to walk, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, to last, an hour, to answer, a question, to translate, to discuss, to finish, at ten o’clock, to work (at), hard, to stay, only.

14. Imagine you are already an economist. Describe your working day.

30

LESSON FOUR (THE FOURTH LESSON)

THE WORKING DAY OF AN ECONOMIST

My friend Mihai lives in Bălţi now. Two years ago he lived in Chişinău and worked at an office. He lived near his office. He usually walked there. He worked on week-days. He worked hard. He did not work on Saturday and Sunday. Sometimes he stayed with his friends over the weekend. His working day lasted eight hours, but on Fridays he worked only six hours. In the morning he received very many letters and e-mails. He always answered them. He sometimes translated articles from foreign newspapers and magazines. He often received colleagues from other firms. They discussed many questions with him. He usually finished work at five o’clock in the evening. On Friday he finished work at three o’clock in the afternoon.Mihai studied English. He worked hard at his English. He sometimes stayed at his office after work to take English lessons. After the lessons he returned home.

* * *– Who worked at an office two years ago? – Mihai did.– Whom did Mihai receive at the office? – He often received colleagues from other firms.– Did he live far from his office? – No, he didn’t. He lived near it.– When did he usually finish work? – He finished work at five o’clock in the evening.– (At) what time did he usually return home on Friday? – He usually returned home at three o’clock on Friday.– What language did he study? – He studied English.– Did he study English in the morning or in the evening? – He studied English in the evening.


yesterday - ierithe day before yesterday - alaltăierilast night - noaptea trecutălast month - luna trecutălast week - săptămâna trecutălast year - anul trecutlast time - ultima dată... days (years, months, etc.) ago - ... zile (ani, luni, etc.) în urmă

GRAMMAR

PAST INDEFINITE (SIMPLE) TENSE

to be to have to do

I was I had I didYou were You had You didHe (she, it) was He (she, it) had He (she, it) didWe were We had We didYou were You had You didThey were They had They did

31

Examples: Last year I was in London. I was not here. Was I in London last year?Yesterday I had an important meeting. I hadn’t (didn’t have) an English class. Had I (Did I have) an important meeting yesterday?I did my homework two days ago. I didn’t do my homework two days ago. Did I do my homework two days ago?

Regular verbs

General rule: verb + edEx.: to work – I worked, you worked, he (she, it) worked, we worked, you worked, they worked.

Verbs ending in “e”: verb + dEx.: to hate – I hated, you hated, he (she, it) hated, we hated, you hated, they hated.

Verbs ending in consonant + y, “y” changes in “i” + edEx.: to cry – I cried, you cried, he (she, it) cried, we cried, you cried, they cried.

Verbs ending in “p”, “b”, “t”, “d” in a short syllable – double the consonant Ex.: to stop – I stopped, you stopped, he (she) stopped, etc.

to nod – I nodded, you nodded, etc.

Irregular verbs

Irregular verbs have special forms for the Past Indefinite Tense. Here are some of them:

to bear – boreto beat – beatto begin – beganto bend – bentto bet – betto bite – bitto break – broketo bring – broughtto build – builtto buy – boughtto catch – coughtto come - cameto choose – choseto cost – costto cut – cutto do – didto drink – drankto fall – fellto feel – feltto find – found

to fly – flewto get – gotto give – gaveto go – wentto grow – grewto hear – heardto hold – heldto keep – keptto know – knewto lead – ledto leave – leftto let – letto lose – lostto make – madeto mean – meantto meet – metto put – putto read – read [red]to retell – retoldto rise – rose

to run – ranto see – sawto sell – soldto send – sentto set – setto shut – shutto sit – satto sleep – sleptto smell – smeltto speak – spoketo spend – spentto stand – stoodto strike – struckto take – tookto teach – toughtto think – thoughtto understand – understoodto win – wonto write – wrote

Examples: I bought a new book. He put his brown hat. We understood English, etc.

32

Negative and interrogative forms:

negative

I didn’t (did not) workYou didn’t stay

He (she, it) didn’t leaveWe didn’t writeYou didn’t putThey didn’t go

interrogative

Did I workDid you stay

Did he (she, it) leaveDid we writeDid you putDid they go

NUMERALS INDICATING YEARS

1900 – nineteen hundred;1905 – nineteen o five;1925 – nineteen twenty-five;

1980 – nineteen eighty;2000 – twenty hundred;2004 – twenty o four; etc.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Translate into English and make the Past Indefinite Tense.

a mulţumi, a deschide, a privi, a închide, a trăi, a lucra, a înţelege, a studia, a traduce, a zbura, a pregăti, a scrie, a învăţa, a merge pe jos, a citi, a se întoarce, a rămâne, a dura, a veni, a primi, a lua, a da, a merge, a discuta, a răspunde, a repeta, a vedea, a copia.

2. Write the following sentences into the past.

1. My working day lasts eight hours. 2. Do you often receive letters from your friends? 3. He returns home at eight o’clock in the evening. 4. We discuss many questions with economists from other firms. 5. Do they often stay at the office after six o’clock?

3. Make the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.

1. He opened the window in our classroom before the lesson yesterday. 2. I understood well this text. 3. Ann translated many foreign letters at the office last week. 4. He took those books from the library. 5. I finished work at six o’clock the day before yesterday. 6. Nick read an interesting article yesterday. 7. You studied German five years ago. 8. They returned home in the evening. 9. They discussed many articles from these English magazines last weekend. 10. We went to Chişinău last month.

4. Use the verbs in brackets in the right form of the Past Indefinite Tense.

1. Who usually (to prepare) his lessons in this room? – This student (to do). 2. Last year I (to live) near my office. I always (to walk) there. 3. How your friend (to speak) English? – He (to speak) English badly. 4. When you (to return) home the day before yesterday? – I (to return) home at seven o’clock the day before yesterday. 5. What language you (to study) five years ago? – I (to study) French. 6. What economists you often (to receive)? 7. What teacher they (to receive) last week? 8. You (to stay) at the office after work the day before yesterday? – Yes, I (to do). – What you (to do) there? – I (to study) English there. 9. How long your lesson (to last) two days ago? – It (to last) one hour. 10. Who (to finish) his work at seven o’clock the day before yesterday? – I (to do). 11. With what economists you (to discuss) this question last week? – I (to

33

discuss) it with the economists from your office. 12. With whom you (to discuss) this question last weekend? – We (to discuss) it with my friend. 13. How he (to answer) his questions at the lesson yesterday? – He (to answer) them well. 14. I (not to work) at this office five years ago. 15. What your friend (to do) during the last English lesson? – During the last English lesson he (to read, to write and to speak) English. 16. How long you (to stay) in London last year? – I (to stay) there a month.

5. Fill in the spaces with the right form of the given verbs.

a) to walk, to return, to receive, to stay, to answer, to live.Last year I _____ in Constanţa a month. I _____ near the sea. Every day I _____ there in the morning and usually _____ there two or three hours. I often _____ e-mails from my friends. I usually _____ them in the evening. In September I _____ to Chişinău.b) to answer, to receive, to finish, to return, to work, to discuss. My friend Gabriel is an economist. He _____ at a big firm. He usually _____ eight hours. Yesterday he _____ work at seven o’clock. After work the colleagues _____ their plans. At eight o’clock Gabriel _____ home. In the evening he _____ two e-mails. He _____ these e-mails.

6. Write with letters.

1, 5, 8, 11, 12, 30, 34, 42, 50, 53, 3, 9, 90, 98, 100.

1870, 1868, 1825, 1773, 1837, 1918, 1708, 1800, 2001, 1998, 1986.

7. Translate. a cincia pagină, a douăsprezecea scrisoare, a treia carte, a douăzeci şi treia lecţie, al şaptesprezecelea articol, a cincisprezecea propoziţie, a noua lecţie, a şasea uşă, al patruzecelea ziar, a treisprezecea revistă.


8. Read aloud.

last, past, cast, fast, task, mask, ask;fate, mule, pump, fat, car, forth, went, lick, bite, spent, bit, tune, tiny, fume, birth, same, Sam, stern, clock, bone, rob, cute, robe, fur, list, turn, terms, stir, curly, volley, Friday, rule, knock, flute, clear, fear.


1. Who is your friend?2. What is your friend?3. Where does your friend live now?4. Where did you live two years ago?5. Where did your friend live three years ago?6. Where did your friend work then?7. Did he live far from his office?8. Did he walk to his office?9. On what days did he work?10. Which days are workdays?

34

11. Did your friend work much or little?12. On what days did he not work?13. What did he usually do on Sunday?14. How long did his working day last?15. Did he answer many letters and e-mails?16. Did he translate them at the office or at home?17. Did he translate letters into French or into German?18. What did he usually discuss with colleagues from other firms?19. When did he usually finish work?20. Did he return home at three o’clock on Wednesday or on Friday?


1. Mihai receives many economists from other firms (1). 2. I received a good mark yesterday (2). 3. They worked at a big firm in 2001 (4). 4. My sister stayed at the office after work yesterday (3). 5. You lived in that house ten years ago (3). 6. Ann often speaks about her son (2). 7. Gabriel translated seven English articles last week (3). 8. He knows English very well (2).

11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses.

1. Când v-aţi întors în Chişinău? – Eu m-am întors în Chişinău luna trecută. 2. Aţi lucrat la această firmă trei ani în urmă? – Da. – Cât dura ziua dumneavoastră de lucru? – Ziua mea de lucru dura opt ore. Noi terminam lucrul la ora cinci seara. 3. Despre ce este acest articol? 4. Când aţi discutat aceste întrebări? – Noi le-am discutat săptămâna trecută. 5. Când aţi răspuns la e-mailul prietenului dumneavoastră? – Am răspuns la ele ieri. 6. Cine dintre voi a tradus ieri acest articol? – Mihai. El întotdeuna traduce articole din reviste străine. 7. Cine i-a primit pe colegii din Germania două săptămâni în urmă? – Ana. Ea cunoaşte bine limba germană şi întotdeauna primeşte economişti germani. 8. Cine dintre voi a rămas la oficiu după ora şase? – Doar eu cu Nick. – Ce aţi făcut acolo? – Noi am învăţat limba engleză. Am repetat regulile gramaticale şi cuvintele noi. 9. Aţi răspuns la întrebări alaltăieri la lecţie? – Da. – Ce notă aţi primit? – Am primit o notă bună. Am răspuns bine, dar n-am ştiut două cuvinte din a treia lecţie. 10. Gabriel scrie bine în engleză, dar vorbeşte rău această limbă. 11. Primiţi reviste engleze în fiecare săptămână? – Da. – Când aţi primit această revistă? – Noi am primit-o săptămâna trecută. 12. Tom este scriitor (writer). Ieri am discutat cartea sa nouă. Ea este foarte interesantă. 13. Cu cine aţi discutat ieri seara după lucru? – Eu am discutat cu prietenii mei despre filmul nou. 14. Cât a durat acest film? – El a durat două ore.

12. Translate the dialogues.

a) Aţi locuit anul trecut în Bălţi? – Nu. Eu am trăit în Chişinău.– Unde aţi lucrat? – Am lucrat la o firmă străină.– Cunoaşteţi multe limbi străine? – Nu. Eu cunosc doar engleza şi franceza. Anul trecut am studiat acolo germana, dar o cunosc foarte rău. – Cunoaşteţi bine limba engleză? – Da. Eu citesc, scriu şi vorbesc engleza. Eu traduc des texte din română în engleză. – Sora dumneavoastră tot cunoaşte limba engleză? – Nu. Ea cunoaşte bine franceza. Ea citeşte multe cărţi franceze. b) Unde aţi lucrat patru ani în urmă? – Eu am lucrat la un oficiu.– În ce zile lucraţi? – Noi lucram lunea, marţea, miercurea, joia şi vinerea.– Lucraţi sâmbăta sau duminica? – Câteodată lucram sâmbăta, iar duminica pregăteam lecţiile.– Ce studiaţi? – Eu studiam limba engleză.

35

– Aveaţi lecţii de engleză dimineaţa sau seara după lucru? – De obicei făceam lecţii de engleză seara.– Când vă întorceaţi acasă după lecţii? – De obicei mă întorceam acasă la ora şapte seara, dar câteodată rămâneam la oficiu după lecţii pentru a discuta unele întrebări cu profesorul. – Vorbeaţi şi citeaţi bine în engleză? Ce note primeaţi de obicei? – Deseori primeam note bune. Eu lucram mult pentru engleză acasă.– Acum citiţi multe cărţi engleze? – Da, acum cunosc bine această limbă şi citesc multe cărţi engleze.– De unde luaţi aceste cărţi? – Le iau de la prietenii mei. Eu citesc de asemeni multe articole din reviste şi ziare engleze şi câteodată le traduc în română.

13. Write a dialog in the past using the given words and word combinations.

to live, to work (at), office, on weekdays, to study hard, to work hard (at), to stay, last night, to repeat, to learn, at the lesson, to answer, many questions, to translate (from... into...), to receive good marks, to last, to return home.

14. Write a short essay on the topic: My Working Day Yesterday

36

LESSON FIVE (THE FIFTH LESSON)

MY FRIEND’S LAST WEEKEND

A week ago my friend Gabriel came to Bălţi from Chişinău. On Saturday he came to see me and my family. We decided to spend the weekend together and Gabriel stayed with us till Monday.On Sunday we woke up late. We got up at nine o’clock, washed and dressed. Then we had breakfast.“What do you usually do on your days off?” Gabriel asked us at table.“We often go to the country,” my sister answered. “Sometimes we go to the theatre or to the cinema.”“Do you often go to the park?” Gabriel asked.“We were there last week. It is a good park. We like it very much. Do you want to go there, Gabriel?”“Oh, yes, I do. The weather is so fine today!”We went to the park together with our friends.In the park we skated and skied and had a very nice time.We came home at two o’clock. After dinner Gabriel and I played computer games and in the evening we went to the cinema. The film was interesting and not very long. It began at seven o’clock and about nine it was over. We did not want to go home so early and went to see our friends. They were very glad to see us and we had supper together.We returned home late, but we did not go to bed at once. Gabriel wrote two e-mails to his friends in Chişinău. At twelve o’clock we went to bed.


to see - a vedea a theatre - un teatruto go to see - a merge în vizită a cinema - un cinematografto come to see - a veni în vizită to like - a placea family - o familie to want - a vrea, a dorito decide - a hotărâ weather - timpto spend - a petrece so - aşadar, decitill - până (la) today - azito wake up - a se trezi to skate - a patinato get up - a se scula to ski - a schialate – târziu to have a nice time - a se distra bineearly – devreme to play - a (se) jucato wash - a (se) spăla to play computer games - a juca la calculatorto dress - a (se) îmbrăca interesting - interesantthen - apoi, pe urmă to begin - a începeto have breakfast - a lua micul dejun about nine - în jurul orei nouă... dinner - ... dejunul to be over - a se sfârşi... supper -... cina to be glad - a fi bucurosto go to the country - a merge la ţară once – odată

at once - imediat

37

GRAMMARPOSSESSIVE (GENITIVE) CASE

animatesingular plural

’s This man’s bookMy friend’s sister

These men’s bookMy friends’ sisters

of The book of this manThe sister of my friend

The books of these menThe sisters of my friend

inanimatesingular plural

’s __ __

of The door of this roomThe page of the book

The doors of these roomsThe pages of the book

Examples: We liked Tom’s report.name / son / my sister – my sister’s son’s name or the name of my sister’s son;

In oral speech we often meet such expressions as to my friend’s (la prietenul meu), at my sister’s (la sora mea), at the baker’s (la băcănie), etc.

Example: Yesterday I was at my sister’s. In the morning he went to his friend’s.

THE PLACE OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT COMPLIMENTS

I often write them lettersI often write letters to them.

Write Tom a letter.Write a letter to Tom.

I wrote a letter to Mr. Smith in the morning. Send it to him now.I received a letter yesterday. Read it to your friend.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Form the possessive case of the following nouns.

book / this studentblackboard / our classroomfriend / my sonnewspaper / this mantoys / his childrenwalls / my flatstreets / that town

car / her brothergroup / these studentsmark / the pupilattitude / peopleimage / this houseboy-friend / that girlcolour / my car

2. Translate.

38

a) 1. Camera prietenului meu. 2. Camerele prietenului meu. 3. Camera prietenilor mei. 4. Camerele prietenilor mei. 5. Fiul acestui economist. 6. Economiştii oficiului nostru. 7. Fiica acestui profesor. 8. Dictarea acestui student. 9. Scrisoarea acestor medici. 10. Cuvintele lecţiei a şaptea. 11. Copiii acestor profesori. 12. Prietenul lui Nick. 13. Scrisoarea lui Gabriel. 14. Apartamentul prietenului meu.b) 1. Numele fiului prietenului meu. 2. Numele surorii lui Tom. 3. Cărţile prietenului fiului meu. 4. Apartamentul surorii acestui student. 5. Numele copiilor acestor medici. 6. Caietele elevilor profesorului Smith. 7. Notele fiilor acestui economist.


1. Is this your son’s exercise-book?2. Whose exercise-book is this?3. Is that this boy’s or that girl’s exercise-book?4. Whose friend came to Bălţi last night?5. Does his wife work at a factory or at an office?6. Does your friend’s son study French or English?7. Whose sister works at an office?8. Does your friend’s sister or your sister know English very well?9. Does your sister’s son live in Chişinău?

4. Answer the questions using the words given in brackets.

1. Whose exercise-book is this? (my sister)2. Whose son lives in London? (my friend)3. Whose pen is on the table? (our teacher)4. Whose mark is good? (my son)5. Whose name is Nick? (my sister’s son)6. Whose name is Gabriel? (this student)

5. Translate paying attention to the use of possessive case.

1. Camera prietenului vostru este mare? – Nu, ea nu este mare. 2. Notele acestui student sunt de obicei bune. 3. Ieri nu aţi răspuns la întrebarea lui Nick. 4. Când s-a întors ieri acasă fiul surorii dumneavoastră? – Ieri fiul surorii mele s-a întors acasă târziu. 5. Soţia prietenului dumneavoastră vorbeşte bine engleza? – Da, soţia prietenului meu vorbeşte bine engleza. 6. Ale cui sunt aceste caiete? – Acestea sunt caietele acestor studenţi. 7. Acestea sunt reviste? – Da. – Ale cui sunt aceste reviste? – Acestea sunt revistele prietenului meu. 8. Când aţi citit e-mailul lui Gabriel? – Eu l-am citit alaltăieri. 9. Îi cunoaşteţi pe prietenii colegului dumneavoastră? – Da, eu îi cunosc. 10. Soţia acestui economist este medic sau profesoară? – Ea este medic.

6. Find the direct compliment and change it where possible.

1. Give me that magazine. 2. Take that exercise-book off the table and give it to me. 3. Write a letter to our friends. 4. Don’t open your exercise-book, read exercise ten to us from your exercise-book. 5. Yesterday he received many magazines and gave them to us. 6. Don’t give me this book. I read this book last month. 7. The day before yesterday we wrote a letter to that firm. 8. Give us this article. We want to read this article to our teacher. 9. Do you have a black pen? Give me your black pen, please. 10. My parents live in Chişinău. I often write letters to my parents. 7. Work on the model.

39

Ex.: Send this book to Tom. – Send Tom this book.1. Give this pen to Gabriel. 2. Write a letter to your parents. 3. Send an e-mail to your friend. 4. Give these books to our economists. 5. Tell this story to your son. 6. Write a telegram to his mother.

8. Use the verbs in brackets in the right tense form.

1. Yesterday (to be) my day off. I usually (to wake up) early on my days off. But sometimes I (not to get up) at once. Yesterday I (to get up) at eight o’clock. 2. When you (to have) breakfast yesterday? – I (to have) breakfast at nine o’clock in the morning. 3. We usually (to stay) over the weekend in the country, but we (not to go) to the country yesterday as the weather (to be) very bad. 4. My son (to be) a student. He (to study) very well. He always (to prepare) his lessons. Yesterday he (to get) three good marks. 5. When you (to be) at the theatre last time? – I (to be) at the theatre two weeks ago last time. 6. I usually (to go) to bed at eleven o’clock in the evening. Yesterday my friends (to come to see) me and I (to go) to bed at nine o’clock in the morning. 7. Where you (to be) yesterday? – I (to be) at the cinema. – You (to like) the new film? – Yes, I (to do). 8. Who (to give) you this magazine yesterday? – Nick (to do). – You (to read) it last night? – Yes, I (to do). – The articles in this magazine (to be) interesting? – Yes, they (to be).


9. Read aloud.

bread, weather, breakfast, dread, thread, breath, threat, spread, steady; ail, day, seat, new, soon, task, cow, stout, voice, took, soil, space, cast, sail, rain, ounce, last, steep, pen, stool, moist, stoop, want, wash, wasp, past.


1. Do you often see your friend from Chşinău?2. What is his name?3. What is your friend?4. Where does he work?5. Did he come to see you last month?6. Do you like to stay over the weekend with your family or with your friends?7. Do you like to stay at home on your days off?8. Do you like to spend your weekends in the country or in town?9. When do you usually get up on Sunday?10. When did you get up last Sunday?11. What did you do then?12. Where do you usually stay over the weekends?13. What did you do after breakfast?14. Do you go often to the park?15. Do you like to skate?16. Do you play computer games?17. Does your friend play computer games too?18. Do you often go to cinema?19. What do you like cinema or theatre?20. When did you go to the cinema last time?21. What film did you see there?

40

22. Was it interesting?23. When did you come home?24. What did you do after supper?25. When did you go to bed?


1. Last Sunday I went to the cinema with my friends (5). 2. My son was at the theatre the day before yesterday (4). 3. Little children always like to ask questions (3). 4. I came home very late two days ago (4). 5. My friend’s little son usually goes to bed early (2).

12. Translate paying attention to the pronouns in object case.

1. Eu am luat cărţile lui şi le-am citit. 2. Nu l-am văzut ieri. 3. Prietenii lor i-au vizitat săptămâna trecută. 4. Noi l-am întrebat: “Cum te cheamă?” 5. Cu cine aţi vorbit după micul dejun? – Noi am vorbit cu fiul lui. 6. Surorile lui au hotărât să-l viziteze şi săptămâna trecută au plecat la Chişinău. 7. Timpul era frumos şi eu l-am rugat să mă ia cu el în parc. 8. Unde l-aţi văzut luna trecută? – Noi l-am văzut la teatru. 9. Prietenii lui l-au întrebat despre lucru şi el a răspuns la întrebările lor. 10. Luaţi aceste reviste şi citiţi-le acasă.

13. Fill in the spaces with the right form of “to give” or “to take”.

1. _____ that red pencil off the table and _____ it to me. 2. Don’t _____ your children to the country. The weather is bad. 3. Your sister _____ me a very interesting book last week. I want to return it to her. _____ it, _____ it to her and thank her for it. 4. Where do you _____ English newspapers and magazines to read?


“Do you want to go to ___ country?” my friend asked me on our last day off. “Yes, I do”, I answered. “I want to go to ___ Central Park.” We came to ___ Central Park at eleven o’clock in ___ morning. ___ weather was fine. We walked in ___ park for three hours. At two o’clock in ___ afternoon we returned home. We had ___ dinner and rested ___ hour. In ___ evening we went to ___ cinema. (We often go to ___ cinema or to ___ theatre on Saturday or on Sunday). We saw ___ very interesting film. We liked ___ film very much. Then we went ___ home. At ___ home we had ___ supper, played ___ computer game and went to ___ bed at twelve o’clock.

15. Translate.

1. Cine v-a vizitat ieri? – Prietenii fiului meu. Noi am fost foarte bucuroşi să-i vedem. Ei au stat cu noi până seara. 2. Unde aţi petrecut ultimul dumneavoatră weekend? – Noi l-am petrecut la ţară. Ne-am întors în oraş seara târziu. 3. Unde aţi fost alaltăieri? – Am fost la cinema. – V-a plăcut filmul? – Da, mi-a plăcut foarte mult. – Când v-aţi întors acasă? – Eu m-am întors acasă târziu şi m-am culcat imediat. 4. Ieri la lecţie noi am citit un text nou. După aceea profesorul ne-a pus întrebări şi noi am răspuns la ele. Profesorul ne-a dat trei exerciţii să le facem acasă. 5. La ce oră aţi luat dejunul azi? – Eu am luat dejunul la ora trei după amiază. 6. Vă place să jucaţi la calculator? – Da. Dar anul acesta joc nu prea des. Anul trecut am jucat des. 7. Prietenii mei vin de obicei să mă vadă duminica. Noi discutăm multe întrebări şi mergem în parc. 8. De obicei eu petrec sfârşitul săptămânii cu familia mea. Duminica trecută noi am hotărât să plecăm la ţară. Am plecat acolo dimineaţa. Timpul era minunat. Ne-am întors în oraş seara târziu. 9. Seara de obicei studiez, dar câteodată merg la cinema sau la teatru. 10. Sora mea iubeşte să pună multe întrebări şi eu întotdeauna răspund la ele. 11. Surorii dumneavoatră îi place engleza? – Da, foarte

41

mult. Ea studiază mult şi cunoaşte limba engleză bine. 12. Cine din familia dumneavoatră cunoaşte bine franceza? – Fiul surorii mele. 13. Unde aţi fost ieri? Am venit la dumneavoatră, dar nu eraţi acasă. – Eu am fost la cinema. Mi-a plăcut filmul foarte mult. 14. Duminica trecută prietenul meu a dormit până la ora zece dimineaţa. Când s-a trezit, a hotărât să nu plece la ţară. El s-a sculat, s-a îmbrăcat, s-a spălat, a luat micul dejun şi s-a dus în parc. El s-a plimbat acolo până după amiază. La ora trei el a luat dejunul. După dejun prietenul meu a venit să mă vadă. Ne-am jucat la calculator şi după aceea am discutat puţin (a little). Am vrut să mergem la cinema, dar am hotărât să stăm acasă. La ora nouă prietenul meu a plecat acasă. La ora zece el a luat cina, a citit puţin şi s-a culcat. 15. Când aţi început să lucraţi ieri? – Eu am început să lucrez la ora zece, după lecţia de engleză. 16. Sora mea locuieşte lângă mine. Numele ei este Ana. Ea tot este studentă. Noi mergem la universitate împreună. După lecţii de obicei venim acasă sau mergem în parc.

16. Retell the text as if you were Gabriel.

LESSON SIX (THE SIXTH LESSON)

42

MY FRIEND’S FAMILY

My friend’s name is Daniel. He lives in Bucharest. His family is not very large. He has a wife and two children. His wife’s name is Jane. His children’s names are Ann and Nick.Daniel’s wife is a young woman. She is twenty-nine years old. She works at the university. She is a teacher. She has many students. The students’ marks are good. She has no bad students. My friend’s daughter is a girl of ten. She goes to primary school. At school she studies many subjects. She also studies English. She works hard and knows this language well. She usually makes few mistakes in English. As a rule she has no bad marks. She is a good pupil. She likes to read very much. She also helps her mother at home.His son is a little boy. He was born six years ago. Every morning his father takes him to the kindergarten. Soon the boy will be seven years old. He will not go to the kindergarten. He will go to school.My friend has a sister too. Next year she will graduate from the university. She will be an economist. She lives with her parents in the country. His sister’s husband is a doctor.My friend has no brother.In summer my friend’s wife usually takes her children to the country to their grandmother and grandfather. They like their grandchildren very much. Soon she will take them to the country again.


large – mare a son - un fiua wife - o soţie to be born - a se naştechildren – copii kindergarten - creşă, grădiniţăyoung – tânăr soon - degrabă, în curândold - bătrân, în vârstă to graduate (from) - a absolvia woman - o femeie parents - părinţian university - o universitate a husband - un soţa daughter - o fiică a brother - un fratea girl of ten - o fată de zece ani summer - varăprimary school - şcoala primară in (the) summer - varato work at school - a lucra la şcoală winter - iarnăto go to school - a merge la şcoală spring - primăvarăa subject - un obiect (şcolar) autumn - toamnăto make - a face a grandmother - o bunicăa mistake - o greşeală a grandfather - un bunelas a rule - de regulă... a grandchild - un nepotbad – rău again - iarăşi, din noua pupil - un/o elev(ă) in a week - peste o săptămânăto help - a ajuta tomorrow - mâinea mother - o mamă the day after tomorrow - poimâinea father - un tată

ex: When were you born? – I was born in 1986.

43

GRAMMAR

FUTURE INDEFINITE (SIMPLE) TENSE


I will (shall) readYou will readHe (She, It) will read

We will (shall) readYou will readThey will read


I will not (won’t) readYou won’t readHe (She, It) won’t read

We won’t readYou won’t readThey won’t read


Will (Shall) I readWill you readWill he (she, it) read

Will (Shall) we readWill you readWill they read

Examples: He’ll do that tomorrow. He’ll not do that tomorrow. Will he do that tomorrow?I will (shall) go to the theatre. I won’t (shan’t) go to the theatre. Will (Shall) I go to the theatre?

Adverbs used with Future Indefinite:

tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, in two (three, four, etc.) days (weeks, months, etc.), in a week, in a month, next week, next month, next year, soon.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Put the following sentences into negative and interrogative forms.

1. I shall go to the cinema tomorrow. 2. You will work on Sunday. 3. My friends will come to see me the day after tomorrow. 4. He will soon meet Tom. 5. These students will write a dictation in three days. 6. We will do this work at once. 7. My friend will be an economist in two years. 8. I will be at home next week.

2. Change the sentences in the future using the appropriate adverbs.

1. My sister studies German. 2. We receive many e-mails from our friends. 3. The lesson is not over. 4. I am usually at home after six o’clock. 5. Does your friend live in London? 6. She is not an economist. 7. Do they often discuss interesting questions at the office? 8. I don’t get up at five o’clock in the morning. 9. This boy is good pupil. 10. These students like to read in the library.


1. Will you work tomorrow?2. On what day won’t you work?

44

3. Where will you spend the weekend?4. Will you stay at home or go to the country over the weekend?5. Will your sister go to the park with her friends on Sunday?6. When shall we go to see our parents?7. Who will translate this text?8. How long will you work at this project?9. How long will your lesson last tomorrow?10. When will you discuss that question?11. Whose children will go to school next year?12. When will your brother begin to study foreign languages?13. What language will your sister know in two years?


1. I usually (to go) to the office at eight o’clock. 2. Where you (to work) next year? 3. Where you (to be) yesterday at five o’clock? – I (to be) at home. 4. You (to be) at home on your day off? – Yes, I will. 5. What kind of books you (to like) to read? 6. You (to read) this book last year? – Yes, I (to do). 7. My friend (not to like) to write letters. 8. From whom you (to receive) an e-mail yesterday? 9. What marks your son (to get) last week? – He (to get) three good marks. 10. Where you (to be) in the evening? 11. When he (to speak) to your brother about this? 12. When we (to speak) English well? – You (to speak) English well in three years. 13. Your friend (to tell) about his mother then? – No, he did not. 14. When we (to tell) our mother about it? – We (to tell) her about it tomorrow. 15. They usually (not to speak) English at home.

5. Translate paying attention to the use of Future Indefinite Tense.

1. Peste o săptămână voi pleca la Chişinău. 2. Feciorul surorii mele va scrie scrisori prietenilor săi mâine. 3. Lucrarea lui nouă va fi foarte interesantă. 4. Bunica mea nu va lucra în curând. Anul viitor ea va avea şaizeci de ani. 5. Mâine prietenul meu nu va merge la cinema. El va pleca seara la lecţia de engleză. 6. Când veţi fi acasă? – Eu voi fi acasă după ora şapte seara. 7. În curând studenţii vor vorbi bine engleza. 8. Ce veţi face în astă seară? – Noi vom pleca să vizităm prietenii noştri. 9. Veniţi la noi mâine seară. Noi vom fi acasă după ora opt seara. 10. La ce oră vă veţi trezi mâine? – Eu mă voi trezi la ora şase dimineaţa. 11. Când veţi începe să traduceţi aceste articole? – Eu voi începe să le traduc peste o oră. 12. Cu cine veţi repeta cuvintele noi? – Eu le voi repeta împreună cu prietenii mei. 13. Săptămâna viitoare noi vom învăţa multe cuvinte noi. 14. Peste trei ani prietenul meu va locui la Londra. El va fi economist şi va lucra nu departe de Londra. 15. Parcul central se află departe de casa mea. Eu voi merge pe jos acolo astăzi. 16. Când veţi discuta aceste întrebări? – Noi le vom discuta peste trei zile. 17. Aceşti studenţi vor studia limba germană, iar acei studenţi vor studia limba franceză. 18. În curând noi vom citi un nou text în limba engleză. 19. Azi veţi rămâne la oficiu după lucru? – Da. 20. Când veţi merge la ţară? – Noi vom merge la ţară luna viitoare.


6. Read aloud.

child, find, wild, mild, kind, old, cold, bold, told;other, mother, brother, another, come, love;knit, rude, storey, clear, blast, cask, bleak, fit;bite, hurt, bark, right, knight, night, sink, skill, step, stern, tusk, tune.

45


1. What is your name?2. What are you?3. Where do you live?4. Have you a family?5. Is your family large or small?6. How many brothers and sisters have you?7. What are their names?8. How old are they?9. How old are you?10. When was your brother / sister born?11. When were you born?12. Does your brother / sister go to school?13. Where do you study?14. Do students take (study) many subjects at the university?15. How do your friends study?16. Do they often make mistakes in their homework?17. What marks do they usually get?18. When will you graduate from the university?19. Where do your parents live?20. Do you go to the country in summer or in winter?21. Do you like to go to the country in spring?22. Does your sister / brother study English?23. What language will you study next year?24. How much time do you usually spend on your English?25. With whom will you prepare your home-task today?26. Where will you go next Sunday?


1. We have many English books (3). 2. I shall have very much work to do next week (1). 3. My sister’s son has five lessons at school every Friday (3). 4. We had three dictations last month (2). 5. My friend’s wife has a French lesson in the evening (5). 6. Her sister has two children (3). 7. We will have an interesting lesson tomorrow (2). 8. My friend has four sons (1).

9. Change the possessive adjective with the nouns given in brackets.

1. His daughter is a girl of ten (my friend). 2. Their sons go to school every day (his sisters). 3. Their marks are always good (these students). 4. Their parents are doctors (these children). 5. His friend graduated from the university last year (my brother). 6. His family will live in London (this man). 7. Her husband is a doctor (their teacher). 8. I will soon see his parents (my best friend). 9. I like his work (Peter). 10. I know her brother’s name (this woman).

10. Insert the right article where necessary. Retell the text.

My brother Peter lives in ___ Chişinău. He is ___ doctor. He has ___ family. He has ___ wife and two children. His wife Helen has no ___ mother, but she has ___ father. ___ Helen’s father is ___ old engineer. He lives in ___ country. ___ Peter’s office is near his house. He goes there in ___ morning. ___ Peter’s son goes to ___ school. He is ___ good pupil. ___ Peter’s daughter is two years old. In ___ year her mother will take her to ___ kindergarten. On their days off they often go to ___ country to see ___ Helen’s father.

46

11. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.

Mary Brown is a woman ___ 32. Eight years ago she graduated from the university where she studied economics. She is a teacher now. She teaches the management ___ this university. She usually goes ___ the university ___ eight o’clock ___ the morning and comes ___ home ___ three o’clock ___ the afternoon. Her daughter Ann is a girl ___ nine. She goes ___ school. Every day she spends four hours ___ school. ___ home she prepares her home task and helps ___ her mother. Mary’s son is a boy ___ four. Every morning Mary’s husband takes him ___ the kindergarten. Mary’s parents do not live ___ her. They live ___ the country ___ ___ Bălţi. ___ summer Mary takes her children ___ the country and they live ___ their grandparents there. Their grandfather often tells ___ them ___ his life and work.

12. Use the appropriate word from the list below in the right form.

( to help, a subject, old, the country, to be born, an office, a mark, to graduate from, a university, a pupil, a village, again, summer, a girl, to tell)

1. My sister ____ ______ in 1986. Now she is 18 years ____ . She studies at ________ . She takes many _____ there. She sometimes ____ her brother and sisters to prepare their lessons. 2. I live in Chişinău, but I like to spend the weekend in _____ . 3. My brother is an economist now. He _____ ____ the university last year. He works at _____ and he _____ us about his work very often. 4. Tess is ____ of twelve. She is a ____. She studies well. She always gets good ____. 5. Last year I spent two months in ______ . In the _____ I will go there ____.

13. Translate. Pay attention to the meaning of the given words.

a) to make, to do.1. Prietenul meu a făcut ieri o prezentare (a presenatation) interesantă. Ea ne-a plăcut foarte mult. 2. Acest student iarăşi a făcut multe greşeli în lucrarea sa şi a primit o notă rea. 3. Cine a făcut această lucrare anul trecut? Ea este foarte bună. 4. Ce fel de exerciţii faceţi de obicei acasă? 5. Cine va face un raport pe această temă (on this subject)? – Peter.

b) to tell, to speak.1. Sora mea vorbeşte bine engleza. 2. Profesorul nostru ne vorbeşte des despre greşelile noastre. 3. Noi vorbim des despre lucrul nostru. 4. Vorbeşte cu ea despre aceasta deseară. 5. Povestiţi-i ei despre aceasta. 6. Poimâine prietenul meu John va veni să mă vadă şi noi vom vorbi despre noul film.

c) many, much, few, little1. Câte articole aţi tradus ieri? 2. Cât timp veţi cheltui pentru acest lucru? 3. Noi am făcut puţine exerciţii la ultima lecţie. 4. Când aveţi mult lucru? 5. El are multă sau puţină hârtie bună? 6. Copiii lui vor citi multe cărţi interesante luna viitoare. 7. Cine v-a pus multe întrebări? 8. Câte luni prietenul tău a locuit la voi? – El a locuit la noi trei luni. 9. Cât timp sora lui studiază engleza?

14. Write by five sentences of each type.

a) My sister is 23 years old.b) How old is your friend’s son?c) She is a woman of 30.d) My brother was born in 1982.

47


to be born, young, to go to school, in the summer, subject, to help, to graduate (from), in the autumn, again, soon, to make mistakes, parents, to finish school, to make a report on, as a rule, to have much work to do.

16. Translate.

1. Feciorul prietenului meu este elev. El învaţă bine. El nu primeşte note rele. Acasă el îşi ajută des mama. 2. Eu nu am surori, dar am doi fraţi. 3. Pete a absolvit universitatea patru ani în urmă. El este economist. Acum el locuieşte în Londra. El are un apartament spaţios. 4. Această femeie este profesor. Ea lucrează la şcoală. Ea are mulţi elevi. În fiecare dimineaţă ea îl duce pe fiul ei mic la grădiniţă. Seara după lucru ea îl ia acasă. 5. Nu veniţi la mine duminică. Eu nu voi fi acasă. Eu voi pleca la ţară la părinţii mei. 6. Aveţi soră? – Da. Cinci ani în urmă ea absolvit universitatea. Acum lucrează la un oficiu în Chişinău. 7. Câţi copii are prietenul dumneavoastră? – El are doi copii: un fiu şi o fiică. 8. Domnul Smith este un inginer bătrân. El nu are nepoţi, dar are două nepoate. Prima nepoată s-a născut şapte ani în urmă. 9. Anul trecut eu n-am studiat limba engleză. Eu nu am avut manual de engleză. Acum am multe cărţi în limba engleză. De regulă, citesc seara. Sora mea tot cunoaşte această limbă şi câteodată vorbim engleza împreună. Anul viitor noi vom studia limba franceză. 10. Cinci ani în urmă eu n-am locuit la Bălţi, eu am locuit la Chişinău. Aveam acolo un apartament bun. În zilele de odihnă prietenii mei mă vizitau des. Vara şi iarna plecam des împreună la ţară. 11. Sora mea are două fiice. Fiicele surorii mele învaţă bine şi îşi ajută mama acasă. 12. Părinţii mei au o casă la ţară. Casa părinţilor mei este foarte mare. Ea are trei camere, ele sunt curate şi luminoase. Eu îi vizitez des toamna. 13. Săptămâna viitoare eu voi avea mult de lucru. 14. Fiica fratelui meu va fi degrabă studentă. Ea va studia limba germană. Ea are multe cărţi în limba germană. 15. Sâmbăta viitoare prietenul meu va avea puţin lucru şi el va merge la cinema împreună cu noi. 16. Cum îl cheamă pe prietenul vostru? – Numele lui este Gabriel. – Câţi ani are? – El are 23 de ani. 17. Când şi unde v-aţi născut? – Eu m-am născut în 1986 în Orhei. 18. Eu am avut mult lucru săptămâna trecută. 19. Anul trecut, de regulă, în ce zile aveaţi lecţii de engleză? 20. Cât timp, de regulă, cheltuiţi pentru tema de acasă? – De obicei eu cheltuiec pe ea două ore. 21. Câte cărţi engleze aţi citit luna trecută? – Eu am citit trei cărţi engleze. 22. Colegul meu a avut puţin timp să pregătească raportul, dar el l-a dat la timp (in time). 23. Nu-l ajutaţi pe fiul dumneavoastră să-şi facă tema de acasă.

17. Translate the following text and retell it.

Eu locuiesc cu părinţii în Chişinău. Părinţii mei nu sunt în vârstă. Tatăl are 40 de ani, iar mama – 35. Tatăl meu este inginer. El lucrează la o fabrică (factory) mare. Lui îi place lucrul său şi el lucrează mult. Mama mea este profesoară. Ea lucrează la şcoală. Copiii o iubesc foarte mult. Ei învaţă bine. Ei pregătesc întotdeauna temele de acasă şi răspund bine la întrebările profesorului. Noi avem o casă la ţară. Vara mergem deseori acolo. Mie îmi place să mă odihnesc acolo. Eu ajut părinţii mei să lucreze în grădină (garden). Degrabă voi pleca iarăşi acolo.

18. Make a short essay on one of the topics below using the given words.

a) My Brother’s Friend.

to have a good friend, to be born in..., to go to school, to want, to help, parents, to begin to work, office, to begin to study, again, to graduate from the university, to be an economist.

b) My Father.

48

to be ... years old, a doctor, to work, in the country, in the summer, to like, in the winter, to come to see, to ski, again, to tell.

c) My Friend’s Studies.

at the university, subjects, interesting, to help, to want, much, to make a report, to make mistakes, class, English, well, teacher, student, group.

49

LESSON SEVEN (THE SEVENTH LESSON)

MY SISTER’S OFFICE

Two years ago my sister graduated from the university and went to Chişinău to work there. She is a manager and works at an office of a foreign company. Last month she moved in a very comfortable office in a new building. Her office is on the third floor. A week ago I received a letter from my sister with many pictures of the town and of her office.My sister’s office is not too large, but there is enough workspace in it. It has a window opposite the door and a little balcony with a nice view on the main street. The walls of the office are greenish and there are posters on them. The ceiling is white. The floor is yellow. There is not too much furniture in it. Near the window there is a desk where my sister works. There is a computer, a fax and a telephone on this desk. My sister usually has much computer work to do. There is also a desk lamp. In the left corner there is a bookcase with adjustable shelves. There are a lot of books on them. In the middle of the office there is a round table, where my sister usually receives guests when she has important meetings. On it there is a white tablecloth and a vase with flowers. There is an armchair and four chairs at the table. To the right of the door there are two sofas.At home she has a study. There are many things in it and also a writing table, a radio set, and a television set. She usually does there her paperwork. She stays there much time when she has to prepare different projects.


a manager - un manager a bookcase - un dulap de cărţi, o bibliotecăa company - o companie adjustable - ajustabil(ă)to move - a trece, a (se) mişca a shelf - o poliţăcomfortable - confortabil(ă) (the) middle - mijloc(ul)a building - o clădire, un bloc in the middle - la mijloc(ul)the third floor - etajul trei round - rotund(ă)a picture - o imagine important - important(ă)too – prea a meeting - o întâlnireenough - destul, îndeajuns tablecloth - faţă de masăworkspace - spaţiu de lucru a vase - o vazăa window - o fereastră a flower - o floareopposite - opus(ă), vizavi an armchair - un fotoliua balcony - un balcon a chair - un scauna view - o vedere, o privelişte a sofa - o canapeaa street - o stradă a study - un birou, o cameră de lucruthe main street - strada principală a thing - un lucru, un obiectgreenish – verzui a kitchen - o bucătăriea poster - un afiş a bedroom - un dormitorfurniture – mobilă a bathroom -(odaie de) baiea desk - un birou, o masă de lucru a dining room - sufrageriea fax - un fax a writing table - o masă de lucrua telephone - un telefon a radio set - un aparat de radioa desk lamp - o lampă de masă a television set - un televizorright - drept (dreaptă) paperwork - lucru cu documenteleto the right - la dreapta to prepare - a (se) pregătileft - stâng(ă) different - diferit(ă)to the left - la stânga a project- un proiecta corner - un colţ

50

GRAMMAR

THERE IS..., THERE ARE...

Examples: There is a newspaper on the table.There are English books on the shelf.

Examples: On the table there is a newspaper. On the shelf there are English books.

Other examples: There is a table and five chairs in this room. There are five chairs and a table in this room.There are many students there.

Is there a map in your room?Were there many mistakes in his homework?

What is there on the wall? – There is a picture on the wall.Who is there in the room? – There is a boy in the room.

Negation Total negation

There is not (isn’t) a book on the table. There is no book on the table.There aren’t newspapers on the shelf. There are no newspapers on the shelf.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES


1. There is a blackboard in our room. 2. There are English books in my bag. 3. There was a letter on the table. 4. There will be a new cinema in our town next year. 5. There were many mistakes in your dictation yesterday. 6. There are many new grammar rules in Lesson four. 7. There is much paper on the table. 8. There was enough ink in my pen to write two letters.

2. Choose the right variant.

1. There (is, are) a large table in my room. 2. There (is, are) three windows in my office. 3. There (is, are) a table and four chairs in my sister’s room. 4. There (is, are) a blackboard, a table and many chairs in our classroom. 5. There (is, are) many pencils and a pen in my bag. 6. There (is, are) a textbook and two exercise books on my table. 7. There (was, were) no school here ten years ago. 8. There (was, were) many children in the park yesterday.

51

THERE IS/ARE subject place

place THERE IS/ARE subject

3. Answer the questions. Pay attention to the use of There is and There are.

1. Is there a blackboard in your classroom?2. Are there many tables in your classroom?3. What books are there in your bag?4. Are there bad students in your group?5. How many mistakes were there in your dictation?6. Are there many chairs in this office?7. In what room is there a large table?8. In whose room are there two windows?9. What is there in your room?10. What will there be in your room soon?11. Were there many children in the park yesterday?12. Will there be many people in the park on Sunday?13. Was there a foreign company in your town two years ago?14. When will there be a new office in this building?15. How many pages will there be in your friend’s new book?

4. Translate using There is or There are.

a) 1. În oraşul nostru sunt multe şcoli. 2. În grupa noastră erau zece studenţi, acum vor fi şase. 3. Sunt multe reviste şi ziare pe această masă? – Nu, nu sunt multe. 4. În clasa noastră nu este tablă. 5. În această cameră sunt trei ferestre. 6. Ce fel de cărţi sunt pe această poliţă? – Acolo sunt multe cărţi engleze. 7. În grupa voastră erau mulţi studenţi anul trecut? – Nu. – Câţi studenţi erau în grupa voastră? – Acolo erau zece studenţi. 8. Ce fel de companii sunt în oraşul nostru? – În oraşul nostru sunt multe companii străine. 9. În Chişinău sunt multe universităţi? – Da, acolo sunt multe universităţi. 10. În oficiul nostru este puţină mobilă. 11. Pe această masă nu sunt reviste engleze.

b) 1. Eu am o carte interesantă. Pe masă este o carte interesantă. La mine în geantă este o carte inetersantă.

2. În ultima dictare el nu are greşeli.În această lucrare nu este nici o greşeală.El nu are greşeli.

3. În acest ziar sunt multe articole interesante.Ea are multe articole interesante.În revista ei sunt multe articole interesante.

4. Pe masa lor sunt puţine reviste engleze.Ei au puţine reviste engleze.Pe masă sunt puţine reviste engleze.

5. Noi nu am avut hârtie ieri.Pe masa de lucru nu a fost hârtie ieri.Pe masa noastră de lucru nu a fost hârtie ieri.

c) 1. Lângă casa mea este o şcoală nouă. 2. Şcoala nouă este lângă casa mea. 3. În centrul oraşului este un teatru. 4. Teatrul este în centrul oraşului. 5. Greşeala este în propoziţia a cincea. 6. În propoziţia a cincea este o greşeală. 7. Cartea este pe masă. 8. Pe masă sunt cărţi. 9. În

52

această revistă sunt puţine articole interesante. 10. Articolul interesant este la pagina zece. 11. În acest articol englez nu sunt cuvinte noi. 12. Cuvintele noi sunt pe tablă.

5. Write by five sentences of each type.

a) There is a book and many exercise books in my bag.b) There are no mistakes in your dictation.c) There aren’t many mistakes in your dictation.d) Will there be a new company in your town next year?e) There was no English book in my bag yesterday.


6. Read aloud.

picture, lecture, rapture, nature, culture, feature;receive, ceiling, deceive, perceive;flower, power, shower, powerful, photo, phase, phrase, phosphor, phonic;out, loud, bow, bowl, howl, fellow, willow;true, toil, spoil, frail, sheer, steer, tear, sear, sour, ware, dare, lull, maid, square.


1. Did your brother study at the university?2. When did your brother graduate from the university?3. Did he stay to work in Bălţi?4. Where does he work now?5. Has he a new office?6. Is his office large or small?7. On which floor is his office?8. What colour are the walls in his office?9. What furniture is there in your brother’s office?10. Is there a bookcase in the left corner?11. Where is the telephone?12. What else is there in his office?13. Where does he receive his guests?14. Has he a study at home?15. Has he a radio set or a television set?16. Has he a computer at home?17. Has he much paperwork to do?18. Does he often see films on television?19. Is there a kitchen and a bathroom in his flat?20. What is there in his bedroom?


1. There is a picture of my sister on that wall (1). 2. The picture of my sister is on that wall (1). 3. There is a bathroom in her flat (1). 4. There was a round table in the middle of your office last year (3). 5. The round table is in his office (2). 6. There are five chairs to the right of the desk (1). 7. There is a large writing-table to the left of the door (1). 8. There will be sixty-four

53

offices in that building (1). 9. We will have a comfortable flat in Chişinău (3). 10. His children speak in English very well (2). 11. These students’ parents like music (2).

9. Ask alternative questions to the bold words.

1. Ann’s brother usually spends much time on his English (2). 2. My friend’s sister will graduate from the university next year (2). 3. Her husband will be an engineer (2). 4. Her daughter is three years old (1). 5. His father was born in 1960 (2). 6. My sister’s son studies very well (1). 7. We shall live in the country next summer (2).


This is ___ picture of my study. Look at it! There is ___ large window in my study. ___ ceiling of my study is white, ___ floor is yellow, ___ walls are bluish. There is ___ writing-table near ___ window. There is ___ armchair at ___ writing-table. There is ___ telephone and ___ desk lamp on it. I often speak over ___ telephone. To ___ right of my writing-table there is ___ bookcase. There aren’t many English books on ___ shelves of ___ bookcase. There is no ___ radio set in my study. ___ radio is in my parent’s room. My father likes to listen to ___ radio. In his room there is also ___ television set. In ___ corner of my study there is ___ sofa. I usually spend ___ much time in my study. I usually work there in ___ evening. On my days off I often work there in ___ morning and in ___ afternoon.

11. Insert the right preposition where necessary.

I have a friend. Her name is Mary. Mary is a girl ___ sixteen. She goes ___ school. She usually comes ___ home ___ school ___ three o’clock ___ the afternoon. She often helps ___ her mother ___ home. Mary’s brother does not live ___ his parents. Last year he graduated ___ the university and went ___ Bucharest to work ___ there. He often speaks ___ his parents ___ the telephone. He sometimes writes letters ___ them. ___ summer he always comes ___ Chişinău to see his parents. He tells ___ them ___ his life and work ___ Bucharest. Last month he moved ___ a new office. His office is ___ the second floor ___ a fine large building.

12. Make sentences using the words and word combinations.

a building, on the first of March, on the fourth (...) floor, in the middle of, to have much computer work, to the right (left) of, else, to listen to, to look in, to speak over the telephone, a picture, an office, a desk, a computer, three chairs, etc.

13. Use many, much, few, little.

1. Our teacher gave us ____ homework the day before yesterday. 2. Our teacher will give us ____ homework tomorrow too. 3. We usually see ____ men and women in the parks on Sundays. 4. Our office received ____ letters this morning. 5. Did your friend do ____ paperwork yesterday? 6. Will you spend ____ time on this translation? 7. Did you read ____ English books last year? 8. How ____ questions did your teacher ask you at the lesson? 9. How ____ computer work did this manager have yesterday? 10. When will we have ____ new interesting films?

14. Answer the questions using many, much, few, little.

1. How many English classes did you have last month?2. Did you have much or little paperwork to do last week?3. Did your friend have few or many English lessons last month?

54

4. Did you spend much time on your English last year?5. Did your friend spend much time on his French last year?6. Who spends little time on his homework?7. Do you usually ask many questions at your lessons?8. Does your teacher always give you little homework?9. Will your teacher give you much homework on Friday?10. Did you receive many or few e-mails from your friends last month?11. Do you spend much time or little time with your family?12. When will you have little computer work to do at the office?


27.01.193004.02.198619.03.198001.04.2000

29.05.194013.06.199925.07.198612.08.2004

04.09.199028.10.196705.11.195603.12.2002

16. Translate

1. Unde este faţa de masă cea albă? – Ea este pe masa cea rotundă din mijlocul camerei. 2. Ce fel de faţă de masă este pe masa cea rotundă? – Pe masa cea rotundă este o faţă de masă albă. 3. În colţul camerei mele este o canapea. 4. În acest ziar sunt puţine lucruri interesante. 5. Ce va fi în colţul stâng al acestei camere? – Acolo va fi un birou. 6. Telefonul vostru este pe masa de lucru sau pe televizor? – El este pe masa de lucru. – Aparatul de radio tot este acolo? – Da. – Şi unde este televizorul? – El este la sufragerie. 7. Ieri am primit o scrisoare de la fratele meu. Acolo erau multe lucruri interesante. În ea erau două poze de-ale fiicei sale. Ea este deja mare. Ea are deja trei ani. 8. În această cameră sunt multe lucruri. În ea sunt opt scaune şi cinci fotolii, o masă şi o canapea. Ce mai este în această cameră? – Acolo mai este un dulap de cărţi. – De ce culoare este dulapul de cărţi – El este brun. 9. În apartamentul fratelui meu este o bucătărie foarte confortabilă, dar acolo nu este balcon. 10. Unde se află calculatorul (computerul) dumneavoastră? – El se află în biroul meu. 11. Pe această imagine sunt mulţi studenţi din grupa noastră. Pe care îi cunoaşteţi? 12. În această revistă sunt puţine lucruri interesante. N-o citiţi. 13. Ce este pe peretele oficiului dumneavoastră? – Acolo este o hartă (map) a oraşului nostru. – Ce va mai fi pe peretele acesta? – Acolo vor mai fi trei afişuri. 14. În manualul nostru sunt imagini, dar acolo nu este nici o hartă. 15. Fratele meu are un oficiu foarte confortabil. El s-a mutat acolo trei luni în urmă. 16. Priviţi aceste imagini ale oraşului nostru. El vă place? – Da, oraşul vostru este foarte frumos. Eu am fost acolo câţiva ani în urmă. 17. Săptămâna trecută prietenul meu şi-a cumpărat un apartament nou. Noi ieri l-am vizitat. Apartamentul este confortabil. El ne-a plăcut foarte mult. Acolo sunt două camere, sala de băi şi bucătăria. 18. Deschideţi cărţile la pagina 100 şi priviţi imaginea. Ce vedeţi acolo? – Acolo este o clădire nouă. 19. În partea dreaptă a universităţii se află un parc frumos. În el sunt multe flori. 20. Voi deschideţi des ferestrele de la camera dumneavoastră? – Da. Ele sunt întotdeauna deschise dimineaţa. – Şi seara ele sunt tot deschise? – Nu, seara ele sunt de obicei închise. 21. Eu am mult de lucru cu documentele şi vreau să termin astăzi. 22. Dumneavoastră aveţi lampă de masă în oficiu? – Da. 23. Aveţi mult de lucru pe mâine? – Da. Mâine voi pregăti un proiect şi voi traduce diferite articole. 24. În oficiul tatălui tău este multă mobilă? – Nu, acolo este un birou, un dulap de cărţi cu poliţe ajustabile. 25. Pe această poliţă sunt multe cărţi şi reviste în limba engleză. 26. Apartamentul surorii mele nu este prea mare. Dar el are un balcon mare cu o vedere minunată spre strada principală. 27. Pereţii clasei noastre sunt verzui. Pe ei sunt multe afişuri. 28. Vizavi de şcoala fratelui meu este un bloc nou unde sunt multe oficii.

55

17. Make a short story on the topic “How I Once Went to See My Friend’s New Office”.

to movea week agonewan officea buildingon the second floorto askto come to seeto likecomfortable

a desklightcleana computera desk lampthe colour (of)in the middle (of)in the cornerto the right (of)to the left (of)

flowersa vasea picturea bookcasea sofanearoftena chaira round tableopposite

56

LESSON EIGHT (THE EIGHTH LESSON)

AT THE LIBRARY

Nowadays many people study foreign languages. They attend lessons before or after work. At home they prepare their home tasks. They read their exercise books and write many exercises. They want to know foreign languages very well. So they read many books in foreign languages.There is a library of foreign literature at our university. Our students often go there to get books in English.Jane is one of our students. She also goes to the library when she has no English books at home. Now she is in the library.Jane. Good morning!Librarian. Good morning!Jane. Have you got any interesting English books?Librarian. Yes, we have some. What English writers do you like?Jane. I like Dickens. I read many books by Dickens in my childhood.Librarian. Did you read them in English or in Romanian?Jane. I read them in Romanian. I did not know English then.Librarian. When did you begin to study English?Jane. I began to study English two years ago.Librarian. Don’t take books by Dickens now. They are too difficult for you. Take a book of Oscar Wilde or Jack London. Their books are easy. You will read them with interest. Jane. All right. Show me some books by Oscar Wilde, please, but don’t bring “The Picture of Dorian Gray.” I read it last month.

(The librarian goes away and soon returns.)Librarian. I am very sorry, but we have no books by Oscar Wilde on the shelves now. I advise you to take some books by Jack London. Shall I bring you “Martin Eden” or “The White Fang”?Jane. Give me “The White Fang”, please.Librarian. Here it is!Jane. Thank you very much.

(The student takes the book and leaves the library)


a library - o bibliotecă wrong - greşita librarian - un bibliotecar all right - binepeople - oameni, persoane, lume all - totto attend - a frecventa to show - a arătaso - deci, aşadar a TV show - un program TVliterature – literatură to bring - a aducehistory – istorie to go away - a plecageography – geografie to be sorry (of) - a părea rău (de)a book by... - o carte de... to advise - a recomanda, a sfătuichildhood – copilărie to leave - a părăsi, a plecadifficult - dificil(ă), greu(ea) any - ceva, câţiva, unii, vreun(o)easy - uşor(oară) some - ceva, câţiva, unii, vreun(o)with interest - cu interes one of - unul, una dintre (sg.)right - corect, adevărat some (any) of - unii, unele dintre (pl.)

57

GRAMMAR

SOME, ANY

1. Some – is used generally in affirmative sentences.

Examples: I have some interesting English books.Some children do not like to read.Give me some interesting book.He took some money and went to the cinema.

2. Any – is used generally in interrogative and negative sentences.

Examples: Were there any interesting books in the library?Do you have any good magazines to read?There aren’t any mistakes in this sentence. = There are no mistakes in this sentence.Don’t take any books here!Is there any chalk here?

Are there any pictures in this book?- Yes, there are some.- No, there aren’t any.

Have you any interesting books at home?- Yes, I have some.- No, I haven’t any.

THE ABSENCE OF THE ARTICLE

We don’t use the article before nouns indicating sciences and subjects.

Examples: At the university we study Economics, History and Geography.My friend studies English Literature.He knows French History very well.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Choose the right variant from brackets.

1. There are (some, any) pictures in our textbook. 2. Are there (some, any) flowers in your room? 3. Do you study (some, any) foreign languages? 4. Does your friend have (some, any) English magazines? 5. Were there (some, any) boys in your group at the university? 6. I did not receive (some, any) letters last month. 7. There will be (some, any) posters on the walls in my room. 8. Did you write (some, any) exercises on the blackboard yesterday?


1. I read some English magazines yesterday. 2. There were some new words in that text. 3. I wrote some letters last night. 4. My friend will know some foreign languages soon. 5. There are some German books in my bookcase. 6. In my office there are some chairs. 7. My sister translated some articles from this newspaper. 8. I made some mistakes in my dictation yesterday.

58

3. Answer the questions. Pay attention to the use of some and any.

1. Do you study any foreign languages?2. Did you know any foreign languages last year?3. Do you read any English books?4. Have you got any interesting English books at home?5. Will there be any interesting English magazines at the office tomorrow?6. Have you got any friends in London?7. Did you receive any e-mails from your friends yesterday?8. Have you any brothers?9. Have you got any pictures of your mother?10. Does your friend ask you any questions about your work?11. Did you go to any park on Sunday?12. Were there any children there?13. Will there be any children in this park on Sunday?14. Have you got any questions?15. Did you have any lessons yesterday?16. Is there any garden near your house?17. Were there any flowers in your garden last year?18. Are there any flowers in your room today?

4. Translate using:

a) some or any.1. Peste trei ani prietenul meu va cunoaşte câteva limbi străine. 2. Dumneavoastră citiţi ceva cărţi engleze? – Da. 3. Eu nu văd nici o greşeală în această dictare. 4. În această cameră sunt ceva afişe? – Da. Acolo sunt câteva afişe frumoase. 5. Ieri am tradus câteva texte din română în engleză. 6. Ieri aici au venit câţiva studenţi. 7. Aţi primit ceva scrisori luna trecută? – Da, luna trecută eu am primit câteva scrisori de la prietenii mei. 8. Unii studenţi vin la biblioteca noastră să citească. 9. Tatăl dumneavoastră vorbeşte vreo limbă străină? – Nu. 10. El nu ştie nici o limbă străină. 11. În dictarea mea sunt ceva greşeli? – Da, acolo sunt câteva greşeli. 12. Fratele meu cunoaşte câţiva economişti din oficiul dumneavoastră. 13. Luna trecută eu n-am citit nici o carte interesantă.

b) one of or some of.1. Unii dintre colegii noştri studiază limba germană. Eu studiez limba engleză. 2. Săptămâna trecută eu am citit un articol interesant în unul dintre aceste ziare. 3. În unele dintre aceste exerciţii nu sunt cuvinte noi. 4. În una dintre scrisorile sale prietenul meu scria despre fiica lui. Ea are trei ani. Ea merge la grădiniţă. 5. Unele dintre aceste cărţi nu sunt interesante. 6. Mama mea este profesoară. Ea lucrează în una din şcolile oraşului nostru. 7. Eu cunosc pe mulţi dintre aceşti băieţi. Părinţii lor lucrează în oficiul nostru. 8. Eu vreau să văd unele dintre cărţile dumneavoastră. 9. Ieri am vorbit despre dumneavoastră cu unul dintre colegii noştri. 10. Familia noastră este foarte mare. Trei dintre noi lucrează, şi patru studiază. 11. În oficiul nostru sunt cinci ingineri. Doi dintre ei cunosc bine limba engleză.

c) nouns denoting sciences or subjects. 1. Literatura este un obiect foarte interesant. Mie ea îmi plăcea foarte mult în şcoală. 2. Voi frecventaţi lecţiile de (a lecture on) istorie? – Da. 3. Prietenul meu învaţă la universitate istoria, managementul şi geografia. 4. Profesorul nostru cunoaşte bine literatura engleză. 5. Ce predă (to teach) prietenul dumneavoastră? – El predă economia la universitatea noastră. 6. Ce notă aţi primit la engleză? – Eu am primit o notă bună. 7. Ieri am asistat la o lecţie foarte interesantă de civilizaţie germană.

59


5. Read aloud.

before their workone of our studentsin my childhood

at the libraryon the shelvesread them

he leaves the libraryshe takes the bookhere is the book

again, aside, sofa, village, moderate, receive, begin, repeat, rebuke, ticket, teacher; interval, picnic, army, pilot, pardon, university, multitude, difficult, doctor, motor, grammar, martyr.

6. Translate the following words and write their transcription.

literature studenteasybadlyninetytranslationadviser

centralchildhoodeconomistdoctorfourteenengineereconomist

advisabletextbookfifthpicturegraduationquestionusually


1. Is there a library at your university?2. Do many or few people usually go to the library?3. Are there any books on English Literature in your library?4. Do you like English Literature?5. Did you read any books by Jack London in your childhood?6. Do you read books with interest?7. Which of your friends advised you to study English last year?8. Is English difficult or easy for you?9. Do you study it with interest?10. When do you usually attend your English lessons?11. Do you know English History and Geography?12. Were there any wrong sentences in your last translation?13. Do the students show their exercise-books to their teacher before or after the lesson?14. What time do all the students usually leave the classroom?15. Have you got a television set at home?16. Were there any interesting television shows last week?17. Did all your family like the last TV show?

8. Give the antonyms of the following words.

to beginto leaveto giveto bringwrong

goodwelldifficultlongto answer

afterto gooldherelarge

60


1. Yesterday I was ___ the Central Library ___ Foreign Literature. There were very many people ___ there. 2. Where did you get this book ___ Dickens? – I took it ___ the library. 3. Have you got any English books ___ home? – Yes, I’ve got some, but they are too difficult ___ you. You will read them ___ interest ___ a year or two. 4. ___ her childhood she read many books ___ Romanian and ___ English writers. 5. There is an English magazine ___ that table. Show it ___ me, please. 6. Repeat this sentence ___ English, please. 7. What books ___ Jack London have you got ___ the shelves now? 8. When do you usually leave ___ home? – I usually leave ___ home ___ eight o’clock ___ the morning. 9. My brother left ___ London ___ Paris last week. ___ two weeks he will return ___ London again. 10. My sister’s friend reads many books ___ English and French.


There is ___ reading hall of ___ Foreign Literature at our library. Yesterday I went to ___ library to take ___ book for my report. “Have you got any books by Jack London on ___ shelves?” I asked ___ librarian. – “Yes, we’ve got some”, she answered. “Take Martin Eden. It is ___ very good book. You will read it with ___ interest.” I took ___ book, thanked ___ librarian and left ___ library.

11. Pick up all the irregular verbs from the dialogue and give their Past Indefinite forms.

12. Use the appropriate word from those given below.

(a library, a writer, to attend, a television show, childhood, so, to bring, away, difficult, to advise, easy, interest)

1. I _____ English lessons on Tuesday, Wednesday and Friday. 2. My daughter often _____ many interesting books home. 3. Sometimes I take books from our _____ and sometimes from my friends. 4. Last year I read many books by English _____. 5. I was born in Orhei and I spend my _____ in that town. 6. I _____ you to begin to study English next year. 7. Please, help me to translate this sentence. It is very _____. 8. This book is not difficult, it is _____. I _____ you to read it. You will read it with _____. 9. Yesterday I went to see Nick. We saw a _____ together and then I went _____.

13. Make sentences using the words and word combinations given below.

at the libraryto attenda book by ...in his childhooda librariantoo (prea)with interest

all rightto be sorryon the shelvesto leaveto go away


23.01.194607.03.197905.02.199409.04.1982

04.05.195014.06.190220.07.199028.08.1958

17.09.200012.10.196319.11.200425.12.1800

61

15. Translate.

1. În oficiul nostru multe persoane ştiu limba engleză. 2. Câţi oameni lucrează în oficiul dumneavoastră? 3. Eu vreau să cunosc bine limba engleză, de aceea eu întotdeauna frecventez lecţiile şi fac temele de acasă. 4. La mine acasă sunt multe cărţi interesante, de aceea eu merg rar la bibliotecă. 5. Prietena mea este bibliotecară. Săptămâna trecută ea mi-a recomandat să citesc cartea nouă a unui scriitor tânăr. Această carte mi-a plăcut foarte mult. 6. Câte lecţii de geografie şi istorie pe săptămână aveaţi la şcoală? 7. Sora mea iubeşte literatura. Ea are multe cărţi de scriitori străini. 8. Unde v-aţi petrecut copilăria? – Eu mi-am petrecut copilăria nu de parte de Chişinău. 9. Luna trecută aţi citit ceva cărţi engleze? – Nu. – Eu vă sfătuiesc să citiţi această carte. Ea este foarte uşoară şi inetresantă. 10. Când fratele dumneavoastră va pleca din (va părăsi) oraş? – El va pleca săptămâna viitoare. 11. Îmi pare rău că nu aţi venit să mă vizitaţi ieri seara. Prietenul meu din Bucureşti a venit în vizită şi mi-a adus multe reviste interesante în limba engleză. Eu am vrut să vi le arăt. 12. Cineva dintre economiştii oficiului vostru a plecat în Londra luna trecută? – Da, câţiva dintre economiştii noştri au plecat acolo. Ei se vor întoarce peste o lună. 13. Toate aceste cărţi sunt foarte interesante. Eu vreau să iau una dintre ele. 14. Aveţi ceva cărţi despre istoria Angliei? – Da. 15. Anul trecut n-am citit nici o carte de acest scriitor. Ele erau prea grele pentru mine. 16. Nu uitaţi caietele acasă. Aduceţi-le întotdeauna la lecţie. 17. Aţi învăţat vreo limbă străină în copilărie? – Da. Eu am studiat limba germană. 18. Medicii nu recomandă copiilor mici să privească mult timp televizorul. 19. Aveţi ceva reviste interesante? Aduceţi-mi, vă rog, vreo revistă să citesc. – Bine, o să vă aduc una dintre revistele mele. 20. Pe poliţă este vreo carte? – Nu, acolo sunt doar ziare. 21. Lumea din această casă au primit apartamente noi.

16. Translate and retell the following text.

În oraşul nostru sunt multe biblioteci. Oamenii iubesc să citească cărţi interesante. Copiii de la diferite şcoli vin la bibliotecile din oraş ca să ia cărţi. Aici sunt cărţi de mulţi scriitori străini.Aici este de asemeni o bibliotecă a universităţii noastre. În această bibliotecă sunt multe săli de lectură (a reading hall). Studenţii noştri se duc des la bibliotecă pentru a citi sau să pregătească temele de acasă. La etajul trei se află sala de literaturi străine. Ea nu este mare dar în ea sunt multe cărţi interesante. Aici sunt cărţi în limbile engleză, franceză, germană, spaniolă. Studenţii citesc cărţi de cei mai cunoscuţi (the most known) scriitori englezi şi americani: Dickens, Wilde, Twen, London. Studenţii vor să cunoască bine limbile străine, de aceea citesc mult. Ei învaţă multe cuvinte noi. Pe poliţile bibliotecii noastre sunt de asemeni diferite reviste şi ziare. În ele sunt foarte multe articole interesante.

17. Retell the text as if you were a) Jane; b) the librarian.

18. Ask 15 questions on the dialogue.

19. Make a short story entitled At the Library using the words given below.

literature, people, in my childhood, a book by, difficult, librarian, to show, on the shelves, to be sorry, to advise, to bring, to leave.

62

LESSON NINE (THE NINTH LESSON)

A TELEPHONE TALK

Ann. Hallo, is that you, Mary? How are you? Why didn’t you come to the lectures yesterday?Mary. Hallo, Ann, I’m all right today, but I felt very bad yesterday. I couldn’t even get up.Ann. What was the matter with you?Mary. I don’t know, but I had a very high temperature.Ann. Can you go to the university today?Mary. No, I can’t. I feel that I must stay at home today. I’m very sorry that I cannot go to the university and attend the lecture on Economics.Ann. It’s all right! You may have my notes. If you are ill, you must certainly stay at home. May I come to see you?Mary. Certainly, you may. Can you come after the lectures?Ann. I am sorry, I cannot, as after the lectures I must go to the library. I want to take some books for my report.Mary. Don’t go to the library. Come to my place after the lectures. I’ve got many interesting books at home. You can take any of them.* Ann. All right! Can I get to your place by trolley bus 22?Mary. Don’t go by trolley bus. There is a new bus station near my house now. You can come here by bus 35. I always go to the university by bus now. It takes me twenty minutes to get there.**Ann. All right and now I must hurry to the university. So long.Mary. So long. Don’t forget to bring me your notes. Ring me up, if you can’t come.

* You can take any of them. – Poţi să o iai pe oricare dintre ele (cărţi). In an affirmative sentence any has the meaning of oricare.** It takes me twenty minutes to get there. – Drumul până acolo îmi ia douzeci de minute.How long did it take you to translate this article? – It took me two hours to do it.


a talk - o convorbire, o dicuţie can - a puteahallo - alo, salut must - a trebuiwhy - de ce may - a puteabecause, as - deoarece, după cum certainly -(de) sigura lecture - o lecţie a place - un locto feel - a (se) simţi to come to his place – a-l vizitaa to feel bad - a se simţi rău at my place - la mine acasăto feel well - a se simţi bine to get to a place - a ajunge într-un loceven - nici, chiar a trolley bus - un troleibushigh - înalt(ă) to go by trolley bus - a merge cu troleibuzula high temperature - o febră a trolley bus stop - o oprire de troleibuzelow - jos(oasă) a bus - un autobuztall - înalt(ă) – dimensiune a station - o staţienote - conspect, notiţe to hurry - a (se) grăbito make notes - a face notiţe to forget - a uitathat – că to remember - a(-şi) amintiif – dacă to ring up - a telefonaill - bolnav(ă) good-bye - la revederesick - bolnav(ă) so long - pe curând

63

GRAMMAR

MODAL VERBS: CAN, MUST, MAY

infinitive without to. After them we do not use “to” either. Ex. I must go (I must to go). can = to be able to… (for Future Indefinite Tense) – indicates the possibility of doing sth. must = to have to… (for Past and Future Indefinite Tense) - indicates the obligation of doing

sth. may = to be allowed to… (for Future Indefinite Tense) - indicates the probability of doing

sth.

Present Indefinite Tense

affirmative negative interrogativeCan I can

You canHe (she, it) canWe canYou canThey can

I cannot (can’t)You cannotHe (she, it) cannotWe cannotYou cannotThey cannot

Can I?Can you?Can he (she, it)?Can we?Can you?Can they?

Must I mustYou mustHe (she, it) mustWe mustYou mustThey must

I must not (mustn’t)You must notHe (she, it) must notWe must notYou must notThey must not

Must I?Must you?Must he (she, it)?Must we?Must you?Must they?

May I mayYou mayHe (she, it) mayWe mayYou mayThey may

I may not (mayn’t)You may notHe (she, it) may notWe may notYou may notThey may not

May I?May you?May he (she, it)? May we?May you?May they?

Past Indefinite Tense

affirmative negative interrogativeCan I could

You couldHe (she, it) couldWe couldYou couldThey could

I could not (couldn’t)You could notHe (she, it) could notWe could notYou could notThey could not

Could I?Could you?Could he (she, it)?Could we?Could you?Could they?

Must I had toYou had toHe (she, it) had toWe had toYou had toThey had to

I had not (hadn’t) toYou had not toHe (she, it) had not toWe had not toYou had not toThey had not to

Had I to?Had you to?Had he (she, it) to?Had we to?Had you to?Had they to?

May I mightYou mightHe (she, it) mightWe mightYou mightThey might

I might not (mightn’t)You might notHe (she, it) might notWe might notYou might notThey might not

Might I?Might you?Might he (she, it)? Might we?Might you?Might they?

64

* * *that – că. Ex.: He writes that he will write soon.if – dacă. Ex.: If the book is interesting, give it to me to read. as – după cum. Ex.: I work hard at my English as I want to know it well.because – deoarece. Ex.: I could not go to the university yesterday because I was ill.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Make the following sentences negative and interrogative.

a) 1. I can show you an interesting picture of this city. 2. He can give you this report on the life of Jack London. 3. His brother could play the piano very well. 4. She could translate these English texts.

b) 1. We must attend a lecture on American History on Tuesday. 2. You must return my magazines on Wednesday. 3. You must take your friend to the country for the weekend. 4. I must go to see my grandmother on my day off.

c) 1. You may discuss these questions after work. 2. They may take four magazines from that shelf. 3. She may sit on the sofa in my study. 4. He may leave London on Saturday.

2. Answer the following questions using modal verbs.

1. Can you speak English?2. Can you write English?3. How can you speak and write English?4. Can you read English well or badly?5. Can your friend play the piano?6. How can he play the piano?7. Where can we get some English magazines?8. What can you see on the walls of this room?

1. Must your brother attend any lectures at the University?2. What must you do to know English well?3. When must you come to the office?4. With whom must you work at this report?5. When must children go to bed?

1. May I take your pen?2. When may your father go to the country?3. Till what time may we stay at our library?4. May we sometimes finish our work at three o’clock?5. When may children go to the cinema?

1. Can you speak English well or badly?2. What foreign language can you speak well?3. When must you come to your lessons?4. May I ask you a question?5. Can you go to the park now?6. What time may you leave the office on Friday?7. Who can speak French well at your office?8. May you study at the library?9. Where can you prepare your lessons?

65

10. What book must you read now?11. When must you leave the office?12. How long may you wait for the bus?

3. Insert must, can or may.

1. When ____ you come to your lessons? – I ____ come to my lessons at eight o’clock. 2. You ____ not go away now, you ____ stay here till six o’clock. 3. ____ I take your pen? – Yes, you ____. Here it is. 4. Gabriel knows English well. He ____ translate these texts. 5. I ____ not translate this letter. It is too difficult. 6. ____ I come into the room? – No, you ____ not. 7. You ____ come to your lessons in time. 8. ____ you read this text? – Yes, I ____. It is easy. 9. Who ____ bring me “The White Fang”? I ____ prepare a report on this book. 10. I ____ not go to the library today. I have no time. 11. You ____ read this book. It is very easy.

4. Translate paying attention to the use of modal verbs.

a) 1. Prietenul meu poate să vorbească bine în engleză. El a absolvit universitatea trei ani în urmă. 2. Nu vă pot da această carte. Trebuie să-mi pregătesc lecţiile. 3. Puteţi lua aceste flori de pe masă? – Da, desigur. 4. Eu cunosc limba germană rău, dar pot să traduc texte uşoare. 5. Nu am putut citi această carte. Ea este prea dificilă pentru mine. 6. Puteţi să cântaţi bine la pian? 7. Cine trebuie să vină la lecţia noastră? – Domnul director. 8. Ce carte puteţi să-mi recomandaţi pentru lectură (reading)? 9. Mă scuzaţi, dar nu pot să vă dau acum revista. Am uitat-o ieri la oficiu. 10. Puteţi traduce această propoziţie? Ea este foarte uşoară. 11. În copilărie fratele meu putea să vorbească bine în engleză. Acum nu poate vorbi nici într-o limbă străină. El trebuie să înceapă din nou să studieze limba engleză. 12. Cine poate să răspundă la întrebarea mea? – Mihai. El citeşte mult şi cunoaşte multe lucruri.b) 1. Pot să intru (Îmi permiteţi să intru)? 2. Puteţi să veniţi la noi seara? 3. Pot să fumez aici? 4. Eu nu pot să patinez, dar pot să schiez bine. 5. Pot să deschid fereastra? 6. Eu nu pot să deschid această fereastră. Ajutaţi-mă, vă rog. 7. Pot să vorbesc cu dumneavoastră acum? 8. Fratele meu poate să vorbească în trei limbi străine.

5. Make up five sentences using the verb must and five sentences using can. Translate them.

6. Translate using if, that, as, because.

1. De ce nu ştiţi aceste cuvinte? – Eu nu ştiu aceste cuvinte deoarece ieri nu am avut timp să le învăţ. Eu le voi învăţa azi. 2. De ce nu aţi fost la lecţia de management? – Eu nu am fost la lecţie deoarece am fost bolnav. 3. De ce fiica dumneavoastră nu cântă la pian? – Ea nu cântă la pian deoarece nu poate. 4. După cum vedeţi, am venit la lecţii la timp. 5. Ieri l-am vizitat pe prietenul după cum am şi vrut. 6. Dacă nu ştiţi aceste cuvinte, vă pot ajuta să le traduceţi. 7. Vă pot da notiţele mele, dacă puteţi să mi le întoarceţi degrabă. 8. Eu voi lua de la bibliotecă această carte de Dickens, dacă ea nu este prea grea. 9. Dacă doreşti să mergem la Nick, vino la mine sâmbătă. 10. Nu luaţi această carte, dacă este prea dificilă pentru dumneavoastră. 11. Eu ştiu că fratele meu a primit ieri o notă rea la istorie. 12. Ştiţi că John cunoaşte câteva limbi străine? 13. Văd că în dictarea dumneavoastră nu sunt greşeli. 14. Prietenii mei ştiu că eu voi pleca degrabă în Paris. 15. Ne pare rău că părinţii noştri nu sunt acum cu noi.

66


7. Read aloud and translate.

carry, flurry, merry, hurry, marry, berries, ferry, lorry, scurry, barrel, squirrel;cigarette, afar, interval, mischief, tobacco, remark, remember, delicate, aside, arrive.

8. Answer the questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. Do you attend lectures at the University?2. What must you do if you have а high temperature?3. Is Mary ill today?4. Do your friends often come to your place?5. How often do you go to see your friends?6. Can you get to the office by bus?7. Is there a bus station near your house?8. How long does it take you to get to the office?9. Who reads many books by English writers in your group?10. How are you?11. How is your friend?12. What is the matter with your friend?13. Does your friend often feel bad?14. Do you like to go to the station to meet your friends?15. What do you do if you have little time to get to the office in time?16. Why do we usually stay in bed if we have a high temperature?17. Why does Pete often attend lectures on History?18. Why don't you like to go to the office by trolley bus?19. Why can he often walk to the office?


1. I cannot go to the lecture today because I feel bad (2). 2. It takes me one hour to get to the University (1). 3. My friend made a very interesting report yesterday (3). 4. My friend will come to see me on Sunday (2). 5. I usually get to the library by trolley bus (3). 6. My sister's house is high (1). 7. I always forget these words. (2).


(to forget, a lecture, to feel, a place, to ring up, a note, to remember, high, to make notes, a talk, ill, to stay)

1. Do you attend ________ at the University every day? 2. As I ________ bad, I must ________ at home. 3. Why is Gabriel not at the lecture? Is he ________ ? Go to his ________ after the ________, please. 4. Tell me Ann's telephone number, please. I always ________ it. She is ill and I want to ________ her ________ . 5. Why can't you ________ this grammar rule? It is not difficult! 6. I know that Peter always ___ ______ of the lectures which he attends. So you may ask him for his ________ if you didn't attend the last lecture. 7. Please, help me to get that thick book from the shelf. It's too ________ for me. 8. Yesterday Peter and Mary came to my ________ and we had an interesting ________ about our studies.

67

11. Use the following words in sentences of your own.

to have a talk, to ring up, to remember, to be ill, to go to see, a lecture on, even, to make notes, high, to stay, temperature, to feel well, to get to, to hurry, by bus, by tram, because (as).

12. Arrange the following words in order to make sentences.

1. usually, it, me, to get, takes, my, one hour, to, office.2. it, him, this, took, days, book, to read, ten.3. her, takes, it, breakfast, 20 minutes, to have, always.4. take, did, how long, it, to prepare, you, your, home task?5. to translate, how long, it, take, will, them, letters, these ?


1. It usually takes me thirty minutes to get up, wash and dress (2). 2. It will take them two hours to get to Nick’s house (2). 3. It took us fifteen minutes to discuss this question yesterday (2). 4. It will take you two days to read these notes (2). 5. It took them an hour to get to the library (2).

14. Translate using it takes.

1. Pete locuieşte la ţară. El are nevoie de două ore ca să ajungă la oficiu. 2. De cât timp aveţi nevoie ca să pregătiţi raportul dumneavoastră? – Eu voi avea nevoie de două săptămâni. 3. Cât timp i-a trebuit lui pentru a răspunde la aceste scrisori? 4. De cât timp aţi avut nevoie ieri pentru a învăţa cuvintele noi? – Eu am avut nevoie de două ore. 5. De cât timp ei au nevoie pentru a termina lucrul lor? – Ei au nevoie de zece zile.

15. Make up sentences using the given models.

a) It takes me five minutes to get there.b) It took him half an hour to do that work.c) It will take them an hour and a half to get to the University.d) Does it take you much time to get there?e) How long did it take him to read this story?f) Will it take them an hour to do this exercise? g) It doesn’t take me long to get to my office. h) It didn’t take her long to рrеpare her report.i) It won't take you long to copy this text.

16. Translate paying attention to the meaning of the following words.

а) good, well, bad, badly.1. Cunoaşteţi bine cuvintele noi din ultima lecţie? 2. Prietenul meu ştie bine două limbi străine. 3. Aveţi copii buni. Ei întotdeauna răspund bine la întrebările profesorului, deoarece întotdeauna îşi pregătesc bine lecţiile. 4. Nu pot să traduc bine acest text deoarece nu cunosc aceste cuvinte. 5. Tatăl lui se simte astăzi rău. 6. Ieri aţi citi rău această lecţie. 7. Ieri timpul a fost foarte rău. 8. Ieri prietena mea se simţea bine, dar astăzi iar se simte rău. 9. Eu nu voi putea să vin la voi deoarece tatăl meu se simte rău.

68

b) very, very much.1. Cântaţi foarte bine la pian. 2. Acest film este foarte bun. El mi-a plăcut foarte mult. 3. Eu vreau foarte mult să-l văd pe prietenul nostru. 4. Astăzi este o zi foarte bună. 5. Pete se simte foarte rău. El nu poate să vorbească cu dumneavoastră.

c) can, may.1. Pot să iau notiţele dumneavoastră la istorie? 2. Dumneavoastră puteţi să traduceţi aceste scrisori din română în engleză. Ele nu sunt tare dificile. 3. El poate să frecventeze lecţiile de literatură engleză luna viitoare? – Nu, el va avea mult de lucru seara. 4. Poate fiul dumneavoastră să meargă la ţară cu noi? 5. De ce nu puteţi să veniţi la noi azi seara? – Eu nu pot să vin la dumneavoastră deoarece mă simt rău. 6. Se poate de ajuns la dumneavoastră cu autobuzul? 7. Pot să deschid fereastra? 8. Nu pot să uit despre aceasta. 9. Pot să ies? Mă simt rău. 10. El nu poate vorbi în franceză, dar poate să citească în această limbă.

17. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. Bună ziua! Ce mai faceţi? – Bună ziua. Mulţumesc, bine. – Aţi fost ieri la ora de literatură? – Din păcate, nu am fost. Mă simţeam rău şi am rămas acasă. 2. Ce este cu dumneavoastră? Vă simţiţi rău? Mergeţi la medic. La noi la universitate este un medic foarte bun. 3. Cum ajungeţi de obicei la universitate? – Câteodată merg cu troleibuzul, dar de obicei – cu autobuzul. – Cât timp vă ia drumul până la universitate? – Cu autobuzul – 20 de minute. 4. Puteţi să-mi daţi notiţele dumneavoastră la literatură? – Desigur. Veniţi la mine mâine. – Bine, mulţumesc. 5. Să nu uiţi să mă telefonezi seara. 6. Nu pot să-mi amintesc această regulă gramaticală. 7. Lecţia se începe la ora opt. Trebuie să ne grăbim la universitate. 8. Aveţi febră. Trebuie să rămâneţi acasă. 9. Aţi făcut ieri raportul? – Nu. Eu nu am fost ieri la universitate. Am fost bolnav. 10. Astăzi nu pot să vin la dumneavoastră. Trebuie să merg la bibliotecă să mă pregătesc de raport. 11. De cât timp aveţi nevoie pentru a vă pregăti bine tema de acasă? – De obicei am nevoie de o oră sau două, dacă tema nu este foarte grea. 12. Uitaţi-vă la acest om înalt. Îl ţineţi minte? Am învăţat împreună cu el la universitate.

18. Make a short story on one of the given topics:

1. A Visit to a Sick Friend.to ring up, to go to see, how are you, what is the matter, temperature, to feel bad, to be very ill, to be sorry, to attend.

2. How I Get to the Office.near (far), to get to, an Underground station, by the Underground, to hurry, to forget, it takes me.

69

LESSON TEN (THE TENTH LESSON)

A LETTER TO A FRIEND

Dear Paul,

At last I can write you a letter. I could not answer your letter last week because I was very busy. Yesterday I passed my examination in Mathematics and in two days I will be quite free. In three days my sister will take her last examination and in a week we will leave Chişinău for Constanţa. We will go to a rest-home for our holiday.When we were in Constanţa last year, we had a very good time there.You know that I like the sea. I will swim and lie in the sun two or three hours a day. I am sorry you won't be with us. You write that you cannot forget the holiday which we spent in Mangalia two years ago. I can't forget it either. I am sorry you will not go to any resort this year. When will you have your holiday? Is your wife's health still poor? I hope that soon she will be all right. How long do you intend to live in the country? Is there a river and a forest there? I will return to Chişinău at the beginning of August as I must prepare for the new university-year. I think I will visit you then. May I come to your place on the tenth or eleventh of August?We will be very glad to hear from you before our departure.

My best regards to your family.

Yours, Nick.


dear – drag health – sănătate at last – în sfârşit still – încăto be busy – a fi ocupat poor – sărac, sărmanto be free – a fi liber rich – bogatan examination – examen to hope – a sperato take an examination – a avea un examen to intend – a avea intenţiato pass an examination – a susţine examenul a river – un râuto examine – a examina a forest – o pădurequite – destul de (the) beginning – începu(ul)at all – deloc (the) end – sfârşit(ul)a rest-home – o staţiune de odihnă at the beginning – la începutula holiday – o vacanţă at the end – la sfârşitulto have a good time – a petrece timpul bine a university-year – un an universitara sea – o mare to think – a se gândi, a credeto swim – a înota a visit – o vizită(the) sun – soare(le) to visit – a vizitato lie – a sta întins to hear – a auzito lie in the sun – a se bronza to hear from – a auzi despreeither – tot (în prop. negative) a departure – o plecare

70


1. Read aloud.

In three days not go at the beginningIn that place intend to live forget the holidayIn the sun glad to hear forest there

culture, rapture, lecture, nature, feature, furniture; can, letter, day, wife, will, three, week, rest-home, spent, that, place, too, good, time, like, swim, lie, sun, vacation, beginning, departure.


1. When do you usually have your examinations? 2. When will you take your examination in English? 3. How did you pass your last examination in English?4. Will you be free tomorrow afternoon?5. Why will you be busy?6. Were you at the theatre last Sunday? Did you have a good time there?7. Where did you have a good time last Sunday?8. Did you go to a rest-home for your holiday last year?9. Do you like the sea? Why do you like the sea?10. How much time a day can you lie in the sun?11. Can your friends swim?12. Do they swim well or badly?13. Do your friends like to swim in the river?14. How many hours a day do you rest?15. Will you go to the country or stay in the town next Sunday?16. Why will you stay in the town? (What will you do in the country?)11. Will you have your holiday at the beginning of July or at the end of it?17. What places will you visit in the summer?18. Why do people like Constanţa?12. Are you glad to hear from your friends, when you are away from your town?13. Do you visit your friends before departure or do your friends come to your place?


1. It will take you two hours to get there (2). 2. I won't go to the cinema either because I am busy to-night (1). 3. At the end of the school-year we usually have five English lessons a week (1). 4. We will have our examination at the end of June (2). 5. His wife's health is still poor (1). 6. He can't write you a letter as he has no time (1). 7. Our students passed their examination in English very well last year (3). 8. I intend to spend three hours a day on my English before the examination (4).


Yesterday I received ______ letter from my friend. He is ______ student. He lives in ______ Chişinău and studies at ______ Chişinău State University. He studies English Literature. Last year we spent our holiday together. We were in ______ Mangalia and had ______ very good time there. We swam in ______ sea and lay in ______ sun two hours ______ day. This summer my friend lives in ______ country. "There is ______ river and ______ forest here", he writes. "I often go there. I will stay in this place till _____ September. I will return to Chişinău at _____

71

end of August. I will be very glad to hear from you soon". Today I will write ______ letter to him. I will write about ______ work of our office and about my life.

5. Insert the prepositions where necessary.

______ next week I will take my examination ______ English. I will begin to repeat the texts ______ two days. I will work ______ my English two or three hours a day. ______ the examination we can usually attend lessons five times ______ a week. ______ examination I will leave ______ Bălţi ______ Constanţa. I usually live near ______ the sea there. I will swim ______ the sea and lie ______ the sun. I will return ______ Bălţi ______ the end ______ August. I hope I will have a good holiday ______ this year.

6. Translate into English paying attention to the following word combinations:

а) То take an examination, to pass an examination.1. Când aţi susţinut ultimul examen? — Eu am susţinut ultimul examen trei zile în urmă. — Cum l-aţi susţinut? — Bine. Am luat o notă bună. 2. De ce nu aţi susţinut ieri examenul la literatură? Eu nu am susţinut examenul deoarece m-am simţit rău. Am avut febră. 3. Cine trebuie să susţină examenul de istorie la ora trei? — Eu. — Puteţi să susţineţi examenul acum. John a luat examenul la ora două. Profesorul este acum liber. 4. Cum au susţinut studenţii noştri examenul de engleză ieri? — Bine. Doar unul dintre ei nu a luat examenul. El a primit o notă rea. El lucrează puţin asupra limbii engleze. 5. Unde de obicei ei susţin examenul la istorie? — În sala 40. 6. Trebuie să lucraţi mult dacă doriţi să susţineţi bine examenul la germană.

b) Else, still1. Ce mai doriţi să scrieţi în scrisoarea dumneavoastră? 2. Cine mai trebuie să vină aici? 3. Mai sunteţi încă acasă? 4. Prietenul dumneavoastră încă este în oraşul nostru? Rugaţi-l să vină la noi. 5. Ce aţi mai văzut ieri la teatru? 6. Mai studiaţi la universitate? 7. Unde l-aţi mai văzut pe Tom ieri? 8. De ce sunteţi încă aici? Trebuie să mergeţi la ore. 9. Ce aţi mai pregătit aseară? 10. Pete încă este bolnav. 11. Vă mai simţiţi rău? 12. Unde mai aveţi de gând să vă duceţi astăzi? 13. Cui să-i mai dau această carte? 14. Michael încă este în oraş? — Nu, el a plecat la ţară ieri. 15. Cine mai poate face acest lucru? — Noi.

c) То visit, to attend.1. Când frecventaţi de obicei lecţiile de istorie? — Miercurea şi vinerea. 2. Când am fost în Londra am vizitat multe teatre şi muzee. 3. Soţia mea nu frecventează lecţiile de literatură. Ea a susţinut examenul la acest obiect anul trecut. 4. Dacă doriţi să cunoaşteţi mult despre ţara voastră trebuie să călătoriţi mult, să vizitaţi muzeele, să citiţi mult. 5. Ieri câţiva ingineri străini au vizitat uzina noastră. 6. Nick învaţă bine. El întotdeauna face temele de acasă şi frecventează lecţiile.

d) Quite, at all.1. Deloc nu vreau să merg la ţară. 2. Sunt deja destul de liber şi pot să merg cu voi la cinema. 3. Nu pot să înot deloc. 4. Tatăl meu este deja destul de bătrân, el are şaptezeci şi cinci de ani. 5. Fiica mea nu poate deloc să se bronzeze. 6. Prietenul meu trăieşte destul de aproape de mine. 7. Această traducere nu este deloc dificilă. 8. Eu sunt destul de sănătos. De ce credeţi că sunt bolnav? 9. Nu ştiţi deloc aceste reguli. Învăţaţi-le. 10. Cer scuze, dar nu vă cunosc deloc.

e) Too, also, either.1. Fiul meu tot nu poate să cânte la pian. 2. Fiul dumneavoastră tot a susţinut toate examenele săptămâna trecută? 3. Tot nu primiţi de la el scrisori? 4. Dumneavoastră toţi vă veţi întoarce la sfârşitul lui octombrie? 5. Ei tot sunt încă aici? 6. Ei tot nu iubesc să se bronzeze. 7. Noi tot nu avem de gând să mergem la o casă de odihnă anul acesta. 8. Prietenii mei tot nu pleacă azi la

72

ţară, deoarece fiica lor este bolnavă. 9. Eu tot nu vă sfătui să mergeţi la această lecţie. 10. Acest text tot nu este greu.

f) In, for, on, at, to.1. Ieri dimineaţa eu am susţinut examenul la limba română şi am luat o notă bună. 2. Vara noi mergem de obicei la ţară în vacanţă. 3. Mâine eu voi pleca la Chişinău. Cred că mă voi întoarce peste trei zile. 4. Duminica trecută noi am fost la ţară. Am stat acolo trei ore. Am mers la râu, am înotat acolo şi ne-am bronzat. 5. Această carte este prea dificilă pentru mine. 6. Ce fel de exerciţii ne-a dat profesorul pentru acasă? 7. Lecţia noastră se începe de obicei la ora nouă. 8. Această femeie lucrează la universitate, iar soţul ei lucrează la uzină. 9. Noi am terminat lucrul nostru la începutul anului 2000. 10. Câte ore pe zi lucraţi asupra limbii engleze? — Eu lucrez de obicei asupra limbii engleze două ore pe zi. 11. Priviţi acest tablou! Ce vedeţi pe el? 12. Unul dintre studenţii noştri nu lucrează deloc asupra limbii engleze. — Noi tot avem un student care nu lucrează asupra limbii engleze. 13. Sunt ceva tablouri pe pereţii acestei camere? 14. Noi vom avea o dictare joi. 15. Unde veţi merge în week-end? 16. Intenţionez să-mi vizitez prietenii pe 10 noiembrie. 17. Cât timp aţi cheltuit pe raportul dumneavoastră? 18. Câte ore de istorie au frecventat aceşti studenţi luna trecută?


else, still; at last; to be busy, to be free; quite, at all; to have a good time; to lie in the sun; two or three times a day (a week, a month); too, also, either; at the beginning, at the end; to hear from; before his (her, our...) departure; to have a good holiday.

8. Translate into English the following verbs and give their three forms.

a studia, a se grăbi, a juca, a începe, a telefona, a înota, a sta culcat, a se gândi, a aduce, a asculta, a învăţa, a uita, a simţi, a ajunge, a părăsi, a vedea, a schia, a şti, a vorbi.


а) 1. Când veţi susţine examenul la limba engleză? — Cred că-l voi susţine la sfârşitul lui iunie. 2. Noi vom pleca în zilele de odihnă la ţară. Sper să petrecem acolo bine timpul. Putem să mergem în pădure sau la râu. 3. Când sora dumneavoastră intenţionează să meargă la ţară? — Eu cred că ea încă (yet) nu va pleca săptămâna aceasta (this week). 4. Când veţi discuta ultima întrebare? — Noi o vom discuta peste o oră. 5. Ce medic va examina sora dumneavoastră bolnavă? — Medicul Smith. 6. Veniţi la noi deseară. Noi vom fi liberi şi vom petrece timpul bine. 7. Veţi fi foarte ocupat luni? Vreau să vă arăt noua noastră lucrare la istorie. — Poftim, veniţi. Eu nu voi fi deloc ocupat. 8. Fratele meu îşi petrece de obicei vacanţa în staţiune. 9. Prietenul dumneavoastră mai învaţă? — Nu. El a terminat universitatea anul trecut. Eu tot nu învăţ acum. Eu lucrez. 10. Ce trebuie să mai pregătim? 11. Când intenţionaţi să plecaţi la staţiune? — Sper că voi pleca la staţiune peste o săptămână. Acum nu pot pleca acolo deoarece sunt foarte ocupat. Soţia mea tot nu poate pleca acum. 12. Eu voi pleca în Marea Britanie la începutul lui aprilie. Până la plecarea mea eu trebuie să termin lucrarea mea şi să i-o dau lui Gabriel. 13. De câte ori pe săptămână vă ocupaţi de engleză? — Noi ne ocupăm de engleză de patru ori pe săptămână. 14. Câte ore pe zi vă ia pregătirea către examenul de literatură engleză?

b) Studenţii noştri pot să înveţe şi să lucreze bine. Ei de asemeni ştiu cum să se odihnească bine. Când au timp liber, ei merg la cinema, la teatru, frecventează ore interesante sau se odihnesc acasă împreună cu prietenii lor. Mulţi (studenţi) îşi petrec vacanţa la mare, unde vara pot să petreacă bine timpul: să se plimbe, să înoate, să se bronzeze.

73

c) Dragă Ana,Ştii că eu tot nu am putut să-ţi scriu imediat scrisoare, deoarece luna trecută am fost foarte ocupată. Trei zile în urmă eu, în sfârşit, am terminat lucrul. Acum sunt destul de liberă şi pot scrie scrisori prietenilor mei. Copiii mei degrabă vor susţine examenele, şi vom pleca în vacanţă la ţară.Vom trăi la vilă (country house), unde am trăit anul trecut. Nu iubesc să trăiesc în locuri pe care nu le cunosc deloc. Dar acest loc este foarte bun. El ne-a plăcut foarte mult. Acolo este o pădure şi un râu. Ne vom scălda (vom înota) şi ne vom bronza câte două sau trei ore pe zi. Sora mea şi-a petrecut vara trecută în acest loc împreună cu fiul. Ştii că sănătatea lui este foarte rea. Acum el se simte destul de bine. Tu nu ai de gând să vii la noi? Vino la începutul lui iulie împreună cu familia, vom petrece bine timpul împreună.Vreau să am veşti de la tine până la plecare.Salutări soţului şi copiilor, Maria.

10. Make a short story about your last summer vacation using the given words.

at last, to be on holiday, in the summer, to take (pass) an examination in..., free, a rest-home, a departure, to have a good time, the sea, to swim, to lie in the sun, a poor health, to intend, a river, a forest, at the beginning (end) of..., to visit, to be glad, to hear from..., to have a good holiday.

74

LESSON ELEVEN (THE ELEVENTH LESSON)

MY FRIEND IN LONDON

My friend is a very clever fellow, but he does not like to show this. His name is John. His parents are very kind people. His father retired on a pension not long ago. My friend likes very much reading and in general studying. We are members of a non-governmental organization. He likes to help people, that’s why he has got a very good reputation among us. My friend studies very much. Last month our non-governmental organization sent him as our delegate to an exhibition in London. Two days ago he returned home. In the evening many friends came to his house. They wanted to listen to his story about the capital of the Great Britain.

"Tell us about London", they asked him, "What kind of city is London? Did you like it? What did you see there?"

"Well, well, I will try to answer all your questions", my friend said."It was my first visit to London", he began. "I visited many interesting places, where we

could see a lot of amazing things. There are very many tourists in London, especially during the summer.”

“And what about the weather? Did it rain?”, asked one of our friends.“The weather was nearly all the time beautiful except some rainy days at the beginning of

my journey there. I easily recognized the places I had seen in the books. I could see straight and wide streets, beautiful squares, green parks and gardens. I saw very many monuments, universities, hospitals and hotels. I saw the famous London underground and many new buildings. There are many fine buildings in the suburbs of the city, too. I did not see dirty or narrow streets there. London is an important financial and industrial centre. There are many big banks in it. I visited some of them and met many interesting people there.

"Thank you for your story", one of us said. "I think, that next year some of us will also have the possibility to visit London.”


clever – deştept a weather – un timpfellow – tip to rain – a plouato show – a arăta nearly – aproapekind (adj.) – bun la inimă beautiful – frumosto retire on a pension – a se retrage la pensie a journey – o călătoriea non-governmental organization – un ONG to recognize – a recunoaşteto help – a ajuta straight – dreptthat’s why – iată de ce… wide – larga reputation – o reputaţie a square – un scuaras (prep.) – ca, drept a garden – o grădinăa delegate – un delegat a hospital – un spitalan exhibition – o expoziţie a hotel – un hotelto listen to – a asculta an underground – un metroa story – o istorie a suburb – o suburbiea capital – o capitală in the suburbs – în suburbiito try – a încerca dirty – murdara place – un loc narrow – îngust, strâmta lot of – o mulţime de important – importantamazing – uimitor financial – financiara tourist – un turist industrial – industrial

75


1. Read aloud.

fate, fact, 'comrade, 'cabbage, a'like, a'gain, farm, 'grammar, fare, pet, Pete, pert, 'reader, release, re'main, 'ticket, 'cricket, here, pin, pine, first, fire, mis'took, 'valid, bun, fume, burn, cure, 'difficult, 'multitude, box, pro'cure, 'phone, po'tato, born, more.

2. Translate the following words. How are they formed?

a) building sunny builder b) beautifulexhibition cultural recognition hopefulbeginning collective listener thankfulfarmer villager agricultural forgetfulmeeting delegation departure helpfulindustrial capitalist healthydirty certainly


1. What is the capital of the Great Britain?2. Are there many or few high buildings in London?3. Is there an underground in London? 4. Where does our non-governmental organization send their best members as delegatesevery year?5. What did your friend see there? 6. Are there many beautiful houses in the suburbs of London? 7. Are the streets of London wide or narrow?8. When did you visit Chişinău for the first time?9. Are the streets of Chişinău narrow?10. Do you live in the suburbs or in the centre of Bălţi?11. When did you see the new building of Bălţi University?12. Are there many important industrial centres in our country?13. What industrial centres of our country do you know?14. Where did you live when you studied at school?15. What books did you read when you were a child?16. With whom did you prepare your home-work when you studied English?17. Do you remember well the time when you studied at school?18. What is the name of the town (village) where you were born?

76

Word Formation

-ive [iv] — this suffix forms adjectives from verbs:to collect collective

-ful [ful] — this suffix forms adjectives from nouns and sometimes from verbs:beauty beautiful to forget forgetful

-age [idз] — this is a noun suffix (especially in words coming from French):village

19. Where did your family live at the time when you were born?20. Does your best friend know the town (village) where you were born?21. Where were you (on) the day when your friend came to see you?

4. Fill in the gaps with the verbs to say, to speak, or to tell in the right tense form.

1. Yesterday I came to see my friend. He _______ , "Peter and I will go to the country on our day off together with our friends. Do you want to go with us?" 2. What did your teacher _______ you? 3. Our teacher always _______, "Jane _______English well". 4. What did you _______ to about after classes yesterday? 5. Whom did you _______ to about our plan to go to Chişinău ? — I saw Pete yesterday and _______ to him about it. He _______ to me, "I like your plan very much." 6. Did I _______ that? 7. "We got up early on Sunday", my sister _______ 8. He ______ very well. (He is a good speaker). 9. "We will _______ English after our lesson too", Nick _______. 10. My grandfather likes to _______ us about his life. 11. Ann knows three foreign languages. She often _______ French at the office and at home. 12. Don't _______ him about it. 13. My friend _______ to me, "They want to _______ about this matter at the meeting tomorrow." 14. Our father always _______ that we must work hard to study well. 15. I shall _______ them about this matter today.

5. Translate paying attention to the use of the verbs to go and to come.

1. Nu vreau să intru în cameră. Daţi-mi, vă rog, geanta. Eu am lăsat-o ieri în fotoliul de lângă fereastră. 2. Când am ieşit din cameră, l-am văzut pe Nick în coridor (corridor). El vroia să vorbească cu mine, dar nu vroia să intre în cameră. 3. Mergeţi în clasă şi aduceţi-vă caietele şi cărţile. 4. Veniţi încoace. Stiloul dumneavoastră este la mine pe masă. L-aţi lăsat aici sâmbăta trecută. 5. Intraţi. Vom vorbi cu dumneavoastră acum. 6. Intraţi în cameră. Nu pot să vorbesc cu dumneavoastră când sunteţi în coridor. 7. Mergeţi la Tom acasă. El este foarte bolnav şi nu poate să vină astăzi. 8. Veniţi la mine deseară. Prietenul meu va fi la mine. El ne va povesti multe lucruri interesante. 9. Mergeţi în camera 49 şi aduceţi un scaun. 10. Nu mergeţi la el mâine. El nu va fi acasă.

6. Make 10 sentences using the words either, also, at all, quite.

7. Give antonyms to the following words.

narrow old rich lowclean tall short to rememberlarge after wrong busy

8. Give synonyms to the following words.

to go away, to come to see, high, fine, much.

9. Give the three basic forms of the following verbs.

to say, to build, to send, to spend, to listen, to hear, to tell, to see, to try, to hurry, to meet, to think, to bring, to lie, to show, to know, to speak, to forget, to leave.


1. Ieri aţi lucrat în clădirea nouă sau veche a bibliotecii orăşeneşti? 2. Sora mea lucrează la expoziţia centrală. Ea lucrează acolo ca (în calitate de economist) economist. 3. Unde ei vor

77

construi o şcoală nouă? — Ei vor construi o şcoală nouă pe această stradă. 4. Anul trecut eu mi-am petrecut vacanţa la ţară cu părinţii. Câteodată eu lucram împreună cu ei. Mie îmi plăcea aceasta foarte mult. Acum mă simt foarte bine. Astăzi vreau să trimit o scrisoare de la ţară prietenilor mei. 5. Noi am ascultat povestirea ei cu atenţie. 6. Delegaţii la expoziţia din Londra au ascultat ieri raportul domnului Smith despre lucrul firmei. 7. Bunica mea cunoaşte multe povestiri interesante. Ea ne povesteşte des aceste povestiri. Nouă ne place foarte mult s-o ascultăm. 8. Mie mi-au plăcut toate aceste cărţi. Încercaţi să le citiţi. 9. Încercaţi să faceţi acest lucru astăzi. 10. Pete a încercat să deschidă uşa, dar nu a putut. Eu tot nu am putut s-o deschid. 11. Aţi încercat să traduceţi acest articol? El nu este deloc dificil. 12. Am încercat să vorbesc cu el de câteva ori, dar el nu a vrut să mă asculte. Voi încerca iarăşi să vorbesc cu el mâine. 13. Pe ce stradă locuiţi? — Locuiesc pe strada Libertăţii. 14. Pe piaţa Alecsandri este un teatru. 15. În republica noastră sunt puţine centre industriale importante. 16. Această întrebare este foarte importantă. Mâine noi o vom discuta iarăşi. 17. Copilăria lui Dickens a fost foarte grea. 18. Acest scriitor tânăr lucrează mult (din greu) asupra cărţilor sale. 19. Oare nu-l cunoaşteţi pe acest om? Am lucrat împreună cinci ani în urmă. 20. Ieri nu am putut să vă recunosc. Dumneavoastră tot nu aţi putut să mă recunoaşteţi. 21. Londra este capitala Angliei (England).


Unul dintre prietenii mei buni locuieşte la Bucureşti. El are un apartament într-o clădire nouă de pe strada principală. El nu are familie. El locuieşte cu fratele, care studiază la universitate. Fratele are 20 de ani. Prietenul meu şi eu am învăţat împreună la şcoală în Bălţi în 1998. În 2004, când am terminat şcoala, eu am început să studiez la universitate, iar el a plecat la Bucureşti. El acolo tot studiază în una dintre marele universităţi. Când avem vacanţă, ne întâlnim deseori. Anul acesta intenţionăm să petrecem iarăşi vacanţa împreună. El va veni la Bălţi, va petrece aici câteva zile cu noi, iar mai apoi noi vom pleca la Soroca. În Soroca sunt multe locuri frumoase. Am fost acolo anul trecut şi ne-a plăcut foarte mult acest oraş.

12. Retell the text as if you were а) a member of another non-governmental organization, b) John.

13. Make a dialogue between John and another participant to the exhibition in London.

14. Make a short essay choosing one of the topics below using the given words.

a) We Study Foreign Languages.to attend, a lesson, a lecture, to come in time, to say, to speak, a grammar rule, to write, to make notes, to make mistakes, to prepare, to work hard at..., to repeat, together, to translate, to read, a library, from the library, it takes me..., to take an examination in..., to pass an examination, well, badly, to get a good (bad) mark, to know.

b) My Working Day.to wake up, early, to get up, to wash, to dress, to go by bus (by trolley bus), a building, high, it takes me..., to hurry, to work hard, to be busy, to translate, to receive, to discuss, important, to last, to return.

c) My Day Off.to be free, to go to the country (a park), to have a good time, to have a rest, to walk, the sun, a river, a forest, to go to the cinema (to the theatre), a new play (film), with interest, to play the piano, to listen to, to see a television show, music, to play chess (volley-ball, football etc.), to be glad.

78

d) My Family (My Friend's Family).to be born, at my (my friend's) place, to live near (far from), to have a large family, parents, grandfather (grandmother), children, a woman (man) of..., a girl (boy) of..., to go to school, to take to the kindergarten, to spend much time on..., a university, an engineer, an economist, a student, a teacher, a doctor, a worker, a farmer, to come (go) to see..., to graduate from...

e) Our Holiday.to leave my town for..., to go for a holiday, poor health, to intend, to have a good time, the weather, fine, a river, a sea, to go to the sea, to swim, to lie in the sun, to play chess (volley-ball, tennis etc.), a forest, a library, to go to the cinema, with interest, at the beginning of..., at the end of..., to have a good holiday.

f) The Capital of England.a street, a square, a club, a museum, the centre, the City, Whitehall, an office, the Houses of Parliament, the Westminster Abbey, the suburbs, crooked, narrow, dirty.

g) My Flat.on the... floor, a dining-room, a bedroom, a bath-room, a kitchen, a study, in the middle of..., to the right, to the left, in the corner, a piano, an armchair, a book-case, a television set, a sofa, a cupboard, a vase, a flower, comfortable.

79

LESSON TWELVE (THE TWELFTH LESSON)

AT DINNER-TIME (Meals)

I usually have dinner at half past one, but yesterday I went to the officewithout breakfast (I had only a cup of tea) and at twelve o'clock I was already hungry. I don't like to have dinner alone. So I said to Nick: “Let us have dinner together”. “All right”, he answered. “I shall join you as soon as I translate this letter.”

When we came into the restaurant there were few people there. We sat down at a table near the window. Soon the waitress came up to our table. She brought spoons, forks, knives and plates.

“Will you have soup today?” I asked Nick.“No, I won't. I am not very hungry,” he said. “But I shall have some salad, meat and

potatoes, and ice-cream”. “Why, do you like ice-cream so much? I never take ice-cream in winter. I like tea with lemon or, coffee for sweet.”

“Oh! Here is the waitress! (The waitress brings some salad). The salad is very good, but there is not enough salt in it. Pass me the salt, please.”

“Here is the salt!”“Thank you.”“Shall I pass you some brown bread?”“No, thank you. I usually take it with the soup, and with the meat course I like white bread.”“Are there any sweets at the buffet? I want to buy some for my tea. I’ll be back soon. Shall I

get some sweets or a cake for you too?”“Don't go there now, we shall go to the buffet together when dinner is over."So, when dinner was over, we went to the buffet, bought some sweets, talked a little and at

five minutes to two we left the restaurant.As it took us only 25 minutes to have our dinner, we had some time before work to read a

newspaper and have a smoke*.Half an hour later we began to work again.

* to have a smoke – a fuma (покурить)to have a talk – a discuta (поговорить)to have a swim – a înota (поплавать)to have a rest – a se odihni (отдохнуть)to have a look – a se uita (взглянуть)


meal – bucate ice-cream – îngheţatăpast – după, trecut de never – niciodatăwithout – fără coffee – cafeatea – ceai sweet – dulcea cup of tea – o ceaşcă de ceai enough – destulhungry – flămând salt – sareto be hungry – a fi flămând sugar – zahărto be thirsty – a fi însetat to pass – a daalone – singur bread – pâineto join – a se alătura brown bread – pâine neagrăa restaurant – un restaurant white bread – pâine albăa waitress – o chelnăriţă course – fel de mâncarea waiter – un chelner sweets – dulciuri

80

to come up – a se apropia to buy – a cumpăraa fork – o furculiţă to sell – a vindea knife – un cuţit to be back – a se întoarcea plate – o farfurie, un fel de mâncare a cake – o prăjiturăsoup – supă to talk – a discuta, a vorbisalad – salată a little – puţinmeat – carne to smoke – a fumapotato(es) – cartof(i)

when – cândas soon as – îndată cetill, until (conj.) – până cândbefore (conj.) – înainte deafter (conj.) – dupăwhile – în timp celater – mai târziu

GRAMMAR

EXPRESSING A DESIRE OR AN ORDER

Let + noun or pronoun (object case) + short infinitive

Ex: Let us go there.Let my son do it.Let them answer this letter.

PRESENT SIMPLE IN CLAUSES TIME OF AND CONDITION

In clauses of time and condition introduced by when, as soon as, till, until, after, before and if we never use Future Indefinite Tense. Instead of it we use Present Simple Tense.

Ex.: When I come to see you, I will bring you this book.I will do it tomorrow, if I have time.As soon as you finish your work, we will go to the cinema.

EXPRESSING THE TIME IN ENGLISH

a second [э 'sekэnd] – o secundă (секунда)a minute [э 'minit] – un minut (минута)an hour [эп 'аиэ] – o oră (час)half an hour ['ha:f эn 'аиэ] – jumătate de oră (полчаса) а quarter of an hour [э 'kwo:tэr эv эn 'аuэ] – un sfert de oră (четверть часа) an hour and a half [эn 'аиэ эnd э hα:f] – o oră şi jumătate (полтора часа)

81

o’clock

12

PAST

a quarter to 9 3 a quarter past

TO

6 half past

a.m. — ante meridiem – from 12 o’clock in the midnight till 12 o’clock in the afternoon.p.m. — post meridiem - from 12 o’clock in the afternoon till 12 o’clock in the midnight.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Use the pronouns from brackets in object case and translate.

1. Let (we) discuss these questions. 2. Let (he) translate these letters from English into Romanian. 3. Let (I) go to see him. He is ill. 4. Let (they) return those books to the library today. 5. Let (she) learn the new words from Lesson two. 6. Let (we) read that book about our city.

2. Translate in English.

1. Să deschidem fereastra în cameră. 2. Lăsaţi-l pe Tom să povestească despre capitala Angliei. 3. Daţi eu o să traduc acest articol. 4. Lăsaţi-i să citească şi să discute această carte. 5. Lasă copiii să meargă la ţară duminică. 6. Să mergem la universitate cu autobusul. 7. Jane cunoaşte limba franceză. Lăsaţi-o să întâlnească această delegaţie. Eu nu pot vorbi franţuzeşte. 8. Să mergem la lecţia de literatură engleză. Cred că va fi interesantă. 9. Permiteţi-mi să pun cartea aici. 10. Mă scuzaţi, permiteţi-mi să iau revistele mele.

3. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses in time and condition clauses.

1. If I am not busy on Sunday, I will go to see my friend. 2. My friend will go to the country on holiday if he passes his examinations well. 3. The children will swim in the river and lie in the sun when they come here to stay over the weekend. 4. As soon as my brother returns to our village, he will begin to work on our farm. 5. I will come in after the lesson is over. 6. We shall work with this delegation till they leave for their home country. 7. Don't go to the cinema before you finish this work. 8. You may stay here until I return from the country.

82


1. I will go to the country when – I … – my friend ...

– mу father ...

2. We will visit Nick if – we...– he...– you...

3. Stay here till – I ...– these economists ...– Tom ...

4. We shall finish this work before – our teacher ...– we ...– this man ...

5. My friend will go to Mangalia as soon as – he ...– we ...– his sister ...

6. I will give you this book after – I ...– my friend ...– one of our students ...

5. Translate paying attention to the use of Present Simple Tense in clauses of time and condition.

1. Unde veţi pleca să vă odihniţi după ce veţi susţine examenele? 2. Când vom pleca la ţară, în fiecare zi vom merge la pădure. 3. Eu vă voi da această carte, dacă o voi găsi. 4. Noi putem să citim un ziar până ce se începe lecţia. 5. Dacă în sala de lectură (reading-room) va fi multă lume, eu voi lucra acasă. 6. Îndată ce voi fi liber, eu vă voi vizita. 7. Puteţi să lucraţi în camera mea până ce voi veni eu.

6. Answer the following questions using the time indicated in brackets.

1. (At) What time do you usually get up? (7:10 a. m.). 2. What time does your son have breakfast? (8:30 a. m.). 3. What time do you usually go to the office? (8:15 a. m.). 4. What time does your teacher come into the class-room if the lesson begins at 10 o'clock? (9:50 or 9:55 a. m.). 5. What time did you return home yesterday? (6:45 p. m.). 6. What time were you at the library two days ago? (1:40 p. m.). 7. What time did you prepare your home task yesterday? (7:15 - 9:10 p. m.). 8. What time did you go to see your friends the day before yesterday? (5:20 p. m.). 9. What time does your sister go to bed? (9:30 p. m.). 10. What time did you go to bed yesterday? (11:50 p. m.).

7. Translate.

1. Ieri am venit la staţia de autobuze (bus-stop) la şapte şi un sfert, dar autobuzul nu era şi eu am hotărât să merg acasă pe jos. 2. Să mergem la cafenea la ora unu fără zece. La această oră acolo este puţină lume. 3. Veniţi aici la trei şi douăzeci, vom pleca împreună la bibliotecă. 4.

83

Întotdeauna vă sculaţi la ora aceasta? — Da. Noi întotdeauna ne sculăm la ora şapte fără un sfert. 5. Noi vom veni la gară la unsprezece fără douăzeci şi cinci.

8. Choose the right word from the brackets.

1. There are too (much, many) people at the library now. I will come here tomorrow. 2. Did you read (little, few) in your childhood? 3. My friend brought me (much, many) interesting books to read yesterday. 4. The doctor advised my father not to walk (much, many). 5. There is (much, many) fresh air in this room. 6. Did you have (much, many) work to do last night ? 7. Does your brother read (little, few)? — No, he does not. He reads (much, many). 8. Let him think (a little, a few). 9. I attended (a little, a few) lectures here last year. 10. Please, give me (a little, a few) money. 11. We spent (a little, a few)days in the country and then came back to town. 12. There are (a little, a few) mistakes in your dictation. 13. You know German (a little, a few), try to translate this sentence. It's not difficult at all. 14. My little sister knows (a little, a few) English words.


9. Read aloud.

pass, class, glass, grass, last, past, fast, ask, task, far, smart, dark, cart; bread, ready, breath, potato, Negro, firm, bird, berth, birth, stern, furs, clear, here, care, cure, tired.


1. How many meals a day do you have?2. Do you like to have dinner alone or with your friends?3. With which course do you like brown bread?4. In what season do people eat much ice-cream?5. What do you say if there is not enough salt in the soup?6. Do you usually buy bread in the morning or in the evening?7. Does your little brother (sister) talk much or little at table?8. Do you smoke before or after dinner?9. Do you take sugar with your tea or do you like tea without it?10. What do you usually do if you are thirsty?11. Did you have enough time to read a newspaper after breakfast yesterday ?12. Why did you go to the office without breakfast?13. Which of you never has dinner at the restaurant?14. Why do you never go to the restaurant alone?


1. I am hungry because I had breakfast at half past seven (1). 2. My friends do not like to stay at home alone (1). 3. I will have meat and potatoes for the meat course (2). 4. My sister cannot eat much ice-cream (1). 5. The salt is near your plate (1). 6. There are some forks, spoons and knives on the table (1). 7. I like white bread with the meat course (1). 8. I won't take any soup today because I am not hungry at all (1).


(enough, a fork, a waitress, to eat, to buy, to have a smoke, hungry, alone, to pass, for sweet).

84

1. If you are _________, go to the restaurant and have dinner. 2. Please, help me to translate this letter, I cannot do it _________ 3. I cannot eat the salad. I have no ________. Bring one, please. 4. Will you have ice-cream or a cup of coffee _________? 5. We have a little free time before the lesson. Let us _________. 6. Why don't you _______ brown bread? — I never _________ it with the meat course. 7. When did you _________ this nice pen? — I _________ it last month. 8. There is not _________ salt in the soup. Shall I _________ you some?

13. Fill in the gaps with to speak, to talk, to say or to tell and translate the sentences.

1. Listen to me, Nick, do not _________! 2. My friend can _________ three foreign languages. 3. Yesterday we discussed our plans. Some of our colleagues _________ about the work of our firm. They _________ many interesting things about it. 4. Did you _________ to your father about it? What did he _________ you? 5. On my day off I visited my uncle. I _________ with his children. I asked them to _________ me about their studies. "We study well", they _________. "Our marks are always good." 6. We had some time _________ after dinner. My friend _________ me about his new work. 7. Did you show your report to the teacher? What did he _________ about it? 8. Let us _________ about the new film. Gabriel, did you like the film? _________ us about it, please. 9. You _________ well, but there was a mistake in your last sentence. _________ it again. 10. When my friend returned from Paris, he often _________ us about his visit to the capital of France. He _________ us about the beautiful streets, green parks, fine theatres and buildings of Paris. "Next year I will go there again", he _________.

14. Make sentences using the following words and word combinations.

at the university, to stay at home, over the week-end, on Sunday, in two days, with the meat course, for sweet, with brown bread, to be over, by bus, to be back, from Romanian into English, at page six, an hour and a half, a few, a little, half an hour later, never, to have a smoke.

15. Answer the following questions based on the text.

1. What time do you usually have dinner?2. What time did you have dinner yesterday?3. With whom did you go to the restaurant yesterday?4. Were there many people in the restaurant at dinner time?5. What did you do first?6. Where did you sit down?7. Who came up to your table?8. What did the waitress bring?9. Why did Nick not take any soup?10. What did he take for the meat course?11. What did he take for (the) sweet?12. What do you like for (the) sweet in winter?13. Why did Nick ask you to pass him the salt?14. What bread do you usually take with the meat course?15. What did you want to buy at the buffet?16. What did you do when dinner was over?17. How long (how much time) did it take you to have dinner?18. Did you have a smoke after dinner or did you go to the office at once?19. Why did you have enough time to have a smoke after dinner?20. When did you begin to work again?

85


1. Dacă peste jumătate de oră nu veţi merge la restaurant, eu voi merge fără voi. Mie deja mi-e foame deoarece azi am luat dejunul foarte devreme. 2. Puteţi termina lucrul acesta singur? — Da, desigur. El este uşor. Îndată ce-l voi termina, vă voi spune despre aceasta. 3. Doriţi să mâncaţi? — Nu, eu am luat prânzul o jumătate de oră în urmă. Daţi-mi, vă rog, o ceaşcă de ceai, eu sunt însetat. 4. Să ne aşezăm la această masă. Eu cunosc această chelnăriţă. Ea lucrează foarte bine, eu cred că prânzul ne va lua foarte puţin timp. 5. „Apropiaţi-vă, vă rog, de masa noastră. Pe masă nu sunt furculiţe”, am spus eu chelnăriţei. 6. Cine aduce furculiţele şi cuţitele? 7. Să vă aduc pâine albă sau neagră? — Aduceţi-mi, vă rog, neagră. Eu nu iubesc pâinea albă cu supă. 8. Eu nu voi lua supă. Nu sunt flămând. Voi lua doar salată şi felul doi. 9. Încă nu sunt flămând. Am luat prânzul la ora unu şi un sfert. 10. „ Îndată ce vei termina lecţiile, — i-a spus mama fiicei, — să te duci şi să cumperi pâine neagră. Avem multă pâine albă, dar puţină pâine neagră”. 11. „Nu lua îngheţată acum, îţi voi da îngheţată după prânz”, — i-a spus mama fiului. 12. Niciodată nu merg la restaurant singur să iau prânzul. 13. Iată sarea, carnea nu este sărată îndeajuns. 14. Daţi-mi, vă rog, zahărul, cafeaua nu este destul de dulce. 15. Dacă fratele dumneavoastră mai mic nu va mânca supă, să nu-i daţi bomboane. 16. Eu voi mânca prăjitura când veţi aduce cafeaua. 17. Unde aţi cumpărat aceste bomboane? Ele îmi plac foarte mult. 18. Când lecţia se fa termina, noi vom vorbi puţin, iar mai apoi veţi merge acasă. 19. Să mergem să fumăm în grădină. Eu niciodată nu fumez în cameră. 20. Cât timp vă va lua prânzul? — Cred că dacă nu voi mânca felul întâi, prânzul îmi va lua doar o jumătate de oră. 21. Puteţi deja citi în engleză? — Da, puţin.

17. Make dialogues on one of the following topics: a) At the Buffet, b) At the Restaurant, c) At Table at Home.

86

LESSON THIRTEEN (THE THIRTEENTH LESSON)

MY FRIEND IS LEAVING FOR HIS TOWN

John is a good man. He is a friend of mine. A week ago he graduated from the University and tomorrow he is leaving for his native town, where he will work as an economist. Now he and his wife are preparing for departure. Their little son is also busy. He is packing his things. He is putting his toys into a box now. He has a smiling face. He is happy because he likes to travel. John’s wife, a young woman of twenty-four, is also very busy. There are very many different things which she must pack. There are shirts, trousers, dresses, hats, suits, coats, shoes and other things on the sofa and on the chairs.

— What are you doing now?, asks John.— I am closing a suit-case. Besides, I must go to the shop to buy some food. But I will not

go shopping until I pack all the things.There are some boxes near the door. John is writing his new address on them.He is in a hurry. He must finish this work because his brother is already waiting for him in a

car. As soon as he finishes writing, his brother and he will take the boxes to the bus station.John’s mother is not helping them here now. She is in the kitchen. She is preparing supper

while they are packing their things.In an hour and a half many friends will come to say good-bye to John and his family and

wish them a happy life and fruitful work in a new place.

DIALOGUES

At the shopBuyer. I want a coat for a boy of fourteen. Saleswoman. Here are some fine brown coats. Buyer. I don't like this colour. Will you show me another coat? I’d like to have a look at that gray coat over there. How much is it? Saleswoman. It's five hundred and fifty lei.

(The Buyer's son tries on the coat).Buyer. Well, I think I'll have it.

At homeA. Where were you at two o'clock in the afternoon? I came to see you, but you were out. B. I went shopping.A. What did you buy?B. A coat for my son.A. I'd like to have а look at it.B. Here it is!A. It's very fine. How much does it cost?B. I paid five hundred and fifty lei for it.A. I think it's not dear at all.

87


a friend of mine – un prieten de al meu food – alimentenative – natal to go shopping – a merge după cumpărăturito pack – a împacheta to do some shopping – a face cumpărăturia box – o cutie an address – o adresăto smile – a zâmbi to be in a hurry – a se grăbia face – o faţă to wait (for) – a aşteptahappy – fericit to say good-bye – a-şi lua rămas bunto travel – a călători fruitful – fructuosdifferent – diferit fruitless (ant.) – nefructuosa shirt – o cămaşă a salesman – un vânzătortrousers – pantaloni a saleswoman – o vânzătoarea dress – o rochie to try on – a încerca, a măsuraa hat – o pălărie to be out – a fi absent de acasăa suit – un costum to be in – a fi acasăa coat – un veston, un palton to cost – a costaa shoe – un pantof to pay – a plătiother (another) – alt(ul) dear – scumpa suit-case – valiză expensive – costisitorbesides (adv.) – în afară de aceasta cheap – ieftina shop – un magazin

GRAMMAR

PARTICIPLE I

In English the verb has four basic forms. The forth form is called participle I. Ways of formation:a) General rule: short infinitive + -ingEx.: to read reading

to see seeingto speak speaking

b) verbs ending in –e (only after a consonant): omitting –e and adding -ingEx.: to write writing

to take takingto give giving

*** Exception: to be – being.c) verbs ending in -p, -b, -n, -t, -d in one syllable verbs and in some two syllable verbs, double this consonants. Ex.: to stop stopping

88

Word Formation

-ent [ent] — adjective suffix:different

-less[les] — this suffix forms adjectives from nouns:fruit fruitlesschild childless

to rub rubbingto run runningto put puttingto nod nodding

d) verbs ending in –ie: -ie y.Ex.: to lie lyingto die dying

PRESENT CONTINOUS TENSE

Present Continuous Tense refers to an action that takes place at the time of speaking.How do we form it?

Present Simple of the verb TO BE + PARTICIPLE I of the verb.


I am speakingYou are readingHe (She, It) is writing

We are listeningYou are sleepingThey are discussing


I am not speakingYou are not readingHe (She, It) is not writing

We are not listeningYou are not sleepingThey are not discussing


Am I speaking?Are you reading?Is he (she, it) writing?

Are we listening?Are you sleeping?Are they discussing?

Adverbs used with this tense: now, at this moment, etc.

Present Continuous Tense is also used to indicate actions that will take place in the near future.Ex.: They are going to cinema at five o’clock.

My friend is coming from London tomorrow.She is leaving for Paris tonight.

Verbs that are not used in continuous form:These are generally verbs referring to feelings and perceptions, as well as some other verbs:to want, to like, to love, to wish, to see, to hear, to feel, to notice, to know, to understand, to remember, to recognize, to forget, to seem, to be, etc.

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

89

Personal pronouns Possessive pronounsConjoint form Absolute form

Iyou

he (she, it)weyouthey

myyour

his, her, itsouryourtheir

mineyours

his, hers, itsoursyourstheirs

Ex.: Here is my copy-book. Where is yours?Yesterday a friend of mine told me about it.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Give the Participle I of the following verbs.

to go, to smoke, to sit, to study, to lie, to eat, to come, to buy, to sell, to talk, to give, to put, to stop, to pay.


а) care întreabă, care se îmbracă, care dă, care ajută, care face greşeli, care povesteşte, care arată, care pleacă, care se grăbeşte, care susţine examenele, care înoată, care stă culcat, care se odihneşte, care construieşte, care ascultă, care încearcă.b) un om care vorbeşte, o fată care zâmbeşte, nişte copii care se joacă.

3. Give the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.

1. The waitress is bringing our meals. 2. Nick and Pete are talking. 3. I am reading a very interesting book now. 4. My friend is smoking now. 5. The little boy is eating his cake. 6. This woman is selling ice-cream.

4. Answer the following questions paying attention to the verb tense form.

а) 1. Are you having an English lesson now?2. What is your friend doing?3. What is Nick writing in his exercise book?4. Where is John writing a sentence?5. What language are you speaking now?6. What am I showing to you?7. Is Jane looking at that picture?8. What is she reading?9. Are we sitting or standing?10. Are you writing or speaking?

b) 1. What time do you usually have dinner?2. Are you having dinner now? What are you doing now?3. What kind of books do you like to read?4. What book is Pete reading now?5. What do we usually write on the blackboard? 6. What am I writing on the blackboard now?

90

7. Where do you usually prepare your homework?8. Are you preparing your homework or writing an exercise now?9. Who is answering my question now?10. Who usually answers the teacher's questions without mistakes?

c) 1. What are you looking at?2. What are we speaking about?3. Who(m) are you listening to now?4. Who(m) is Gabriel looking at?5. Who(m) can you speak English with at home?6. Who(m) do you usually play chess with?7. What is he waiting for?


1. Nick is passing me the salt (2). 2. I am buying some sweets here (3). 3. These children are eating their soup without bread (1). 4. They are playing chess with their friends in that room (3). 5. They are looking at this new building (2). 6. I am talking to my old friend (2). 7. They are building a new school (1).

6. Translate paying attention to the verb tense form.

а) 1. Unde este fiul dumneavoastră? — El a plecat la un prieten acum o oră. Ei joaca acum şah acolo. 2. Nu intraţi, vă rog, acum în cameră. Acolo unul dintre studenţii noştri susţine examenul la limba engleză. Peste câteva minute examenul se va termina. 3. Bunelul dumneavoastră lucrează? — Nu. El este deja în vârstă. El are 75 de ani. 4. Priviţi, cine lucrează la masa ceea? Nu pot să-i recunosc pe aceşti oameni. — Dumneavoastră nu-i cunoaşteţi? Aceştia sunt noii noştri economişti. 5. La ce vă uitaţi? — Mă uit la această înaltă clădire nouă. Îmi place foarte mult.

b) De obicei ne odihnim (avem vacanţă) vara, dar anul acesta am hotărât să mergem la staţiune iarna. Trei zile în urmă am ajuns în una din staţiunile nu departe de oraşul nostru. Locuim într-o cameră bună şi caldă (warm). Noi ne odihnim bine (petrecem timpul bine). Ziua ne plimbăm, iar serile le petrecem de obicei în sala (hall) mare a staţiunii. Acum suntem în sală. Eu stau la masă şi scriu această scrisoare. Prietenul meu joacă şah cu fratele său, iar sora mea priveşte televizorul. Îmi place foarte mult această staţiune. La anul iar vom veni aici.

7. Make sentences using the given verbs in Present Continuous Tense.

to make a report, to look at, to speak about, to listen in, to smoke, to listen to.

8. Translate paying attention to the possessive pronouns.

1. Luaţi vestonul meu. Al dumneavoastră nu este destul de cald (warm). 2. Cât aţi plătit pe pantofii dumneavoastră noi şi pe cei ce i-aţi cumpărat pentru fiul dumneavoastră? — Ai mei costă 400 de lei, iar ai lui 350. 3. Casa dumneavoastră se află nu departe de oprire, iar a noastră - foarte departe. 4. Bălţi este oraşul nostru natal, iar Chişinău, al lor. 5. Pe strada noastră este un spital, iar pe a lor o şcoală. 6. Ceaiul dumneavoastră este cu totul rece, luaţi-l pe al meu. Eu nu vreau deloc să beau acum. 7. Nu luaţi stiloul lui. El este rău. Luaţi-l pe al meu. 8. Eu am plătit 700 de lei pentru vestonul meu. Dar cât aţi plătit pentru al dumneavoastră? 9. Ieri ei au luat revistele noastre şi ni le-au lăsat pe ale lor. 10. Dictarea dumneavoastră este rea, iar a ei – bună.

91

9. Make sentences using the given models.

a) Не is playing chess with а friend of his in the sitting-room.b) That pen is not mine, it's yours.c) My little brother goes to school, his goes to the kindergarten.


10. Read aloud.

a) boat, coat, moan, loan, groan, soap, roam, foam, throat;b) window, now, how, town, fellow, mellow, swallow, bowl, borrow;c) happy, you, busy, young, type, myth, yet, hurry, funny.


1. Do people smile or cry when they are happy?2. When do people usually smile?3. What is your native town?4. Will you go to your native town when you have your holiday?5. When do people usually pack their things?6. Do you take a large suit-case or a small suit-case when you go to visit your parents? 7. Do you like to travel? 8. Why do you like to travel?9. Do you change your dress when you come home from the office? 10. What colour is your new suit (coat)?11. When do you usually go shopping?12. Why can't you go shopping in the afternoon?13. Would you like to do some shopping today?14. Where does your little brother (sister) stay until you return from the office?15. Do you know Nick's address?16. When are you usually in a hurry?17. Can you work well if you are in a hurry?18. Do any of your friends always wait for you to leave the office together?19. Is your friend waiting for you now?20. Is your new pen dear?21. How much does your new pen cost?22. Would you like to buy a new pen?23. How much do you think you will pay for it?

12. Ask questions to the bold words

1. Nick’s wife is packing her things now (2). 2. I shall come to see you before my departure (3). 3. My parents were very busy yesterday (2). 4. They are waiting for their teacher in the club (4). 5. My sister bought fine shoes yesterday (2). 6. We were already hungry at eleven o'clock in the morning (1).

92

13. Fill in the gaps with the necessary article or possessive pronoun where necessary. Retell the text.

Yesterday after _____ lectures I went together with _____ brother Peter to one of _____ shops in _____ centre of our town to buy _____ new coat for him. At _____ shop _____ saleswoman showed us many different coats. We liked _____ two coats. One of them was too small for _____ brother and we bought _____ other coat. It was _____ fine brown coat for _____ boy of fifteen. Then half _____ hour later we went to _____ another shop and I bought _____ toy for _____ little sister. Besides, I bought some good things for _____ mother. We spent _____ hour and _____ half at _____ shop. At _____ quarter past eight we came home. _____ little sister took _____ boxes from us and opened them. She liked _____ new toys very much. She likes to go shopping and said, “On _____ Sunday we will go shopping with _____ Mum, too. We will buy _____ new hat for _____ Daddy and _____ new shirt, _____ for Peter. Will we buy _____ new dress for me, Mum?”

14. Insert the right preposition where necessary.

Do you like to prepare _____ departure? I like it very much. The day _____ tomorrow I am leaving _____ Constanţa. I am not going _____ a holiday there. A month ago I graduated _____ the University and I will work as a doctor _____ a rest-home in Constanţa. Tomorrow I will pack _____ my things. I’ll put my suits, shirts, shoes, books and other things _____ my suit-case. _____ the evening some friends _____ mine will come _____ my place to say good-bye _____ me. At half _____ nine we will go _____ the railway station together. My friend Nick will not come _____ my place because he will be busy. He will go _____ the station and wait _____ us there. _____ a day I will be _____ Constanţa. As soon as I know my address, I will send it _____ my friends.

15. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.

to smile, to travel, to pack, to go shopping, to wait, to cost, to pay, to pass, to put, to stay, to hurry, to begin, to play.


(a railway station, happy, different, to travel, an address, a toy, to do some shopping, in a hurry, to hurry, a suit-case, to hurry up)

1. Why are you smiling? — I am smiling, because I am _______ to see you. 2. I cannot go to the cinema with you, I must _______. My brother is leaving today, and I'd like to buy some things and some food for him. 3. Children like to play with new _______. 4. If you want to know your country well, you must _______ much. 5. My friend's daughter likes literature very much, she reads many _______ books. 6. We cannot write a letter to Sam either, because we do not know his _______. 7. Don't _______, we will have enough time to get to the station before the train starts. 8. If you are not _______, wait for me for a few minutes, we will go to the library together. 9. Why are you not packing? Where is your _______? — We must go to the _______ in half an hour. 10. _______, or we will be late for the lecture.


1. I am sorry, I cannot speak to you now because ... 2. I don't want to come up to the child because ... 3. I am leaving for Chişinău tomorrow, so I must ... 4. We have much time, we will not be late, so ... 5. The child is smiling because ... 6. In the evening some friends will come to

93

see us, so .... 7. We will go to the restaurant as soon as ... 8. Will you go shopping when ... 9. Will they wait for us until ... 10. My mother will go to his native town after ... 11. Will you pack your things before ...

18. Make by five sentences with each of the given models. Translate them.

a) I will wait for you here until you return.b) Ann is packing her things while her mother is preparing supper in the kitchen.с) My husband won't go to the country on Saturday and I shan't go there either. We shall be very busy.


1. Dacă veţi putea, veniţi la noi la ţară duminică. Toată familia noastră va fi bucuroasă să vă vadă. Vă veţi odihni puţin la noi. 2. Priviţi! Pete vorbeşte cu vânzătorul. Daţi să ne apropiem de el. Ce cumpără el? 3. La vară am de gând să plec în satul meu natal. Am plecat de acolo când aveam şaisprezece ani. Vara trecută nu am fost acolo. Nici sora mea nu a fost acolo. Dacă va avea vacanţă vara ea tot va merge cu mine. 4. Lăsaţi-o pe Ana să ne povestească cum a călătorit anul trecut. 5. Stiloul meu este foarte rău. Pot să-l iau pe al dumneavoastră? 6. Să mergem acum la restaurant! — Cer scuze, dar acum nu pot să merg. Eu termin traducerea unui articol foarte important, plus la aceasta, peste o jumătate de oră aici va veni unul dintre economiştii din Chişinău cu care trebuie să vorbesc. 7. Trebuie să merg să fac cumpărături îndată ce voi termina acest lucru. — Ce vrei să cumperi? — Nu avem pâine neagră, iar eu nu iubesc să mănânc supă cu pâine albă. Plus la aceasta, vreau să cumpăr ceva bomboane la ceai. Aşteaptă-mă aici până ce nu voi veni de la magazin. 8. Lasă vânzătoarea să ne arate costumul cela. Cred că nu este scump. 9. Dacă nu vă grăbiţi, aşteptaţi-mă, vă rog, vom merge împreună acasă cu autobuzul. 10. „Peste câteva zile veţi termina universitatea şi veţi începe să lucraţi. Cred că veţi fi nişte economişti buni. Vă doresc un lucru fructuos!” le-a spus decanul (dean) facultăţii studenţilor. 11. Eu voi citi un ziar până când tu iei prânzul. Eu nu vreau să mănânc. 12. Arătaţi-mi, vă rog, pantofii ceia. Cât costă ei? — Ei nu sunt scumpi. Ei costă 250 de lei. Uitaţi-vă la aceşti pantofi, ei tot nu sunt scumpi. 13. Nu pot să merg acum cu dumneavoastră la magazin. Eu îmi împachetez lucrurile. Dacă mă veţi aştepta până când eu le voi împacheta, vom merge după cumpărături împreună. 14. Puteţi să-mi arătaţi altă rochie? Nu-mi place această culoare. — Desigur. În magazinul nostru sunt multe rochii de diferite culori. 15. Ieri sora mea şi eu am cumpărat pălării noi. Ele nu sunt tare scumpe. A mea costă 50 de lei, iar a ei – 65.

20. Make sentences with the following words using the verb let, Present Continuous Tense, and the Possessive Pronouns.

to come (go) up, to hurry, an hour and a half, happy, to travel, besides, either, to be in a hurry, dear, fruitless, to cost, cheap, another, other, to go shopping, to do some shopping, to wait for, to pay, to say good-bye, to try on,

21. Read and retell the following text.

HOW WE PACKED

So we decided to travel ... On Friday evening we met to pack the necessary things. We got a big suit-case for the clothes and two large boxes for the food. We put all the things which we wanted to take with us in the middle of the floor, sat round them and began to think how to pack it all.

94

"I shall pack the things", I said, "I like to pack, and I can do it very well". Harris and George were very glad. They smiled and began to smoke. There were many things to pack and it took me a long time to put them all into the suit-case. But when I finished the work and sat down on the suit-case, Harris said smiling, "Will you take your shoes with you?" I looked around and saw my shoes under the bed. So I opened the suit-case and put them into it. When I wanted to close the suit-case, I thought, "Where is my tooth-brush? Once I forgot to pack it and carried it to the station in my pocket", I remembered. So I decided to unpack the suit-case. "What are you doing?" smiled George. But I did not answer him. I took all the things out of the suit-case and at last found my tooth-brush in one of the shoes ...

(After Three Men in a Boat by Jerome K. Jerome)

22. Make a short story using the following words.

to travel, different, to pack, to buy, a suit-case, happy, wait, until, while, which, to hurry, to forget, an address, a railway-station, to leave.

23. Write an essay on one of the following topics.

1. My First Journey.2. Preparation for Departure.3. A New Shop in Our Street.

95

LESSON FOURTEEN (THE FOURTEENTH LESSON)

A SEA STORY

One evening we asked our friend Captain Brown to tell us some interesting story about his voyages. And he told us the following:

“It was fifteen years ago. I was a young man then. Our ship was going to New York. We were having a very fine voyage. One morning the captain came up to me and said: 'Mr. Brown, last night I heard such a strange thing that I don't know what to do about it. I could not sleep at night and I heard a voice in my ear: 'Sail north-north-west! Sail north-north-west!' I think we must sail in that direction'.

‘Excuse me, but I think that you ate too much last night, sir, and that is why you could not sleep' I answered.

The captain got angry.'I did not eat much yesterday,' he said, 'and I heard the strange voice three times, sir.'The captain ordered his men to sail north-north-west. The next day one of our men saw a

black thing in the sea. The captain looked through his glasses and said to me: ‘There is a small boat there with a man in it. Wasn't I right last night? We must save the man.’

Soon we reached the small boat and saw a man in it. He was fast asleep. We took him into our boat and sailed in the direction of the ship. The captain was waiting for us.

When we reached the ship, the man suddenly opened his eyes and cried out loudly, ‘Where am I? Where is my boat?'

‘Happy to see you', said the captain, 'I am very glad that we could save you.''Did you order your men to take me out of my boat while I was asleep?' asked the man.'Certainly,' answered the captain. 'Did you want to perish in your little boat?''Look here', said the man, 'My name is Captain Wilson and I am making a record voyage

from New York to Liverpool in a small boat'..."

(After W. W. Jacobs)


a captain – un căpitan to sail – a înotaa voyage – o călătorie the North – nordto make a voyage – a interprinde o călătorie the South – sud(the) following – următorul the West – vesta ship – o corabie the East – estsuch – aşa a direction – o direcţiestrange – straniu to excuse (for) – a se scuza (pentru)to sleep – a dormi that is why – iată de ceto be fast asleep – a dormi strâns to be (to get) angry (with sb) – a fi supăratto fall asleep – a adormi to order – o ordonato fall ill – a se îmbolnăvi through – prina night – o noapte to look through – a răsfoiat night – noaptea a boat – barcăin the daytime – ziua to save – a salvaa voice – o voce to reach – a ajunge, a atingein a loud (low) voice – cu voce tare (slabă) suddenly – brusc, deodatăan ear – o ureche to cry out – a strigaan eye – un ochi loudly – cu voce tare

96

GRAMMAR

PAST CONTINOUS TENSE

Past Continuous Tense refers to an action that took place at a given moment in the past.How do we form it?

Past Simple of the verb TO BE + PARTICIPLE I of the verb.


I was speakingYou were readingHe (She, It) was writing

We were listeningYou were sleepingThey were discussing


I was not speakingYou were not readingHe (She) was not writing

We were not listeningYou were not sleepingThey were not discussing


Was I speaking?Were you reading?Was he (she, it) writing?

Were we listening?Were you sleeping?Were they discussing?

Adverbs used with this tense: yesterday at 5 o’clock, at that moment, etc.

Ex.: I was waiting for you yesterday at 10 o’clock.I was preparing may homework when my friend came in.What were you doing when Nick came to see you?

FUTURE CONTINOUS TENSE

Future Continuous Tense refers to an action that will take place at a given moment in the future.How do we form it?

Future Simple of the verb TO BE + PARTICIPLE I of the verb.


I will be speakingYou will be readingHe (She, It) will be writing

We will be listeningYou will be sleepingThey will be discussing

97


I will not be speakingYou will not be readingHe will not be writing

We will not be listeningYou will not be sleepingThey will not be discussing


Will I be speaking?Will you be reading?Will he (she) be writing?

Will we be listening?Will you be sleeping?Will they be discussing?

Adverbs used with this tense: tomorrow at 9 o’clock, this time tomorrow, etc.

Ex.: I will be listening to a lecture at this time tomorrow.They will not be playing chess at twelve on Sunday.What will you be doing at eight o’clock tomorrow?

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Put the verbs from the following sentences in Past and Future Continuous Tenses.

1. What is Nick's wife doing? — She is preparing for departure. 2. John is not packing his things. 3. Are you waiting for your friend? — No, I am not, I am waiting for my father. 4. Where are you hurrying to? — I am hurrying to the railway station. 5. He is talking to a friend of his. 6. My sister is washing her dress. 7. They are not smoking now.

2. Give the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.

a) 1. Michael was having dinner at half past three yesterday. 2. My sister was paying for her new coat when I came into the shop. 3. Our mother was preparing dinner in the kitchen at fiveo'clock. 4. I was hurrying to the buffet when I met you. 5. Your friends were smoking in the corridor when we saw them.b) 1. I will be waiting for you at seven o'clock in the evening. 2. They will be having dinner when you come to see them. 3. We will be discussing this question at this time the day after tomorrow. 4. We will be preparing for departure at three o'clock tomorrow. 5. They will be receiving their friends at this time tomorrow.

3. Answer these questions paying attention to the use of Past and Future Continuous Tenses.

1. Were you preparing your homework at six o'clock yesterday?2. What will you be doing at three o'clock tomorrow?3. What was your brother doing when you came home the day before yesterday? 4. Where were you hurrying to when a friend of yours met you yesterday?5. What time were your friends playing chess on their last day off?6. Will you be waiting for us at this time tomorrow?7. Who(m) were you speaking to when I came into the room?8. Were you writing your exercises or translating a letter when they came to see you?9. What were you talking about when they came in?

98

4. Ask questions to the bold words and sentences.

a) 1. We were waiting for Dr. Smith at five o'clock yesterday (2). 2. We were looking at the pictures of my sister's flat when you came to our place (2). 3. The boy was eating ice-cream when we came in (2). 4. Captain White was smoking when we opened the door (2).b) 1. They will be discussing our plan at three o'clock tomorrow (4). 2. We will still be packing our things when you come to our place (3). 3. My sister will be having breakfast at this time tomorrow (3).

5. Translate in English paying attention to the use of tenses.

а) 1. Când am intrat în restaurant, chelnăriţa punea (to put) pe masă lingurile, furculiţele şi cuţitele. 2. Ce reviste citeaţi când noi am venit la bibliotecă? 3. Ce cumpăraţi când eu am intrat în magazin? 4. Ce făceaţi ieri la ora trei după amiază? — Eu luam prânzul. 5. V-am văzut ieri la ora cinci în stradă. Unde vă grăbeaţi?b) 1. Nu veniţi la noi mâine la ora unsprezece dimineaţa. Noi vom fi ocupaţi. Noi vom discuta articolul acestui scriitor. 2. Ce veţi face mâine la ora cinci? — Eu voi răspunde la scrisorile firmelor străine. 3. Citiţi un ziar până când eu voi pregăti prânzul. Peste jumătate de oră voi fi liberă. 4. Lasă-l pe Nick să vină aici mâine la ora opt fără un sfert. Eu îl voi aştepta aici.


6. Read aloud

boat, coat, loan, roam, foam, goat, barrel, fracture, mild, carry, receiver, Larry, knack, ruler, lull, fast, donkey, feather, clearer, mask, central, cutting, cycle, carriage.

7. Answer these questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. Why do children often want to be sea captains?2. Did you like to read books about voyages in your childhood?3. When did you make your first voyage?4. Can we go from Bălţi to Chişinău by ship?5. Which of the students of your group usually speaks in a very loud voice?6. What colour are your friend's eyes?7. Till what time do children usually sleep in the daytime?8. Why must you sometimes work at night?9. Why do many people like to go to the South on holiday?10. What big cities in the North of Great Britain do you know?11. Are you angry with any of your friends now?12. Why do you sometimes get angry with your friends? 13. How much time does it take you to reach Paris if you go there

by plane?


a) 1. My brother wants to be a sailor (2). 2. In my childhood I liked to read books about voyages (1). 3. Our students went to the sea in the summer (3). 4. In 15 minutes we will reach the station (1). 5. The children are fast asleep in the garden (1). 6. I heard my friend's voice inthe garden five minutes ago (2). 7. The boats were sailing in our direction (1).b) 1. He did not attend the lecture yesterday because he was ill (1). 2. I am already hungry

99

because I did not have breakfast in the morning (1). 3. Our village will change next year because we will build many new houses there (1). 4. I don't like the salad either because there is not enough salt in it (1). 5. I asked him to come up to me because I could not see him well (1).


1. ____ Michael! Go to ____ blackboard and write ____ following sentence: " ____ capital of ____ United States is ____ Washington D. C.". 2. Yesterday there was ____ meeting at our office. ____ economist Brown spoke at ____ meeting and said many interesting things about ____ work of their firm. 3. ____ Tom usually speaks in such ____ low voice that sometimes I cannot hear him at all. 4. ____ last year _ Dr. Smith was spending his holiday in ____ South of ____ Romania. Once he and his friends decided to make ____ voyage from Constanţa to Mangalia in_____ small boat. They left Constanţa early in ____ morning. ____weather was fine. When they were near Mangalia, they saw ____ black thing in ____ sea and heard ____ voice: "Help, help!" They sailed in ____ direction of ____ black thing and soon saw that it was ____ man. They sailed up to ____ man and took him into ____ boat. Dr. Smith tried to help him. When they reached Mangalia, ____ doctor took him to ____ hospital. ____ next day when ____ doctor and his friends were walking along ____ street, they met ____ man again. He recognized ____ doctor and thanked him for his help.


1. Chişinău is ______ the South ______ Bălţi. 2. The captain looked ______ his glasses and saw a man ______ the sea, not very far ______ the ship. He ordered ______ his men to sail ______ that direction. 3. I am angry ______ you because you are not listening ______ me. 4. "Will we reach ______ the village early ______ the morning?" asked one ______ the travellers. — "No, we shall reach ______ it ______ night," answered the other. 5. Don't be angry ______ his words. 6. Yesterday when I was speaking ______ our teacher, Nick came ______ me and asked me ______ an English magazine. I took the magazine ______ my bag and gave it ______ him. He thanked me ______ the magazine, put it ______ his bag and went away. 7. Tell ______ him that I must return the magazine ______ the library tomorrow. I shall be waiting ______ him ______ the library ______ ten o'clock.

11. Fill in the gaps with to hear or to listen (to) in the right tense form.

1. My sister often plays the piano in the evening and we ________ her. 2. Repeat the last words of the sentence, please. I did not ________ them well. 3. Jane, you are sitting very far from me. Can you ________ me? 4. Why are you not ________ us? We are discussing a very important question. 5. My grandfather often tells me about his life and I like ________ him. 6. The lecturer spoke in a low voice and I couldn't ________ him. 7. I ________ this story from him last week.

12. Translate using:

а) such or so.1. Aceasta a fost o călătorie aşa de interesantă! 2. Această călătorie a fost aşa de interesantă! 3. Aceasta este o povestire aşa de scurtă, că o veţi citi foarte repede. 4. Această povestire este aşa de scurtă, că o veţi citi foarte repede. 5. Aceasta este o povestire aşa de stranie! 6. Aceasta povestire este aşa de stranie! 7. Această salată este aşa de sărată (salty), că nu o pot mânca! 8. Eu nu pot mânca aşa salată sărată. 9. Mă simt aşa de rău că nu pot vorbi acum cu dumneavoastră. 10. Aveţi un stilou aşa de rău! Luaţi-l pe al meu, vă rog. 11. Oare nu iubiţi aşa bomboane?

100

b) to hurry or to be in a hurry.1. De ce el este aşa de grăbit? – El este grăbit deoarece are o întâlnire. 2. Dacă vă veţi grăbi, veţi face multe greşeli. 3. Băiatul s-a grăbit la uşă când şi-a văzut mama pe fereastră. 4. Cer scuze, nu pot vorbi acum cu dumneavoastră, mă grăbesc la gară. 5. Dacă vă grăbiţi, rugaţi chelnăriţa să vă aducă supa şi felul doi deodată. 6. De ce oamenii se grăbesc în direcţia ceea? – Ei se grăbesc la şcoală. Acolo va fi o lecţie. 7. Acest elev nu se grăbeşte niciodată, iată de ce el face foarte puţine greşeli.

13. Make by five sentences with each of the given models.

a) Yesterday I saw such an interesting film that I can't forget it.b) The book is so interesting that I advise you all to read it.c) Nick works hard at his English, that's why he knows it well.

.14. Make ten sentences using the following words and word combinations.

to make a voyage, the following story, in such a loud (low, strange) voice, to be fast asleep, to fall asleep, to fall ill, at night, in the direction of, to be (get) angry (at, with), to look through, to order.

15. Continue the following sentences. Translate them.

1. I will not be angry with you if ... 2. My friend's brother will be captain after ... 3. I will not take soup either if ... 4. My sister will not fall asleep until ... 5. The waitress will come up to our table as soon as ... 6. Your examination will be over before ... 7. The boy will be asleep until ... 8. I shall be looking through these magazines while ...

16. Answer the following questions.

1. Who wrote this story?2. Where was the ship going to?3. What did the captain of the ship hear one night?4. What did he order his men to do?5. What did the captain and his men see the next day?6. What was that thing?7. What did they see in the boat?8. What did the men do?9. Where did they take the man?10. Why did they do that?11. What was the captain doing at that time?12. When did the man open his eyes?13. What did the man cry out when he opened his eyes?14. Who was the man?15. Why was he in a small boat?16. Did the captain of the ship help Captain Wilson?17. Why was Captain Wilson angry with the captain of the ship?

17. Give antonyms.

to speak loudly, in the daytime, to wake up, the South, always, to buy, to begin with, happy, to pack, fruitful, low, wide

101


1. Să vă povestesc despre prima mea călătorie pe mare, pe care am făcut-o când aveam şapte ani. 2. Nick, mergeţi la tablă şi scrieţi următoarea propoziţie: „Fiul fratelui meu vrea să fie căpitan”. 3. Pe cine aşteptaţi aici? – Noi aşteptăm delegaţii care vor veni aici peste jumătate de oră. 4. Lăsaţi-o pe Ana să vă arate florile ei, ele sunt foarte stranii, ele sunt aproape (almost) negre. 5. De ce culoarea sunt ochii surorii dumneavoastră? 6. De ce vorbiţi aşa de încet? – Fratele meu mic nu doarme. 7. M-am trezit la ora două de noapte şi până la ora patru nu am putut să adorm. 8. Mie îmi place foarte mult nordul. Când voi termina universitatea voi merge să lucrez într-un oraş din nord. 9. Ce oraşe mari cunoaşteţi la vestul SUA? 10. Să mergem în această direcţie. Aici sunt multe clădiri frumoase. 11. Cer scuze, dar nu vă recunosc. La ce universitate aţi învăţat? 12. De ce v-aţi supărat ieri pe mine? – Eu nu m-am supărat. Eram aşa de ocupat, că nu am putut să vorbesc cu dumneavoastră. Aşteptaţi-mă puţin, vă rog, şi vom discuta toate întrebările dumneavoastră, îndată ce termin acest lucru. 13. Fiul prietenei dumneavoastră are aşa un nume straniu, că nu pot să mi-l amintesc. 14. Barca mea este prea mare, să o luăm pe a dumneavoastră. 15. Nu-l voi uita niciodată pe acest om. El mi-a salvat viaţa. 16. Noi am ieşit din oraş la şapte şi jumătate dimineaţa şi am ajuns la pădure doar după o oră şi jumătate. 17. Când ne-am întors acasă, fiul dormea strâns, noi am luat cina, am vorbit tare, dar el nu ne-a auzit. 18. Luni l-am vizitat pe colegul meu, care era bolnav, de aceea nu am putut veni la dumneavoastră. 19. Oare nu ştiţi că Tom s-a îmbolnăvit? Iată de ce el nu este azi la lecţie. Daţi să-i sunăm după lecţie. 20. Profesorul Smith mi-a recomandat să dorm ziua. Am încercat de mai multe (several) ori să adorm ziua, dar nu am putut. 21. Puteţi să citiţi aceste reviste până când eu mă voi uita prin scrisori şi telegrame. 22. Sora mea s-a simţit rău noaptea. Iată de ce nici eu nu am putut să adorm. 23. Mergeţi în această direcţie până când nu veţi vedea un bloc sur. Biblioteca se afla la dreapta lui.

19. Translate the text below and retell it.

Ieri un prieten de al meu m-a vizitat. Noi am vorbit despre copii. Eu i-am povestit următoarea istorie despre fratele meu: „Când eram copii locuiam la ţară. Fratele meu avea o barcă mică, şi des făcea „călătorii” cu prietenii lui. Mama noastră mereu se supăra pe noi, când plecam la râu. În timpul uneia din „călătoriile” noastre am auzit o voce necunoscută. Am înotat în această direcţie şi în curând am văzut un om la mijlocul râului. El striga: „Ajutor! Ajutor!” – „Trebuie să-l salvăm”, a spus fratele meu. În curând am ajuns la mijlocul râului şi l-am adus pe omul acela în barca noastră la mal (bank).

Am venit acasă târziu. Mama nu ne-a dat întrebări, dar ne-a ordonat cu voce supărată să luăm cina şi să mergem la culcare. Eu m-am apropiat de mama şi i-am spus: „Ascultă, mamă, nu te supăra pe noi”. Dar mama nu vroia să asculte istoria noastră. „Culcaţi-vă”, a repetat ea. Noi ne-am culcat la ora doisprezece, dar nu puteam adormi...

Acum fratele meu are treizeci de ani. Doi ani în urmă el a devenit (to become, became) căpitanul unui vas mare. Câteva zile în urmă el s-a întors cu corabia sa din New York şi peste două săptămâni el va veni la noi în vizită”.

20. Retell the text as if you were: a) the author, b) the captain of the ship, c) Mister Wilson

21. Make a short story using the given words.

to make a voyage, the sea, to sail north (south etc.), in the direction of, to hear, strange, the weather, to perish, to reach, it took us ... to …, to save, to think.

102

LESSON FIFTEEN (THE FIFTEENTH LESSON)

TRAVELING ABOUT THE UNITED STATES

The sun was rising from behind the Cordeliers. The mountains were unusually beautiful that fine summer morning. All the passengers of an express train were fast asleep. Only Nick, a young tourist, was still sitting at the window and looking at the rising sun. In front of him, on the table there was a thick note-book with golden letters: 'New York the USA’. The boy looked at the letters, then slowly opened the note-book and read:

“June 15, 2002.- New York. What a beautiful city! It's one of the most famous places in the United States.

Thousands of tourists come to see the Statue of Liberty for holiday. One can meet here people from France and from South Africa, from New Zeeland and from Argentina.”

He turned over some pages:“July 17.Our tourist ship is sailing down the Mississippi, the famous American river. The river where

the world known American writer Mark Twain spent his childhood. Here and there one can see beautiful and amazing places... On this ship one can hear all the languages in the world..."

“July 21.A little old town on the Mississippi River...The people of the town are proud of it. They say they are the first settlers of the region.They showed us many interesting things. Their new comfortable houses differ much from

those old ones which are kept for tourists.Then Nick took his pen, turned over some more pages and wrote down:“August 10, 2002.In a few days we will leave the United States land. I hope next year I will come back here not

as a tourist, but as a student of an American university”.He stopped and closed his eyes. He was thinking of his native country, of his parents, friends

and relatives who were waiting for him.The plane was flying higher and higher to the East, first over the ocean and then over high

mountains, rivers, lakes and beautiful cities of the Europe...

DIALOGUE

А. Hallo, Peter! How are you? Where were you a few days ago? I rang you up but there was no answer.B. Why, I was in Paris on an excursion. Didn't you know about it? I came back only last night.A. I see ... How did you like the city?B. It's wonderful! I think it's one of the most beautiful cities in the world.A. Did you have enough time to go sightseeing? В. I am sorry to say not. There are so many places of interest in Paris, you know, so many palaces, museums and monuments. I couldn’t see all of them.


to travel about – a călători prin to turn over – a întoarceto travel in the mountains – a călători în munţi down – josto rise – a răsări a language – o limbă, un limbajto set – a apune world – lumebehind – după a settler – colonistfrom behind – de după a region – o regiune

103

a mountain – un munte to differ – a fi diferita train – un tren to stop – a (se) opriby train – cu trenul a relative – o rudăa tourist – un turist to fly – a zburastill – încă high – înalt, susin front of – în faţa… over – pestefamous – renumit a lake – un lacto be famous – a fi renumit

CONTINENTS, COUNTRIES AND CAPITALS

Europe ['juəгəр] Europian ['juəгəрi: ən] Asia ['ei∫a] Asian ['ei∫an]North America ['no:θ ə'merıkə] North American ['no:θ ə'merıkən]South America ['sauθ ə'merıkə] South American ['sauθ ə'merıkən]Australia [o'strelıə] Australian [o'strelıən]

Albania [æl’beınıə] Albanian [æl'beınıən] Tirana [ti:'rα:nα:]Bulgaria [bлl'gεərıə] Bulgarian [bлl'gεərıən] Sofia ['soufıə]China ['t∫aınə] Chinese ['t∫aı'ni:z] Beijing ['beıdзıŋ] England ['ıŋglənd] English ['ıŋglı∫] London ['lлndən]France [frα:ns] French [frent∫] Paris ['pærıs] Germany ['dзə:mənı] German ['dзə:mən] Berlin [bə:'1ın] Hungary ['hлngərı] Hungarian [hлŋ’gərıən] Budapest ['bju:də'pest]India ['ındiə] Indian ['ındiən] Delhi ['delı] Italy ['ıtəlı] Italian [ı'tæljən] Rome [roum]Japan [dзə'рæn] Japanese ['dзæ'рəni:z] Tokyo ['toukjou] Korea [ко'rıə] Korean [ко'rıən] Pyongyang ['pjioŋ'jлŋ]Moldova [mol'douvə] Moldovan [mol'douvən] Chişinău ['kı∫ınəu]Poland ['poulənd] Polish ['poulı∫] Warsaw ['wo:so:] Romania [rou'meınıə] Rumanian [rou'meınıən] Bucharest ['bju:kərest] Russia ['rл∫ə] Russian ['rл∫ən] Moscow ['moskəu]Turkey ['tə:kı] Turkish ['tə:kı∫] Ankara ['ənkərα:]The USA [ðə'ju:'es'eı] American [ə'merıkən] Washington ['wo∫ıŋtən]Vietnam [vjət'nα:m] Vietnamese [vjetnα:'mi:z] Hanoi [hα:'noı]

GRAMMAR

104

Word Formation

-ese [i:z] — adjective suffix indicating the nationality:Japan JapaneseChina Chinese

-ic [ik] — this suffix forms adjectives from nouns:hero heroicchild childless

-ous [as] — as a rule, this suffix forms adjectives from abstract nouns:fame famous

-ship[∫ip] — noun suffix forming abstract nouns from adjectives and nouns.a friend friendshiphard hardship

THE USE OF DEFINITE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NOUS

As a rule we don’t use the definite article with proper nouns: Ex.: Europe, London, Mary, etc. But we use it in the following cases:

1. cardinal points.Ex.: the North, the South, the West, the East.

2. names of countries and other geographical names which have in their structure such nouns as union, state, republic, etc.

Ex.: the United States, the Republic of Moldova, etc.

3. names of oceans, seas, mountains, island and groups of islands.Ex.: the Pacific Ocean, the Black Sea, the Alps, the West Indies, the Greenland, etc.4. before the names when speaking about all the members of the family. In this case

the noun takes a plural form.Ex.: the Smiths, the Browns, the Waynes, etc.

WE DO NOT USE THE ARTICLE with:

1. names of countries and continents:Ex.: Japan, South Africa, North America, Central Asia, etc.

2. names of villages, towns and cities:Ex.: London, Washington, Paris, Chişinău, Bucharest, etc. Exception: the Hague

3. names of streets and squares:Ex.: Independence Street, Liberty Square, etc.

THE USE OF ONE, ONES

As a rule we use one or ones in order not to repeat a noun already mentioned before.Ex.: I have no book. I want to buy one.

I don’t like these red flowers. Please, give me some white ones.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Answer the following questions paying attention:

а) to the use of the definite article with geographical nouns.1. In what part of the Republic of Moldova do you live?2. Were you on holiday in the North or in the South of our country last year?3. Did you spend your last holiday in the Carpathians or in the Alps? 4. Do you often go for holiday to the Carpathians?5. What are the Carpathians famous for?6. What is the Danube famous for?7. Why do many people like to go for holiday to the Black Sea shore?8. Are there any resorts on the Nistru?9. On what other rivers are there good resorts?

105

10. Is the Prut in the West or in the East of our country?11. Do you like to go for holiday to the sea shore or to the river bank? 12. What cities on the Nistru do you know?13. Which of them is the biggest?14. Were you on holiday on the Nistru or on the Prut last year?15. Which river is more beautiful: the Danube or the Nistru?16. Which river of the Europe is the longest? 17. Is the Danube as long as the Volga?18. Are the Carpathians between the Siret and the Tisa?19. Where are the Carpathians?20. Are the Carpathians very high? 21. Are the Himalayas higher than the Carpathians?

b) to the use of one.Where can one get if one crosses the Atlantic (Ocean)?What cities will one pass if one sails down the Nistru?What rivers will one cross if one travels from the West Europe tothe Republic of Moldova?What rivers will one cross if one goes from Bucharest to Bălţi?What countries will one pass if one travels from the Republic of Moldova to England?

2. Translate paying attention:

а) to the use of the definite article with geographical nouns.1. În România sunt multe râuri mari: Dunărea, Siret, Bistriţa, Mureş, Someş şi altele. 2. Prutul este mai îngust ca Nistrul, dar este foarte frumos. El desparte Republica Moldova de România. 3. În fiecare an eu îmi petrec concediul în Carpaţi, dar anul viitor eu nu voi merge acolo, eu voi merge în una din staţiunile de pe Dunăre. 4. Soţul surorii mele nu merge vara în Turcia. Acolo vara este foarte cald. El iubeşte să se odihnească în România. 5. Prietenul meu iubeşte foarte mult Marea Neagră, iată de ce în fiecare an în vacanţă el merge la Constanţa. 6. La anul noi vom merge în excursie în Carpaţi. Profesorul nostru spune că vom vedea acolo multe lucruri interesante. 7. Ce oraşe pe Dunăre cunoaşteţi? – Pe Dunăre sunt multe oraşe: Tulcea, Galaţi, Brăila, Giurgiu şi altele. 8. Unde sunt mai multe râuri: la estul sau la vestul Europei? 9. Unde sunt mai multe păduri: în sudul sau în centrul republicii noastre? – În centru. 10. Noi cu prietenul locuim în centrul oraşului: el – pe strada Independenţei, iar eu – pe piaţa V. Alecsandri.

b) to the use of one.1. Trebuie să citeşti ziare în fiecare zi. 2. În această bibliotecă poţi lua orice carte. 3. Nu poţi uita acest film. 4. Trebuie să citeşti mult ca să cunoşti bine literatura. 5. În Carpaţi te poţi odihni bine. 6. În Londra poţi întâlni oameni din diferite ţări. 7. Trebuie să studiezi mult pentru a învăţa bine limba engleză. 8. Ieri nu s-a putut ieşi afară: era foarte frig şi ploua tare.


3. Read aloud.

gold, golden, knave, brutal, bluebird, storey, fear, fast, cast, task, feather, bold, mind, monthly, per'ceive, folding, cherry, lorry, married, ferry, horror, terror, merry, con'ceive, leather, famous, nervous, con'tinuous, glorious, jealous, 'callous, 'perilous, eco'nomic, his'toric, ro'mantic, comic, e'lectric, hardship, 'leadership, membership.4. Pay attention how the following words are formed. Translate them.

106

tourist hardship democraticindifferent weakly proudlyheroic uncomfortable famouslandless agreement rainyChinese unhappy irregularsailor healthy unimportant


1. What time does the sun usually rise in summer?2. Does the sun set in summer as early as in winter?3. What is there in front of your house and behind it?4. Are there more rivers in the North or in the South of the Europe?5. Which Romanian songs do you like best of all?6. What heroes from tales do you know?7. How many people at your office know the Chinese language?8. Was your grandfather a peasant or a worker?9. Did you travel much about our country when you were at school? Why? 10. Where is it easier to swim: in the sea, in the lake or in the river?11. Where is the Black Sea?12. Will you go to the sea or to the Carpathians for holiday in the summer?13. Are the mountains in the Carpathians as beautiful as in the Alps? 14. What are the Carpathians famous for?


a) Last summer my sister's son, who lives ______ a village ______ the North ______ our republic, came ______ Chişinău. He was a boy ______ ten. I went ______ the station to meet him. I waited ______ the bus only ______ some minutes. I met Victor, and we started ______ the nearest bus station. When we were going ____ the street, he looked all the houses and buildings. Suddenly a car appeared ______ the corner. Victor did not know what to do and ran ______ me, but another car appeared. The driver saw the boy. He almost turned ______his car, but stopped it. I ran ______ the boy, took him and thanked the driver. ______ the evening I told the boy that he must be very careful ______ the street.b) 1. Turn ___ page ten! _____ page eleven you will see a new rule. Read it and write it _____ your exercise-books. 2. I was going _____ street when I saw my friend Nick, who was standing _____ the corner. 3. “We are proud _____ our city. Many tourists _____ all parts _____ the world come to New York to have a look _____ our places of interest”, said Tom. 4. There is a beautiful river _____ our village and the nearest town. 5. Last summer we travelled _____ Poland for two weeks. 6. We saw many interesting things when we were traveling _____ the mountains last year. 7. The American people are proud _____ their beautiful cities.

7. Make 10 sentences using the words given below.

a passenger, to sing, a tourist, to be famous for, to turn over, between, a lake, a mountain, to travel about a country, in the fields.

8. Give synonyms.

to get up, large, fine, a town, to go away, high, to come back. 9. Give antonyms.

107

behind young most uncomfortableoften thick to set furtherwinter slowly never lowest

10. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models.

a) How beautiful the sunset is!b) What a dark night!c) What a nice song they are singing!

11. Translate using yet, still, else, other, some more or one more.

1. Vreau să cumpăr încă o valiză. 2. Pe cine mai aşteptaţi? 3. Ce va mai povestit Tom? 4. Eu încă nu ştiu despre aceasta. 5. Încă mai plouă. 6. În ce oraşe aţi mai fost anul trecut. 7. Ce întrebare mai doriţi să-mi puneţi? 8. Oare încă nu-l cunoaşteţi pe prietenul meu? 9. Mergi la magazin şi mai cumpără pâine. 10. El încă mai lucra când noi ne-am întors. 11. El a mai avut nevoie de ceva timp pentru a-şi termina raportul. 12. Încă ce râuri în Europa cunoaşteţi? 13. Mai daţi-mi încă o carte la literatura engleză. 14. Prietenul meu încă nu lucrează, el învaţă. 15. Unde vom mai merge în excursie? 16. Aşteptaţi-mă puţin. Eu încă nu sunt gata. 17. Încă nu este ora şapte. Vom veni la gară la timp.


(famous, between, further, a tourist, past, heroic, a lake, friendship, Chinese)

1. There must be peace and _________ _________ the peoples of the world. 2. Paris is _________ for its beautiful palaces and museums. 3. Though it was raining hard, the travellers went _________ and _________ to the North. 4. Read this book. It's a book about the _________ people of our country. 5. The _________ language is more difficult than the English language. 6. The _________ of Baikal is the deepest in the world. 7. "Will we go _________ any villages on our way to the mountains?" one of thesked.


1. Anul trecut mi-am petrecut vacanţa în una din staţiuni nu departe de mare. Aceasta este una dintre cele mai frumoase staţiuni. M-am simţit acolo foarte bine, deoarece nu era foarte cald. 2. Să mergem acasă. Soare deja apune şi se face frig. 3. Vara soarele răsare mai devreme decât vara şi apune mai târziu. 4. Ieri am vizitat un vechi prieten de-al meu şi ne-am amintit de copilăria noastră, oraşul şi casa noastră natală în care am trăit. Noi locuiam la marginea oraşului şi direct (right) după casa noastră era pădurea. În faţa casei era o grădină mică unde ne jucam des. 5. Anul trecut, când călătoream prin munţi, am întâlnit un ţăran care avea mai mult de o sută de ani. „În munţi sunt mulţi oameni la fel de în vârstă ca mine, chiar şi mai în vârstă”, a spus el. 6. Să mergem vara în Carpaţi. Eu cunosc acolo un sătuc frumos. Acest loc este vestit prin aerul curat de munte şi cu lacul lui frumos. Acolo se poate de petrecut timpul foarte bine. 7. Veţi zbura în Turcia cu avionul sau veţi pleca cu autobuzul? – Eu voi pleca cu autobuzul, chiar dacă aceasta îmi va lua în jurul la două zile. Cu avionul eu întotdeauna mă simt rău. 8. Ce cântec frumos şi cât de bine ei îl cântă! 9. Eu îmi voi petrece concediul în satul natal. Îndată ce voi ajunge acolo, voi începe să lucrez la câmp cu părinţii. 10. În Carpaţi sunt multe staţiuni bune. Mie îmi plac Carpaţii mai mult ca marea. Eu mă simt mai bine acolo. 11. Tatăl meu s-a născut într-un sat mic unde şi-a petrecut copilăria. Acum el tot locuieşte acolo. 12. Londra este unul dintre cele mai frumoase oraşe din lume. Anul trecut noi am petrecut acolo câteva zile, când călătoream prin

108

Marea Britanie. 13. „Cine poate arăta pe hartă toate oraşele republicii noastre?” a întrebat profesorul pe elevi. 14. Anul trecut în Paris au venit mai puţini turişti decât anul acesta. 15. – Aprindeţi (Turn on), vă rog, lumina. Este deja întuneric şi este greu de citit. 16. Întoarceţi, vă rog, pagina. Să citim această povestire. 17. Mark Twain, un scriitor american renumit, cunoştea foarte bine copiii.


1. Did Nick come to the USA as a student?2. Why did he come to the United States?3. Which places of the United States did Nick visit?4. When did he visit New York?5. Whom did she meet in New York?6. When did Nick visit the little town on the Mississippi?7. What did he see there?8. Why are the people of the town proud of it?9. In what month was Nick returning home?10. Was she returning home by plane or by train?11. How long does it take one to get to New York from Bucharest by plane?

15. Make a short story using the active vocabulary of the lesson. Begin with:

a. Once when we were travelling in the mountains a friend of mine suddenly felt bad...b. The following incident took place in my town. Once when I was going along the street…c. Last year I was on holiday in the summer. I decided to travel about our country. It was early morning when my friend and I...

16. Read and retell the following text.

JAMES SMITH’S GOING TO THE UNITED STATES

It was already ten o'clock in the evening, but James Smith was not at home. His wife, a woman of thirty, was sitting at the window and looking into the dark street. Her husband was an economist. That day he had an important meeting.

Suddenly she heard a knock at the door. It was he! He always knocked three times ... The woman hurried to the door.

James, a tall man, a little older than his wife, came into the room. He was smiling. It seemed to her that he looked younger and stronger.

"I am sorry, dear, I am later than usual today. We had an important meeting. Some economists of our firm are going on an excursion to the United States. I am one of them."

That night James could not sleep: the night seemed longer, the bed seemed less comfortable ... He fell asleep only at four o'clock in the morning. He dreamed about the greatest and the most beautiful city in United States — New York. He, a simple economist, is walking along the New York streets, hundreds of American friends are heartily greeting him.

A month later James was hurrying to the port with a small suit-case in his hand. Soon he joined a group of economists who were waiting for the departure of the ship.

At last a man in uniform appeared with a list in his hand."John White!""Here!" said one of the men and hurried to the ship. — "Mark West! Alan

Parker!""James Smith" ...James looked at his wife, who was standing near him, and smiled:

109

"Well, dear, good-bye!"But the man in uniform continued:"James Smith, you will stay here. I am sorry, you cannot go. We have some reason for ...""Some reason ...," James Smith said slowly and looked at his friends who were standing in

silence. He noticed that one of them was smiling, and soon understood it was a joke. He hurried to the ship where his friends were waiting for him.

His wife waved her hand. Though she was very sorry to part with her husband, she smiled and said "A happy voyage, I am glad your dream came true".

LESSON SIXTEEN (THE SIXTEENTH LESSON)

110

THE CHILDHOOD AND YOUTH OF DICKENS

Charles Dickens, one of the greatest and most popular English novelists, was born on the 7th of February, 1812 in one of the small towns of England. He was a weak child and did not like to take part in noisy and active games.

The little boy was very, capable. He learned to read at an early age and read many books in his childhood.

When he was about six, someone took him to the theatre for the first time. He saw a play by Shakespeare and liked it so much that he decided to write a play of his own. When it was ready, he performed it together with some of his friends. Everybody enjoyed the performance, and the little writer felt very happy.

When Dickens was nine years old, the family moved to London. They lived in the suburbs of the capital of England. Their life was very hard. There were several younger children in the family, besides Charles. The future writer could not even go to school (because at that time his father was in the Debtors’ Prison of the Marshalsea. There was nobody in London whom Mr. Dickens could turn to for money and his wife with all the children except Charles went to the prison too to join him. The family lived in the prison until Mr. Dickens could pay his debts.

Those were the most unhappy days of all Charles’ life. The boy worked from early morning till late at night to help his family.

Only at the age of twelve, when his father was out of prison, could Charles go to school. He wanted to study very much, but he did not finish school. Two years later he began to work again.

He worked hard to earn his living, and tried many trades, but he did not like any of them. His dream was to study.

At the age of fifteen he often visited the famous library of the British Museum. He spent many hours in the reading-room of that library. He read and studied there and in this way he received his education.

Later Dickens described his childhood and youth in some of his famous novels, such as Little Dorrit, Nicholas Nickleby, Oliver Twist, David Copperfield.

The great writer died more than a hundred and fifty years ago, but everybody still reads his books with great interest.


youth – tinereţe besides (prep.) – în afară de, pe lângăpopular – popular, vestit several – ma mulţia novel – un roman to turn to sb. for sth. – a apela la cineva a novelist – un romancier money – baninoisy – gălăgios except – în afară deactive – active to pay – a plăticapable – capabil to earn one's living – a-şi câştiga viaţaat the age (of) – la vârsta de British – britanicat an early age – la o vârstă fragedă a way – o cale, un modabout (adv.) – în jurul la by the way – printre alteleown – propriu on one's way – în felul săuready – gata an education – studiito be (get) ready (for) – a fi gata de to describe – a descrieto enjoy – a savura such as – caa performance – o piesă de teatru to die – a murito move – a se deplasa

111

GRAMMAR

SOME, ANY, NO, EVERY AND THEIR COMPOUNDS

A number of compound words begin with some, any, no and every. These indefinite pronouns usually form their compounds with such words as: thing, body, one, where.

English Romanian Russian something ceva что-то, что-нибудь, что-либо, кое-что, нечтоsomebody, someone cineva кто-то, кто-нибудь, кто-либо, кое-кто, нектоsomewhere undeva где-то, где-нибудь, куда-то, куда-нибудь, etc.anything orice что-нибудь; все, что угодно anybody, anyone oricine, oricare кто-то, кто-нибудь, кто-либо, всякий, любойanywhere oriunde где-нибудь, куда-нибудь, где-угодно, куда-угодноnothing nimic ничто, ничегоnobody, no one nimeni никто, никогоnowhere nicăieri нигде, никудаeverything totul всёeverybody, everyone fiecare всеeverywhere peste tot везде, повсюду, всюду

The compounds formed from some are usually used in affirmative sentences.Ex.: I can see something white in that room.

I want to go somewhere for a rest.Somebody (someone) is looking at me now.

The compounds formed from any are usually used in interrogative and negative sentences.Ex.: Can you see anything white in that room? – I don’t see anything there.

Did you go anywhere for a rest last summer? – No, I didn’t go anywhere.Is there anybody (anyone) here? – There isn’t anybody (anyone) here.

The compounds formed from no are usually used in negative sentences. In this case the verb is used in affirmative form.Ex.: I see nothing there.

I went nowhere last summer.There is nobody (no one) here.

Note: When somebody, something, anybody, no one, etc. are used as subjects we always put the verb in the third person singular.Ex.: Somebody goes to the office.

Does anyone come to see us?

112

Word Formation

-ance [ans] — suffix forming nouns indicating abstract notions usually from verbs:

to perform performance

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Give the negative and interrogative forms of the following sentences.

1. Someone is waiting for you in that room. 2. He invited everybody to his country-house for the week-end. 3. There is something interesting on in our club to-day. 4. Everybody is proud of this work. 5. They are laughing at something funny. 6. Somebody is knocking at the door. 7. He sees someone on the other bank of the river. 8. You will find this book somewhere.

2. Answer the following questions paying attention to the use of indefinite pronouns.

1. Is there anything on the table?2. Can you see anything on the walls of our class-room?3. Did you read anything interesting last week?4. Did you read any interesting books last month?5. Did you invite anybody to dinner on your last day off? 6. Will you invite any of your friends to dinner on your next day off?7. Why did you invite none of our students to your place for your last birthday party? (Why

didn't you invite any of our students to your place ...?)8. Why doesn't anybody come to the office on Sunday?9. I think that some books by Oscar Wilde are not difficult for you. Does everybody agree with

me?10. Did any of you read English books last year?11. Why did none of you read English books last year?12. Does everybody like it in the South?12.Why doesn't everybody like the South in summer?13.Will you go anywhere for holiday or will you stay in town?14.Why will you go nowhere for holiday?15.Will any of our students leave for London for their winter holiday? 16.Will all of us go somewhere tonight?17.Why won't we go anywhere tonight?18.Did each student in our group take part in the last English language party?19.Can any of you speak three languages?20.Can any of these students sing?21.Could none of you play the piano in his childhood?22.Are you always in a hurry if anyone is waiting for you? Why?

3. Fill in the gaps with the right word from below.

(something, anything, nothing, everything, somebody (someone), anybody, (anyone), nobody (no one), everybody (everyone), somewhere, anywhere, nowhere, everywhere)

1. I saw this man _________ in our town last year. 2. Can _________ help me with this work? 3. I shall be very glad if we invite _________ else to join our excursion. 4. _________ can answer this difficult question. 5. I don't like this book, give me _________ else. 6. If you don't find _________ at home when you return, wait a little until I come back. 7. I don't like this dress, Mary. Put _________ else on. 8. If it rains, we won't go _________ 9. We returned home late and soon _________ went to bed and fell asleep. 10. Can you buy such a book for me _________? 11. I don't like to go shopping on Sunday, because there are usually very many people _________. 12. Is there _________ in the room? — No, there is _________ there. 13. Is _________ clear to you or shall I repeat the rule? 14. _________ wants to go on an excursion, but as it is raining hard, we will go _________ today. 15. Ask _________ else about it. I know

113

_________ about this matter and can't tell you _________. 16. As _________ is clear to _________, I will tell you _________ else.


1. Dacă mâine va fi frig, nu vom merge nicăieri. 2. Dacă cineva va întârzia, noi nu vom aştepta. Trebuie să venim la timp. 3. Aici este mai întuneric, decât în camera ceea. Nu văd nimic. 4. toţi vor adormi strâns îndată ce vor ajunge la paturile lor. 5. Povestiţi-ne ceva interesant despre viaţa dumneavoastră. 6. Să mergem la magazin. Trebuie să cumpăr ceva pentru cină. 7. Cineva vă aşteaptă în camera dumneavoastră. 8. Eu tot nu aud nimic. Vorbiţi mai tare. 9. De ce zâmbiţi? Oare în povestirea mea este ceva de râs? 10. Dacă nu veţi lucra asupra greşelilor voastre, nimic nu vă va ajuta. 11. Ieri v-a invitat cineva la această serată? 12. Copiii se bronzează acum undeva pe malul mării. 13. De ce nu sunteţi de acord să plecaţi undeva în concediu? 14. Acest om nu se teme niciodată de nimeni. 15. Cineva mai vrea să ia parte la excursia noastră? 16. De ce nimeni dintre voi nu ascultă povestirea? Oare ea nu este interesantă? 17. „Fiecare dintre voi trebuie să ţină minte aceste cuvinte”, le-a spus copiilor săi mama. 18. Poate cineva dintre voi să cânte acest cântec? 19. Nimeni nu-l va uita pe acest om.


5. Read aloud.

famous, nervous, in'dustrious, eco'nomic, ro'mantic, comic, capable, readable, Burmese, Chinese, Japanese, performance, ap'pearance, 'utterance.


1. What kind of books did you like to read in your childhood best of all?2. What famous English novelists do you know?3. What new performances at the theatres of our republic are popular with the people? (... with

the children?)4. Which of our students takes an active part in all our parties?5. What kind of people do we call capable?6. At what age did you begin to travel about our country?7. What must one do to get ready for one's examinations?8. What kind of novels do you enjoy best of all?9. In what year did you move to this town?10. What do people usually have with them when they move to another place?11. Does anyone else know English at your office besides you?12. Does everyone know English at your office except your friend?13. Which of the famous American writers began to earn his living at a very early age?14. When was Dickens born and when did he die?15. Who(m) do you usually turn to for help?


1. My son took part in the performance at his university yesterday (3). 2. Some children do not like noisy games (1). 3. We moved to Bălţi in 1996 (2). 4. My sister's daughter began to play the piano at an early age (2). 5. Many famous writers worked hard in their youth to earn their living (1). 6. My grandfather could not receive a good education, because his parents were very poor (1). 7. We enjoyed the new film yesterday (2). 8. Their friends are waiting for

114

them in the garden (4). 9. Dickens decided to write a play of his own when he was about six (3).

8. Insert the right article or possessive pronoun where necessary.

Jack London, ____ great American novelist, was born in ____ San Francisco in ____ family of ____ farmer. ____ life of ____ family, was very hard. John London, ____ father of ____ family, left ____ farm and moved to one of ____ towns of ____ United States. He tried many trades, but could not get enough money to send ____ children to ____ school. Jack London began to earn ____ living at ____ early age. He sold ____ morning and evening newspapers in ____ streets of ____ town. At ____ age of fourteen he began to work at ____ factory as ____ worker. He worked eighteen to twenty hours ____ day. In 1893 he became ____ sailor and went to ____ shores of ____ Japan. Soon he became ____ good sailor. Jack London travelled very much.He did ____ very hard work, but he also read much and tried to receive ____ education. He studied at ____ school and at ____ university. He also read many books on ____ History and ____ Philosophy. ____ Jack London's dream was to become ____ writer. In 1897 London went to ____ Far North of ____ America. He did not bring ____ gold from there, but he brought something better than ____ yellow metal. It was ____ book of ____ stories about ____ life in ____ North. ____ dream came true. He became ____ writer.


1. When Dickens was a boy ____ ____ four, his father showed him a beautiful house not far ____ the place where they lived ____ that time. "Why cannot we live ____ such a fine house?" the boy asked his father. — "We are very poor and cannot pay ____ it", his fatheranswered. Little Charles often visited that place. He liked to look ____ the house and to play near ____ it. Manу years later he really moved ____ that house and lived there ____ a long time. 2. Theodore Dreiser, the great American writer, was born ____ the 27th ____ August, 1871 ____ one ____ the small towns ____ America. 3. ____ 1894 Jack London took part ____ a strike ____ San Francisco. 4. Jack London learned to read ____ the age ____ four. He often read interesting stories together ____ his mother. When he was a boy ____ about ten, he sold newspapers ____ the streets ____ the town and ____ this way helped ____ parents. 5. What novels ____ Jack London are popular ____ our reader?


to be, to do, to take, to lie, to think, to bring, to see, to enjoy, to leave, to begin, to try, to spend, to buy, to rise, to set, to travel, to die.

11. Fill in the gaps with one of the given words.

(else, more, still, other, another, yet)

1. What _______ books by Dickens, besides David Copperfield, did you read in your childhood? 2. Who _______ wants to take part in this performance? 3. How many _______ days shall we travel about this country? 4. Will anybody _______ take part in our performance? 5. Aren't you ready _______? 6. I don't think he is _______ at the office. He usually leaves the office at six. 7. What _______ do you want to say besides this? 8. I will take _______ cup of tea, I am _______ thirsty. 9. I cannot go to the museum today. Ask someone _______ to join you. 10. What _______ foreign languages does Pete speak? 11. I think that we'll _______ be working at this subject at twelve o'clock tomorrow. 12. Ask John to sing at our party. No one _______ can do it better than he. 13. My son cannot _______ read. 14. We hope that some _______ people will

115

take part in the discussion. 15. It seems to me that somebody _______ wanted to join our excursion to Soroca. 16. I am not _______ sure that you are right.

12. Translate using to speak, to talk, to tell, to say.

1. Ieri Pete nu a vorbit mult, dar a spus multe lucruri interesante. 2. Spuneţi-i prietenului dumneavoastră că ieri am primit o mare plăcere de la raportul lui. 3. „Descrieţi-vă ziua de lucru”, le-a spus studenţilor profesorul. 4. Eu voi vorbi despre aceasta cu inginerii noştri. Eu le voi povesti despre lucrul dumneavoastră. 5. Despre ce vorbesc ei? – Ei discută piesa nouă a acestui scriitor. 6. Profesorii spun că acest băiat este foarte capabil. 7. Ce aţi spus? Repetaţi, vă rog. Nu vorbiţi aşa de repede. 8. Vorbiţi mai tare, aici este foarte gălăgios, şi ne este dificil să vă ascultăm. 9. Povestiţi-ne ceva despre oraşul dumneavoastră natal. 10. Spuneţi-i, vă rog, că nu are dreptate. 11. Noi vom vorbi despre acest spectacol mâine după lecţie. 12. Cineva dintre prietenii dumneavoastră vorbeşte engleza? 13. Ei v-au spus ceva despre aceasta? 14. Nu-i spune nimic despre plecarea noastră. 15. Nu vorbiţi la lecţie. Ascultaţi-i pe colegii voştri când ei vorbesc în engleză. 16. Toţi în afară de dumneavoastră spun că spectacolul a fost minunat. 17. Cui i-aţi spus despre aceasta? 19. Acest scriitor spune că a scris propria lui piesă când avea cincisprezece ani. 20. Cu cine vorbeaţi aşa de tare la telefon când noi am intrat? 21. De ce ieri nu ne-aţi spus nimic despre ultimul meci (match)? 22. Domnul Smith spune că a început să-şi câştige viaţa la o vârstă timpurie, deoarece tatălui său îi venea greu să întreţină (to keep) familia singur.

13. Fill in the gaps with one of the given words in the right form.

(ready, to move, a novelist, capable, great, besides, except, to enjoy, an education, to take part in, a novel, to describe)

1. Yesterday some students of our group went to the theatre. They saw a play by a _________ American writer. Everybody _________ it very much. 2. Ch. Dickens is a great English ________. 3. I received _________ in Orhei, where I studied at school, and then at the university. 4. Peter is a very _________ boy. He studies well and knows some foreign languages. 5. In what novel did Dickens _________ his childhood? 6. All the students _________ me study the second foreign language. 7. My parents have two children _________ me. 8. You may take any book you like _________ this one. It isn't mine. 9. At the age of seventeen I _________ to Chişinău to study at the university. 10. I am sorry, dinner is not yet _________. Wait a little. 11. How many _________ did this novelist write? — He wrote many fine _________. 12. Will Jane _____ ______ _____ our concert? She sings very well. — I think she will. 13. In my childhood and I read all the _________ by Dickens _________ his American Notes. 14. Do you know any other foreign languages _________ English?


a) I shall take all the books except this one.b) Besides this book I should like to take two more.


1. „Poate cineva dintre voi să-mi povestească despre copilăria marelui scriitor american Mark Twain?” – şi-a întrebat mama copii. – „Da, desigur, mamă. Profesorul nostru de literatură ne-a povestit multe lucruri interesante despre anii timpurii ai vieţii sale”. 2. Când am venit în grădină, acolo erau mulţi copii. Ei se jucau într-o joacă gălăgioasă şi râdeau. 3. Dacă aici va fi gălăgios, puteţi lucra în camera mea. Peste câteva minute eu voi pleca la universitate şi aici nu va fi nimeni. 4. Toţi spun că fiul fratelui meu este un băiat capabil. El este unul dintre cei mai buni

116

elevi ai şcolii, cântă bine la pian şi întotdeauna ia parte activă în viaţa şcolii. 5. La o vârstă timpurie am locuit la ţară. Mai târziu am trecut într-un oraş mic unde mi-am petrecut adolescenţa. 6. Tatăl prietenului meu are în jurul la şaptezeci de ani, dar el încă mai lucrează şi primeşte o mare plăcere de la lucrul său. 7. Va merge cineva cu mine la restaurant? Ne vom întoarce degrabă. Prânzul ne va lua aproximativ 25 sau 30 de minute. 8. Copii, toţi sunt gata să scrie dictarea? 9. Aşteptaţi-mă puţin, dacă nu vă grăbiţi. Eu încă nu sunt gata. 10. Când v-aţi mutat la Bălţi? – Aproximativ zece ani în urmă. 11. Dacă veţi privi piesa nouă, veţi primi o mare plăcere. Toţi spun că aceasta este una dintre cele mai bune piese ale teatrului nostru. 12. V-a plăcut ieri noul film? – Nu. Nici unuia dintre studenţii noştri nu i-a plăcut acest film. 13. Nimeni în afară de dumneavoastră în oficiul nostru nu studiază limba franceză. 14. Acum sunt foarte ocupat. Lucrez mult, studiez engleza, în afară de aceasta învăţ la universitate. 15. Toţi în afară de Nick vor merge la spectacol. El va fi ocupat. Plus la aceasta el nu se simte prea bine. 16. Nu pot să merg acum cu dumneavoastră la magazin. Eu voi face cumpărături în drum spre casă. 17. În ce roman Dickens şi-a descris copilăria? Ce roman al lui Dickens este cel mai popular? 18. Păcat că nu puteţi să-mi daţi adresa lui John. Dar dacă îmi veţi descrie casa, eu o voi găsi uşor. 19. Acest roman este la fel de interesant ca şi cel pe care l-aţi citit luna trecută? – Nu. Acest roman este mai puţin interesant, cu toate că nu pot să spun că el este rău. 20. Îndată ce voi citi acest roman, vi-l voi da, dacă doriţi. Cred că vă va plăcea şi dumneavoastră. 21. Dacă sunt prieteni buni, oricând poţi să te adresezi la ei după ajutor.

16. Read, translate and retell the following text.

I began to earn my living at an early age. When I was about ten, my stepfather sent me to London where I began to work with one of the firms. I did not enjoy my work, certainly, as it was hard and uninteresting and I had to work from early morning till late at night. Nobody taught me anything there; nobody ever thought about me, nobody even spoke to me except a few boys who worked together with me. My life was hard, but I tried to think of it as little as possible. Once, however, when I was lying awake at night, an idea came to me to run away somewhere. But where could I go? I could not return to my stepfather... And then I remembered that I could go to my mother's sister Miss Trotwood. I did not know her address, I only knew that she lived somewhere in Dover.

The next Saturday I packed my box and when everything was ready, I asked a fellow to help me take the box to the station. On the way to the station, however, the fellow suddenly disappeared with my box and I was quite alone in the street...

(After "David Copperfield" by Dickens)17. Answer the following questions.

1. What was Charles Dickens?2. When was Charles Dickens born?3. Where was he born?4. What kind of child was Charles Dickens?5. Did he like to take part in noisy and active games?6. When did he learn to read?7. How old was he when he went to the theatre for the first time?8. What play did he see?9. What did he write after that?10. When did his family move to London?11. In what place did he live?12. Why couldn't Charles go to school at that time?13. Why was Mr. Dickens in prison?14. Could Charles' father send him to school?

117

15. What was Charles' dream?16. What did he often visit at the age of fifteen?17. In what way did he receive his education?18. In what novels did Dickens describe his childhood?19. What novels by Dickens do you like?20. Can you read novels by Dickens in English?

18. Write a short essay using the given words.

to be born, at the age of, at an early age, to die, to earn one's riving, to do hard work, in this way, to turn to sb. for sth., to receive an education, to travel about the country, in his youth, to take part in, to become famous, to describe, such as, to be popular with, etc.

118

LESSON SEVENTEEN (THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON)

THERE’S NO SUCH WORD

I'll never forget my teacher. It happened when I was a student. Her name was Mildred T. Pretz, and when we students spoke of her we played with her name as children often do, and called her "Mrs. Pretzel". She was a quiet teacher, a little older than our other teachers, and rather strict. She often kept me after school to redo my exercises, or something else she considered wrong with my work. I didn’t like these brilliant ideas, but I had to obey. There was no reason to look for an escape, she didn’t allow me to go out. I looked like a prisoner.

Usually, I did not have any conversation with her. One day, after I took a little breath, I explained to her, saying "I can't do it, I just can't get it right." My right hand was trembling, I could not hide it. The first few minutes she was silent, there was no sound. Then looked at me and said in a whisper: "There's no such word as can't." "What?" "There's no such word as can't," she said again, "just work until you can." And that was that. She walked away, but I still worked on my exercises. At that moment I could hardly understand her words.

I tried to make out her words that night, and many days after that. Finally I understood! Mrs. Pretz was right! There really was no such word as can't! And so I learned a lesson for my entire life, with its sad and gay moments. When you really want to do something, you must never give up. I learned that no matter how difficult, when something is important, it's not only true that you can do it, but that you must!

after Stephen Trussel


to forget – a uita to explain (to) – a explicaquiet – liniştit to tremble – a tremurarather – destul de to hide – a ascundeto keep – a ţine, a păstra silent – tăcutto redo – a reface a sound – un sunetwrong – greşit a whisper – o şoaptăbrilliant – minunat until – până cândan idea – o idee to understand – a înţelegeto obey – a asculta to make out – a-şi da seamato look for – a căuta entire – întregan escape – o ieşire sad – tristto allow – a permite gay – vesela prisoner – un prizonier to give up – a renunţaa conversation – o conversaţie true – adevăratto take breath – a-şi trage sufletul

GRAMMAR

TO BE ABLE TO, TO HAVE TO

to be able to is the equivalent of the modal verb can. to have to is the equivalent of the modal verb must.

Both of them are used instead of these verbs in Future Indefinite Tense (to have to is also used in Past Indefinite Tense).

119

Ex.: I can go there now. I will be able to go there tomorrow. He must go there now. He will have to go there next week.

He had to go there last week.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Put the following sentences in the Future Simple Tense.

а) 1. My sister can sing very well. 2. Everybody can do this work. 3. One of our students can write plays of his own. 4. Can you play this game? 5. This girl cannot take part in active games.b) 1. You must move to another town. 2. They must wait for us here. 3. The airplane must land at once. 4. The boys must run to get to the station in time.

2. Give the interrogative and the negative form of the following sentences.

1. Nick could run as fast as John. 2. We will be able to see this performance tonight. 3. Charles Goodman had to earn his living at an early age. 4. I will have to get off at the next stop to do some shopping. 5. Pete had to agree with his friend because his friend was right. 6. They had to come again because the director of the office was out at that time. 7. I will have to buy new gloves. Mine are quite old. 8. They will have to hurry not to be late for the concert. 9. My friend had to return home to take his watch.


1. Your son will have to stay in bed because he is still weak (4). 2. We shall be able to go on an excursion the day after tomorrow (3). They had to put on their coats because it was very cold (3). 4. We shall have to stay at home as it will soon begin to rain (4). 5. They had to knock another time because no one opened the door (3). 6. This old man could tell very funny stories (3).

4. Answer the following questions paying attention to the use of modal verbs and their equivalents.

1. Did you have to earn your living when you were a child? Why?2. What kind of English novels will you be able to read in a year?3. What did you have to do when it began to rain yesterday?4. Will you be able to go to the sea in the summer?5. When will you be able to go somewhere for holiday?6. In what year did you move to this town? Why did you have to leave your native town?7. Did you have to go shopping last Sunday?8. Which of your students will be able to take part in this concert?9. When will you be able to speak English well?10. Why did Dickens' mother have to live in the Marshalsea Prison with her children?12. Why did little Dickens have to help his family?


a) Did you have to work at the office till six o'clock last Saturday?b) We did not have to take а taxi. We got to the station in time by bus.c) He won’t be able to buy this book; he hasn't got enough money about him.

120


1. Veţi putea lua parte la această excursie? – Mă tem că nu voi putea. Va trebui să lucrez asupra raportului. 2. Cred că Pete va putea să vină în Londra la timp, doar că va trebui să zboare acolo cu avionul. 3. Ea nu va putea primi plăcere de la plimbare, dacă nu va îmbrăca un veston cald, deoarece va fi foarte frig. 4. Va trebui să vă grăbiţi la gară, dacă nu vreţi să întârziaţi. 5. Deoarece nimeni nu mi-a răspuns, eu trebuie să repet întrebare mea mai tare. 6. Eu cred că el nu va putea să invite aşa de mulţi oameni. Apartamentul lui este la fel de mic ca şi al dumneavoastră. 7. Ieri am vrut să mergem în pădure, dar ploua şi a trebuit să rămânem acasă. 8. Când Dickens avea nouă ani, părinţii lui au trebuit să se mute la Londra. 9. Eu sunt sigur că John va putea face un raport bun, dar el va trebui să citească foarte multe cărţi. 10. Eu nu am putut să plec acasă deoarece ploua puternic şi a trebuit să rămân la lucru mai târziu ca de obicei. 11. Duminică am petrecut mult timp la aer liber, dar nu a trebuit să îmbrăcăm haine călduroase deoarece timpul era bun şi soarele strălucea puternic. 12. Fiul dumneavoastră va putea să ni se alăture deseară? – Da, cred că va fi liber şi va putea să vină la dumneavoastră. 13. Nu a trebuit să mă adresez nimănui după ajutor. Eu am putut face singur acest lucru. 14. Ei nu au putut discuta această întrebare serioasă ieri. Ei vor trebui s-o facă astăzi. 15. Nu a trebuit să pierd mult timp pe acest text. El este foarte uşor.


7. Read aloud.

race, coat, cure, mumps, thus, future, fracture, willow, bow, vast, flask, parry, village, stretch, method, penny, slang, swoon, lain, fade, v heel, peer, code, moor.

8. Pay attention how the following words are formed. Translate them.

Everywhere homeless unnecessaryfatherless hopeful someonedirection nameless snowyfunny indifferent sailor


1. Can you tell us something interesting that happened to you when you were a child?2. Have you any friends? Do they look like their parents?3. Who(m) do you look like?4. Do you look more like your father?5. What does your mother look like?6. What does your sister (brother) look like?7. Does your friend like quiet or noisy games?8. What do you do if your little brother (sister) does not obey you?9. Is it easy to understand a person when he is speaking in a whisper?10. Can you understand your teacher easily when she speaks English?11. Do you like gay or sad songs?12. When do you usually ask the teacher to explain to you this or that rule again?13. When does one have to look around?

121


1. We had to come back home because Mary felt bad and could hardly walk (1). 2. The child will not be able to drink such hot milk (1). 3. You j will have to look through all these articles before you begin to work at your report (2). 4. We had to speak in a whisper because Father was asleep (1). 5. Peter looks like his brother (1). 6. The teacher had to explain the difficult rule to his pupils once more (2).

11. Insert the right article where necessary and retell the text.

It happened on _____ cold autumn day. _____ Bishop of _____ city was sitting at _____ table. He was ready to have _____ supper when somebody knocked at _____ door. _____ moment later _____ door opened and _____ stranger came in. _____ Bishop looked at _____ man, but before he could say _____ word, _____ man began in _____ low voice, "Look here, my name is _____ Jean Valjean. I am back from _____ prison. I was there nineteen years. They let me out four days, ago. I walked thirty miles _____ last night. I want to go back _____ home. When I came to this town, I began to look for _____ place where I could stay for the night. I went to _____ hotel, but they did not allow me to stay there. They said to me, 'Be off or we shall call _____ police', and I had to obey. I decided to sleep in _____ park, but _____ good woman showed me your house and said: 'Knock at that door'. Is this your hotel? I can pay for _____ room. See! Here is my money. I worked hard in _____ prison for nineteen long years and I earned very much money. I am hungry. May I have something to eat? I’ll pay anything that you ask."

_____ Bishop turned to _____ servant and said, "Put another chair at _____ table, please.""Stop," said Jean. "Did you understand everything? I am just back from _____ prison. Here

is my passport, yellow, as you see. Nobody wanted to help me. Will you give me something to eat and _____ bed?"

"Put some white sheets on _____ bed, please." said _____ Bishop as he looked at _____ servant. He then turned to _____ man and asked him to sit down. "We shall have _____ supper in _____ few minutes," he explained...

(after V. Hugo The Miserables)


1. What happened _____ you yesterday? Why did you not come to the lecture? 2. It isn't yet clear whom this baby looks _____. 3. When I went out, it was very dark _____ the street. I looked _____, but could not make _____ anything. 4. He said something _____ me _____ whisper, but I couldn't make _____ his words. 5. Will you describe _____ me your brother? I shall willingly meet _____ him _____ the station if you are busy, but I don't know what he looks _____. 6. Everybody was ready _____ departure _____ Peter. 7. This teacher is very popular _____ his pupils because he usually explains _____ them all the rules very well. 8. I am very glad I could do something _____ you. You may turn _____ me _____ help _____ any time you like. 9. I enjoyed _____ all the stories _____ that magazine _____ the last one. 10. Can you speak _____ any other foreign language _____ English? 11.1 am very busy now and can't answer your questions. I'll explain _____ you everything _____ our way home. 12. "You must obey _____ your sister," the mother said _____ her little son before she left home.

13. Fill in the gaps with one of the given words.

(to obey, in a whisper, to make out, a step, to look around, to hide, trembling, to look for, to explain, sad, to turn to, an idea, to turn pale, pale, to tremble, to take breath).

122

1. "Will you make a few _________ in my direction and give me your hand? The night is so dark that I cannot _________ anything," said one of the travellers to his friend. 2. ... One of the soldiers saw an old woman, came up to her and said _____ _____ _____, "Will you be able _____ _____ one of our men in your house? He is ill and cannot go further. "The woman _____ _____, but her voice was quiet when she said, "Be sure, the enemy will not be able to find him even if they ______ ____ him everywhere in the village." 3. "Let’s _____ ____ Nick for help. He knows this subject best of all." "Oh! What a brilliant _________!" 4. "Why do you look so _________ and _________? What is the matter with you?" I asked a friend of mine. — "I am sorry, it is difficult for me to speak about it now," she answered in a _________ voice. "I shall _________ to you everything later." 5. I cannot run as fast as you do. Let's stop and _____ ____ . 6. Never read such _________ stories to your children. Don't you see they are all ________? 7. Children must _________ their parents.


to tremble, to stop, to run, to allow, to obey, to understand, to make ; out, to hide, to enjoy, to die, to sing, to rise, to set, to laugh, to continue, j to write, to read, to see, to buy, to bring, to drink, to hear, to study, to he.

15. Give synonyms.

to take place a thought to make sth. clearsome minutes a talk when he was 12 years oldto let vacation to approach

16. Give antonyms.

to be unable to look for to be quietsad in a loud voice incapableto turn red light to rise

17. Make 10 sentences beginning with constructions as it is interesting, it is difficult, it is necessary, using the words given below.

to hide, to make out, in a whisper, to make a step, to be quiet, to look for..., to be silent, to take breath, to explain, to understand, several, hardly.


a) Who(m) does this girl look like? — She looks like her mother.b) What does that girl look like?—That girl is tall with blue eyes.с) This is rather a difficult book. This book is rather difficult.


1. What you (to look for)? — I (to look for) my magazine. It (to be) here half an hour ago. Oh! Here it is! You (to hide) it from me? 2. When I (to come) into the room, the children (to play) some game. Ann (to stand) in the corner and Peter (to explain) something to Jane in a whisper. 3. "If you (to be quiet), I (to show) you something interesting," the old man said to the children who (to stand) around him. 4. Some people (to tremble) if they are afraid of something. 5. Why you (to tremble)? Are you afraid? 6. Who (to play) the piano in that room? — It's my daughter. She (to have) her lesson now. She (to take) lessons three times a week. 7. Why you (to lie) here?

123

You (to be) ill? — No, I (not to be), I (to have a rest). 8. When you (to move) from your native town to the capital? — We (to do) it ten years ago. 9. I (to go) to see you as soon as the doctor (to allow) me to go out. Now I still (to feel) rather bad. 10. It is very important for me to read an article in that magazine. So I (to intend) to look for it in all the book-shops and libraries of our town until I (to find) it.


1. Ieri s-a întâmplat ceva cu ceasornicul meu. Dimineaţa el se grăbea cu cinci minute, iar seara rămâneau în urmă cu cinci minute. 2. Nu voi putea să-l recunosc pe fiul dumneavoastră, acolo sunt aşa de mulţi băieţi de vârsta lui. – Îl veţi recunoaşte uşor. El seamănă cu mine. 3. Veţi putea căuta această carte la dumneavoastră acasă în astă seară? Nu o pot găsi nicăieri. 4. Ce veţi lua la micul dejun: cafea sau lapte? – Eu voi lua lapte. – Dacă aveţi gripă luaţi cafea. Laptele este prea rece. 5. Nu pot să beau ceai repede. El este foarte fierbinte. Veţi putea să mă aşteptaţi puţin? 6. Permiteţi-mi, vă rog, să merg să mă plimb puţin. – Dar veţi putea să mergeţi singur? – Da, desigur, azi mă simt mai bine. 7. Nu voi putea pleca la ţară duminica viitoare. Medicul nu-mi permite să ies din casă până ce nu mă voi îndrepta. 8. Căutaţi casa nr. 23? Mergeţi în această direcţie, apoi luaţi-o la stânga. Este clar? – Da! Mulţumesc. 9. Eu întotdeauna primesc o mare plăcere de la acest cântec. Cred că este cel mai vesel şi frumos din toate cântecele pe care le cântaţi de obicei. 10. Dacă nu mă veţi ajuta nu voi putea înţelege nimic în această scrisoare. 11. Ce căutaţi? – Eu caut valiza mea mică. – Iată-l. A trebuit să-l ascund de copii. 12. Nu vă voi explica nimic până când nu vă veţi linişti. Îmi vine greu să vorbesc când faceţi aşa mare gălăgie. 13. Noi discutam cartea nouă a unui tânăr scriitor de al nostru, când tatăl meu a venit. El tot a luat parte la discuţie. Când el vorbea, toţi tăceau. El ne-a povestit multe lucruri interesante.


1. When are people silent?2. When does one feel sad?3. Why did you once turn pale?4. When do one's hands begin to tremble?5. When can one hardly walk?6. When can one hardly continue one's work?7. When do people usually speak in a whisper?

22. Make a short story on the topic: What Happened to Me in My Childhood when I Was at Home Alone. Use the words and word combinations given below

to obey, to allow, a performance, alone, dark, to close, a brilliant idea came to my mind, to look for, to find, suddenly, heavy, steps, to hide, to look like, quiet, moment, to understand.

124

LESSON EIGHTEEN (THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON)

A STUDENT STORY

Have I ever told you the story of Bob Russel? He is my neighbour and a member of our local club, so I use to call him Bobby. We live in the same building. Why do I want to tell you his story? You will understand it when you hear it. Let me begin:

He was a poor student in high school. He could never learn to study. It was an interior fight for him to go to the lessons. He only did well at subjects which came easily to him, but he liked to read. He sometimes liked English class, which was usually a kind of literature.

I believe he wasn't very big on homework. It usually took him a lot to do it correctly. But in his second year of study he got a test paper which somehow captured his imagination. His subject was F. Scott Fitzgerald, among the American novelists of the 20s. He decided to defend bravely his interests. He read everything by this author as well as everything he could find about him, preparing himself like a soldier for the “fierce battle”. It was the first time he was excited about writing a paper. He tried to liberate all his best thoughts. He could not admit to be defeated.

When the day came, he anxiously handed in his work, imagining the possibility of triumph. A week later came the moment for the papers to be returned. Bobby was surprised by the enemy look of his teacher as he handed him his work. In a few seconds his surprise turned to shock, then to hate. His work was in red. There was written: "This isn't your own work."

Bobby was ready to kill his teacher, but instead of this he turned round and never returned to his class.

Now, after many years as a teacher himself, he knows what a teacher must never do. That to write a note like that on a bad student's paper, to wrongly accuse another one, is to risk to destroy a new beginning of that student.


a neighbour – un vecin to admit – a admitea member – un membru to defeat – a înfrângelocal – local anxiously – cu nerăbdareto use – a folosi to hand in – a da, a înmânato call – a chema, a numi a triumph – triumphto fight – a lupta an enemy – un duşmanto believe – a crede to turn (to) – a se transformacorrectly – correct a shock – un şocamong – printre hate - urăto defend – a apăra to kill – a omorâbravely – brav to turn round – a se întoarcea soldier – un soldat to return – a revenifierce – crâncen himself – el însăşia battle – o bătălie to risk – a riscato liberate – a elibera to destroy – a destruge

125

GRAMMAR

PARTICIPLE II

Regular verbs form it adding –ed (as in Past Indefinite Tense). Ex.: to discuss – discussed Irregular verbs have special forms:

to beat – beatento begin – begunto bet – betto break – brokento bring – broughtto build – builtto buy – boughtto catch – caughtto come - cometo choose – chosento cut – cutto do – doneto fall – fallento feel – feltto find – foundto get – got

to give – givento go – goneto grow – grownto hear – heardto keep – keptto know – knownto leave – leftto let – letto lose – lostto make – madeto mean – meantto meet – metto put – putto read – read [red]to retell – retoldto see – seen

to sell – soldto send – sentto set – setto shut – shutto sleep – sleptto smell – smeltto speak – spokento spend – spentto take – takento teach – taughtto think – thoughtto understand – understoodto win – wonto write – written

126

PRESENT PERFECT TENSE FORM

Present Continuous Tense refers to an action that takes place at the time of speaking.How do we form it?

Present Simple of the verb TO HAVE + PARTICIPLE II of the verb.


I have spokenYou have spokenHe (She, It) has spoken

We have spokenYou have spokenThey have spoken


I have not spokenYou have not spokenHe (She, It) has not spoken

We have not spokenYou have not spokenThey have not spoken


Have I spoken?Have you spoken?Has he (she, it) spoken?

Have we spoken?Have you spoken?Have they spoken?

Adverbs used with this tense: today, never, ever, often, already, yet, just, lately, etc.GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs. Translate them.

a) to study, to prepare, to repeat, to translate, to answer, to discuss, to receive, to ask, to wash, to play, to pass, to pack, to recognize, to save, to reach, to invite, to stop, to describe, to perform, to allow.b) to read, to take, to do, to begin, to give, to see, to spend, to make, to tell, to show, to bring, to leave, to forget, to meet, to understand, to build, to send, to pay, to sell, to buy, to hear, to sing, to find, to know, to put, to drink, to hide.

2. Give the Participle II of the following verbs.

to go, to sit, to come, to become, to get, to be, to feel, to think, to swim, to lie, to die. to fall, to grow, to drive, to rise, to set, to ring up, to run.

3. Translate.

a) from English.a closed door, a saved man, written work, one of the discussed questions, a well-known writer, a well-dressed woman, a well-prepared report.b) into English.un lucru vândut, a melodie (tune) uitată, o lecţie dată, o carte necitită, o întrebare discutată, un copil salvat, o piesă bine jucată, un bărbat bine îmbrăcat.

4. Translate using Past Indefinite Tense or Present Perfect Tense.

1. Eu niciodată nu am fost în Alpi, dar am văzut multe alte locuri de munte. 2. Când aţi fost la mare? – Am fost acolo cinci ani în urmă. 3. Ce să fac? Am pierdut cheia de la apartament şi nu pot nimeri acasă. 4. Nu pot găsi nicăieri telegrama prietenului meu. Ea era în buzunarul vestonului meu. Cred că am pierdut-o când am scos mănuşile din buzunar.

5. Give the negative and interrogative forms of the following sentences.

1. They have looked for the book everywhere. 2. Her father has travelled much. 3. The boy has hidden your book. 4. His wife has just returned from the sea. 5. They have invited many people to take part in the performance. 6. Something has happened to Jane.


1. We have heard this gay song somewhere lately (1). 2. They have never been to any foreign country (2). 3. We have already seen this new film (3). 4. His friend has translated two English novels into Russian (3). 5. It happened to Nick several years ago (2). 6. Somethingstrange has happened to Pete (1).

7. Answer the following questions

a) 1.Have you travelled much?2. Where have you travelled?3. Have you ever travelled in the Alps?4. Have you ever discussed any books by English novelists with your friends?5. What books have you discussed?6. How many English books have you read this year?7. Have you not had breakfast yet?8. Where have you had breakfast?9. Where is Nick? Has he left London?

10.Why has John left his native village?11.Have you prepared everything I asked you last time?12.What have you (done) prepared for today?

b) 1. Have you ever been to the mountains?2. When were you at the Black Sea?3. How many English films have you seen this year?4. When did you go to the cinema last (time)?5. What new films have you seen this month?6. Has your sister graduated from the university?7. When did she graduate from the university?8. Has your brother (sister) finished school?9. How many examinations has he already passed?

10.Have you read today's newspaper already?11.What article have you already read?12.What kind of articles do you like best of all?


1. We (to come across) a very interesting article in this magazine. Let us discuss it together. 2. Is everybody here? — No, Pete (not to come) yet. I think he (not to return) from the village yet. 3. You already (to ring up) your friend? — No, I (not to ring him up) yet. I am very busy and cannot do it now. 4. It is already late. The sun (to set). Let us go home. 5. Why you (not to turn over) page ten yet? Everybody is already reading page eleven. 6. When your sister (to return) from the sea? — She (to return) from the sea yesterday. — Why you (not to go) to the railway station to meet her? — I couldn't do it, I (to be) busy. 7. I (not to hear) anything from him for many years. 8. What time you (to have breakfast) today? I (not to have) anything this morning. Let's go to the restaurant together now. I am hungry. 9. "What you (to do) now?" George (to ask) me over the telephone. "I just (to have) dinner and (to read) a newspaper," I (to answer).


a) I have never been to the Alps.b) I haven't yet looked through this book. I haven't looked through this book yet. с) Have you ever traveled?

10. Continue the following sentences. Translate them.

1. Our friend has already … 4. We have never …2. I have just … 5. They haven't yet …3. Have you ever … 6. I have often …

11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses

a) 1. Soarele a răsărit deja şi ne putem duce la râu. Bărcile noastre sunt deja acolo. 2. De ce nu l-aţi invitat pe John să ia parte la lucrul nostru? El cunoaşte bine acest obiect şi poate să ne ajute. 3. Fiul surorii mele este foarte capabil. El are doar patru ani, dar deja s-a învăţat să citească. 4. De ce ai rămas acasă? Medicul încă nu ţi-a permis să ieşi? 5. Eu tot nu am auzit niciodată această povestire. De aceea eu cred că tot voi primi o mare plăcere să o ascult. 6. Ce s-a întâmplat cu Pete? De ce el încă nu a venit? 7. Mă bucur că el vi s-a alăturat. Acum vă va fi mai uşor să terminaţi acest lucru. 8. Cred că va trebui să rămânem aici până la ora şapte. 9. Unde sunt cărţile mele? Numai ce le-am lăsat aici. A fost cineva pe aici?b) 1. Noi încă nu am trecut la apartament nou. Vom putea face aceasta doar după ce acolo va fi totul gata. 2. Eu am venit acasă, am luat cina şi am început să-mi fac lecţiile: am învăţat lecţia nouă şi m-am uitat prin toate cele vechi. Dumneavoastră tot v-aţi uitat prin toate lecţiile? 3. În ultimul timp nu am cumpărat nimic nou. 4. Când v-aţi cumpărat costumul dumneavoastră nou? 5. Ieri l-am văzut pe George, l-am strigat, el s-a uitat în direcţia mea, dar nu m-a recunoscut. 6. Cer scuze, nu v-am recunoscut deloc. 7. Nick încă nu mi-a povestit nimic despre conversaţia sa cu directorul. 8. „În sfârşit am ajuns în sat!” a spus el. „Acum vom putea să ne odihnim.” 9. Am ajuns în oraş când era cu totul întuneric, de aceea a trebuit să rămânem acolo pe noapte. 10. Aţi făcut multe greşeli în această dictare. Va trebui să învăţaţi mai bine toate cuvintele. 11. Când şi-a făcut el raportul? – El l-a făcut săptămâna trecută. Păcat că nu l-aţi auzit. Raportul a fost foarte interesant. 12. Niciodată nu am auzit un cântec aşa de comic şi vesel. Cine a scris cuvintele?


12. Read aloud.

little, battle, cattle, meddle, saddle, table, stable, fable, cycle, peddle, please, leave, leaf, boat, seat, steep, deep, neat, clear, fear, member, letter, better, reader, fighter, blotter, behind, find, kind, old, fold, told, fast, cast, task, mask.


1. Is your neighbour an engineer or a doctor? (What is he?) 2. Who usually corrects your mistakes?3. In what way do you correct your mistakes?4. What must you do to write new English words correctly?5. When do people call one another by their first names?6. What do we call people who serve in the army?7. Why do people fight one war against another? Why do they make war? 8. When do people defend their country from the enemy?9. What soldiers must do to defeat the enemy?13.When did the Civil War in the USA begin? When did it end?14.Why do all the peoples of the world want peace?15.What kind of people do we call brave?16.Have you ever had a serious test paper?17.Had you a test paper last week?18.When did you have a test paper?19.Have you ever seen a battle?20.What other novelists do you know among the American writers?21.Has your friend ever had any triumph in his life?22.What the first shock in your life?23.Whom did you hand in the essay yesterday?24.Why do animals kill other animals?25.When did your friend return from the mountains?26.Have you ever worked with foreign delegations? :


1. Ann has not answered my questions correctly either (2). 2. I began to work at an office when I graduated from the university (2). 3. I turned on the light because it was dark in the room (1). 4. Yesterday we had a very difficult test paper (2). 5. Today I am paler than usual because I feel rather bad (2). 6. Now many foreign people are travelling about our country (3). 7. We call the people who live in England the English (1).

15. Insert the right article where necessary and retell the text.

____ following incident took place in ____ South of ____ England. Pete Stivenson, ____ fireman from ____ Manchester was spending his holiday at ____ rest-home on shore of ____ sea. That warm June night he was fast asleep in one of__most comfortable rooms of ____ rest-home. Suddenly he heard ____ loud cries: ''Help, help!" He thought that it was ____ dream. He opened his eyes and heard ____ cries again. It was clear now that somebody was crying for ____ help. When ____ young fireman ran out into ____ street, he saw that one of ____ houses was on fire. ____ cries were coming from ____ fifth floor. " ____ Smiths are still in ____ house!" ____ woman's voice cried...

____ way to ____ window on ____ fifth floor seemed very long to Pete. At last he reached ____ window. He did not see anybody in ____ first room, but in ____ second one there was

____ old woman and ____ boy who were sitting in ____ corner and crying. Pete did not wait ____ second. He took ____ boy by the hand and they got out of ____ room together.

When ____ boy was on the ground, Pete returned to ____ house to save ____ old woman. Soon ____ woman was out of ____ house too. ____ grandmother and ____ grandson wanted to thank ____ brave fireman, but they could not see him anywhere.

____ next day Pete Stivenson left for Manchester. ____ month later he got ____ letter from ____ South. It was from ____ Smiths. All ____ family thanked Pete for his action.


1. Have you ever been _____ India? 2. My friend has never been _____ the Alps. 3. When I was _____ Chişinău last time, I met _____ a friend of mine there whom I didn't recognize until he came _____ _____ me and called me _____ my first name. 4. There are some very capable young singers _____ my friends. Let's invite them _____ our party. I am sure they will sing _____ us _____ great pleasure. 5. There is rather a high mountain _____ these two rivers. 6. Will you turn _____ the radio? I'll try to fall asleep. 7. Turn _____ the light. I cannot make _____ anything here, it's too dark. 8. _____ my last holiday I travelled _____ the South our country. 9. When the old woman heard the sad news she did not cry but kept silent _____ several hours. 10. Why were you late _____ the theatre? I was waiting _____ you there _____ seven _____ eight o'clock. 11. Turn _____ and look _____ this picture. I think it is one _____ the most beautiful pictures here. 12. Now I am leaving___________the station. I want to see my friend off. Не will be angry _____ me if I don't keep my word. 13. Can you ring me ___ ___ three o'clock? I cannot speak _____ you now. I am very busy. 14. Our way lay _____ a forest. It was rather dark and cold, but none _____ us wanted to turn _____. 15. Have you passed your examination _____ English? 16. What are you looking _____ here? — I am looking _____ my hat. 17. I want to take ice-cream _____ the sweet. 18. You haven't turned _____ the page, that's why you don't see Exercise Six. 19. When I came _____ the room, my children were playing _____ the piano. 20. Yesterday we went _____ an excursion to the museum. We examined all the exhibits _____ great interest.

17. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models. Use the following adjectives.

correct, gay, weak, happy, loud, dark, strong, cold, funny, simple, pale, light, heavy, noisy, capable, popular, famous.

a) Pete has read louder today than usual.b) This story is as long as that one.c) Your magazine is not so interesting as mine.d) Whose dictation is the best in your group?e) This time you have given me an easier book to read.

18. Choose the necessary word from the brackets. Put it in the right form.

1. Don't (to hurry, to be in a hurry) we (still, else) have some time before the train starts. 2. (Between, among) our economists there are many who graduated from big universities. 3. It was rather dark and we couldn't make out anything on the opposite (bank, shore) of the river. 4. I believe next year we shall go to the (bank, shore) of the Black Sea for our holiday. (None, nobody) of us has ever been there. 5. (To say, to tell) us something about the famous City of London. 6. When did the film (to finish, to end)? 7. I shall answer all your questions as soon as I (to end, to finish) this work. 8. I shall never (to forget, to leave) my friends with whom I studied

at school. 9. Can you give me the magazine I asked you for? — I am sorry I (to forget, to leave) it at home. I shall (to take, to bring) it tomorrow. 10. We all know very well the things you are speaking about. Can't you (to tell, to speak) us anything (else, more)? 11. He was so tired that he could (hard, hardly) (to speak, to say). 12. If you work at your English (hardly, hard), you will be able to speak this language well in a year or two. 13. You have made (little, few) mistakes in your homework. Almost all the sentences are (right, correct). 14. I believe Nick is quite (right, correct). 15. I haven't watched TV since Sunday because I've felt very (bad, badly) all this time. 16. There are (many, much) good students (among, between) us. 17. There is a beautiful lake (among, between) these two villages. 18. When the lecture (to finish, to be over) the students asked the professor many questions. 19. I have never been to New York. My friend hasn't been there (also, either). 20. Did you take part in this show (too, either)?

19. Make 10 sentences in Present Perfect Tense using the words from below.

to correct, a neighbour, pale, a soldier, to keep, a delegation, at the lesson, among, ever, never, lately, to believe.

20. Give antonyms.

a healthy man, strong, thick, wrong, war, to be born, always, behind, light, a strange town, to be free, to be well.

21. Make sentences with each of the following verbs.

to turn over, to turn off, to turn on, to turn round, to turn back, to turn to sb. for sth.


to tell, to fight, to correct, to spend, to begin, to feel, to lie, to do, to leave, to think, to bring, to know, to keep, to build, to sing, to die, to fall ill.


1. Deja i-aţi văzut pe vecinii noştri noi? Ei nu demult s-au mutat aici din Chişinău. 2. Cine cântă la pian? – Fiul vecinilor noştri. 3. Deja aţi verificat traducerea mea? – Da. În ea nu sunt deloc greşeli. Aţi făcut-o foarte bine. 4. Eu încă nu am vorbit cu John, dar cred că el va înţelege că nu are dreptate. 5. Această carte descrie timpul când toată lumea lupta brav împotriva răului. 6. Ce s-a întâmplat cu dumneavoastră? Sunteţi foarte palid. V-aţi îmbolnăvit? 7. Printre membrii delegaţiei care a venit la noi ieri, erau câţiva jurnalişti americani. 8. Eu încă nu am controlat caietele voastre. Îndată ce le voi controla, eu voi putea să vă explic greşelile. 9. Aţi citit deja romanul lui London „Colţ alb”? – Da. Am primit o mare plăcere de la această carte. 10. Aţi intrat deja la universitate? Ce vârstă aveţi? Arătaţi foarte tânăr. – Da, eu sunt deja student. Eu am intrat la universitate la şaptesprezece ani. 11. Cred că nu s-a întâmplat nimic cu el. El, pur şi simplu, nu a putut să urce în autobuz. Acum la staţie este foarte multă lume. 12. Fiul s-a întors şi i-a spus mamei: „Dacă cu mine se va întâmpla ceva, eu te voi anunţa”. 13. „Aceasta s-a întâmplat când noi învăţam la şcoală...”, a început el. 14. Ce s-a întâmplat cu dumneavoastră? De ce tăceţi? Continuaţi-vă povestirea! 15. S-a întâmplat ceva cu el? De ce nu s-a ţinut e cuvânt? 16. Cine în camera aceea cântă aşa bine la pian? – Acesta este aparatul de radio. Eu numai ce l-am conectat. 17. Opriţi, vă rog, gazul, dacă aţi pregătit deja prânzul. În bucătărie este prea cald. 18. „Cred că va trebui să ne întoarcem înapoi. Noi nu vom putea să ajungem până la satul cel mai apropiat

până se va întuneca”, a spus unul dintre călători. 19. Rugaţi-l pe vecinul dumneavoastră să nu pornească acum radioul. Eu vreau să mă odihnesc puţin.

21. Make an essay on the topic: My First Excursion about a Foreign Country. Use the words given below.

a friend of mine, to travel, never, either, among the members, a group, sea, a tourist, different, to turn round, to be afraid, part, to meet, to tell sb. not to do sth., to enjoy, mountains, beautiful, to swim, to stay.

LESSON NINETEEN (THE NINETEENTH LESSON)

GLAD THEY DECIDED NOT OT CHOOSE IT

A young man who earned his living as a drummer in a band, married, and he and his wife were looking for somewhere to live. They saw a lot of places, but there was always something that one of them did not like about the places. They could not make up their mind. At last, they found a house which both of them really liked. But they could not decide what to take: a flat at ground-floor or one of the upstairs ones.

At last they decided to take the upstairs one – not too low down and especially not too high up – and moved in. After they had bought furniture, carpets and all other things they needed to set up the house, they wanted to give their big party to celebrate their setting like an anniversary.

It was a fine spring day. The sun was shining brightly, the trees were in blossom, the birds were singing. At five o’clock sharp the first guests came. Then their parents arrived with other former colleagues. The young couple introduced them to the other guests. It was a pleasant and a noisy party, as all the young man’s friends from the band came and played their instruments. The house was full of guests. There were no more than a hundred people there. They joked, danced and sang. After a time the telephone rang. The young man’s wife went into the hall to

answer it. Then she came back with a happy smile on her face and said to her husband, “That was the man who has just moved into the flat that is under our flat. I am so glad we decided not to choose it. He says it is terribly noisy down there.” The latter smiled too. Since then they gave many parties and each time they are glad they decided not to choose the flat under.

DIALOGUES

On New Year's EveMary. Hallo, Ann! Glad to meet you. I haven't seen уоu for ages. Where have you been all this time?Ann. I've just come back from London.Mary. Oh, I see. Where are you going to see the New Year in?Arm. I haven't thought of it yet. And what about you?Mary. I've invited a few friends to my place. You will join us, won't you?Ann. With great pleasure, thank you.Mary. Can you bring your elder brother with you?Ann. Sure, I can.

At TableMary. Help yourself to some more cake.Ann. No, thank you, I've had quite enough. I'd like another cup of tea.Mary. Shall I bring you a cup of tea too, Peter?Peter. No, thank you. I don't want any more tea. Let's have a dance!


a drummer – un toboşar pleasant - plăcuta band – o trupă no more – nu mai mult (cantitate)to make up one’s mind – a se hotărâ no longer – nu mai mult (timp)both of them – ambii a hundred – o sutăupstairs – la etaj, sus to joke – a glumiespecially – mai ales, special to dance – a dansato set up – a aranja under – suba party – o serată since – de atunci, de cândto celebrate - a celebra, a sărbători for ages – de o veşniciean anniversary – o aniversare for years – de ani de zilesharp – fix, precis to see the New Year in – a întâlni Anul Noua guest – un oaspete elder – mai mareformer – anterior, dinainte any more – nu… mai mult

GRAMMAR

DEGREES OF COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

1. One and two syllable adjectives form the degrees of comparison adding –er (for Comparative) and the –est (for Superlative)

Positive Comparative Superlativequietyoungtallfatthinnoisypretty

quieteryoungertallerfatterthinnernoisierprettier

the quietestthe youngestthe tallestthe fattestthe thinnestthe noisiestthe prettiest

Ex.: This boy is quieter than that one. My sister is the youngest from our family.

2. Adjectives that have more than two syllables form the degrees of comparison by using more (for Comparative) and the most (for Superlative)

Positive Comparative Superlativeexpensivewonderfulexcitingbeautifulcomfortable

more expensivemore wonderfulmore excitingmore beautifulmore comfortable

the most expensivethe most wonderfulthe most excitingthe most beautifulthe most comfortable

Ex.: My book is more expensive than his. This city is the most beautiful in the world.

3. Adjectives with two forms:

Positive Comparative Superlativefar farther, further the farthest, the furthest

Word Formation

-ness [nis] — this suffix forms nouns from adjectives:happy happiness greedy greediness green greenness

oldnearlate

older, eldernearerlater, latter

the oldest, the eldestthe nearest, the nextthe latest, the last

Ex.: Our office is farther than yours. You will receive further information tomorrow.

My elder sister is five years older than me.My eldest brother is 30.

What is the nearest station?Are you getting off at the next station?

What is the latest news?When does the last train start?

4. Exceptions:

Positive Comparative Superlativegoodbadmuch, manylittle

betterworsemoreless

the bestthe worstthe mostthe least

GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Write by five sentences with each example.

a) I haven't seen you since 1999.b) I haven't seen you since you left Bălţi. c) My friend left our country in 2002. We haven't met since. d) We haven't heard from Pete for many years.

2. Continue the following sentences.

1. My friend has not visited me since…2. Our neighbour has learned three foreign languages since…3. I have not been to the Carpathians since…4. I have known Gabriel since…5. Have you been to London since…


1. Have you ever met your old friends since you graduated from the university?2. How many times have you visited your native town since you left it?3. How many new films have you seen since the first of September?4. How many new English words have you learned since you began to study the language?5. How many months have passed since your holiday?6. Which of our students has been to London since the end of our studies?7. Has our town greatly changed since we got independence?

4. Translate

1. Nu l-am văzut pe prietenul meu de când am terminat universitatea. 2. Fratele meu nu a fost la teatru din toamnă. 3. Noi nu l-am întâlnit pe Tom de când ne-am odihnit împreună în vacanţă la mare. 4. Câte cărţi engleze aţi citit de când aţi început să studiaţi limba engleză? 5. Acest actor nu a luat parte la nici o reprezentare din primăvara trecută. 6. Fratele meu a învăţat să citească anul trecut, şi de atunci a citit multe cărţi pentru copii. 7. Eu nu am primit nici o scrisoare de la prietenii mei din 15 august. 8. Sora mea a frecventat zece lecţii de literatură de când a început să studieze acest obiect. 9. Acest scriitor nu a scris nimic nou din anul 1995. 10. Sunteţi foarte palid. Nu v-aţi odihnit de dimineaţă! 11. Eu nu l-am văzut pe Pete de trei ani. Acum el nu vine deloc aici. 12. Câte lucruri interesante ei au văzut de când au început să călătorească! 13. El nu a privit nici un film nou de luna trecută. 14. Eu nu le-am scris nimic de anul trecut. 15. Ce muzee aţi mai vizitat de când am fost împreună în muzeul cela?

5. Choose the right word.

1. My (older, elder) brother took part in many interesting activities when he was a student. 2. My sister's husband is five years (elder, older) than mine. 3. We have not read the (last, latest) novel by this writer yet. 4. Have you already heard the (last, latest) news? 5. I didn't hear the (last, latest) word. Repeat it, please. 6. I have two brothers: Paul and Peter. The (first, former) is an officer and the (last, latter) is an engineer. 7. I like the (first, former) novel by this writer best of all. 8. My parents live in the (next, nearest) village. 9. We shall discuss your mistakes at the (nearest, next) lesson. 10. Peter told his friend to bring him his notes, but the (last, latter) forgot all about it.


6. Read aloud.

guest, guard, guess, guide, guilt, guise, gull, gun, guy, gypsy, greet, grass, grade, glove, glory, gem, gap, gay; cent, cast, icy, civil, curb, tact, lack.


1. Which of our holidays do you like best of all?2. How many times a year do we usually go to the party?3. Which anniversary shall we celebrate this year?4. When do we celebrate International Women's Day?5. When does the sun usually shine brightly?6. In what season are the trees usually in blossom?7. What time is the canteen at the office usually full of people?8. What synonym to the word to decide do you know? Use it in a sentence of your own.9. What kind of books do you usually read with pleasure?10. In what year did you enter the university?11. What do we usually say when we introduce someone?12. Do you usually invite many guests to your birthday party?13. What do we usually wish people at their birthday party? (on New Year's Eve?)14. When do people usually laugh, joke, dance, and sing?15. Which of you can dance well?16. What can you say if you do not want any more ice-cream?

17. Have you any elder brother or sister?18. Are your brothers and sisters older or younger than you?


1. My sister entered the university two years ago (2). 2. There were many guests in Chişinău on the 27th of August (1). 3. When we entered the room, all the guests were already sitting at table (3). 4. I shall introduce you to my old friends (3). 5. My brother was at school during his childhood (4). 6. It is pleasant to walk in this forest (1). 7. I have never seen the New Year in with the Browns (2). 8. The teacher has already introduced all the new words of Lesson 20 (2).


____ New Year's Eve ____ eleven o'clock ____ the evening, when I was sitting ____ my dining-room and waiting ____ my wife who was busy ____ the kitchen, there came a knock ____ the door. I hurried ____ the door, opened it and saw a man forty. The man was smiling and saying nothing. "I am sorry," I said. "It seems ____ me we've never met before." The stranger pleasantly smiled and called me ____ my first name. "I've come to wish you a Happy New Year", he continued. ____ the way, where is your wife ? Will you introduce me ____ her?" I felt I was getting angry ____ him. Was he joking ____ me? ____ that moment my wife appeared ____ the kitchen. "Oh, Nick!" she cried ____ as soon as she saw our guest. "How nice of you ... We are so very glad". Then she turned ____ me and said, "What's the matter ____ you? Why don't you ask Nick to take ____ his coat and hat? Why don't you invite him ____ table? I am sure you will see the New Year ___ ____ us", she said ____ him. Only then did I recognize our guest. He was an old friend ____ ours, Nick White ____ name. ____ our childhood we lived in the same town, then he moved ____ some other town. I never met him later."Nick, dear", I said, "You have changed so greatly ____ the time we met last time that I can hardly believe it's you! I am very glad you have come!" Soon we were all sitting table. It was one ____ the most pleasant New Year parties ____ my life, though there were only three of us.


to say, to tell, to begin, to sit, to feel, to fall, to think, to know, to become, to forget, to lie, to get, to have, to fight, to die, to stop, to teach, to buy, to sell, to keep, to make, to rise.


126; 253; 677; 1,273; 7,621; 3,675,232; 135; 365; 738; 812.


(by the way, to dance, especially, to enter, to introduce, pleasant, angry, full, sharp, to joke, pleasure, any longer)

1. It is very ________ to be near the river ________ when it is hot. 2. Let's invite Pete to our party too. I am sure he will join us with great ________.3. Don't ________ the room. One of our students is taking his examination there. 4. Oh, I am sorry, I forgot ________ you to my old friend. ________, he will also work at our office this year. 5. When did you ________ the

university? 6. I can't understand you at all. Are you ________? You are speaking about serious matters and laughing. 7. What is the matter? The street is ________ of people. 8. If you don't come here at eleven o'clock ________, you will be late. We shall not be able to wait for you ________. 9. I am sorry I have left your book at home. Please, don't be ________ with me. I shall bring it tomorrow. 10. I am afraid I shall not be able ________, I haven't ________ since our last party at the university.

13. Make sentences using the words and expressions given below.

to joke at sb., in blossom, to be full of sth., to make up one's mind, sharp, elder, the former... and the latter, a tree, a thousand, for ages, to see the New Year in, with pleasure, to dance, to enter.

14. Write by five sentences with each example.

a) We cannot dance any longer.b) The Smiths no longer live in London.c) I cannot eat any more ice-cream. (I cannot eat ice-cream any more).d) There will be no more new films this year.

15. Translate paying attention to:

а) the use of it.1. Se întunecă. Degrabă va ploua. Grăbiţi-vă. 2. Priviţi prin fereastră. Ninge? – Da. Foarte puternic. 3. În acest anotimp aici des plouă? – Da, foarte des. 4. Va ploua. Să ne întoarcem acasă. 5. Când ninge mie îmi place să mă plimb pe străzile oraşului nostru. 6. Dacă va ploua noi vom rămâne acasă. 7. Ploua când v-aţi pornit la gară? 8. Când a plouat aici? 9. Când plouă este plăcut să stai într-o cameră caldă şi să citeşti o carte. 10. Îmi este greu să vă recunosc. Arătaţi foarte rău. Sunteţi bolnav? 11. Vă este straniu să auziţi aşa cuvinte? 12. Astăzi este foarte frig. Poate degrabă va ploua. Îmbrăcaţi-vă vestonul. 13. În camera dumneavoastră e cald? – O, da. La mine în cameră este chiar foarte cald. 14. Când de obicei aici se întunecă în decembrie? – În decembrie aici se întunecă foarte devreme. 15. Când va începe să plouă noi vom fi deja acasă dacă ne vom grăbi acum.

b) the use of more.1. Cine încă vrea să ia parte la excursie? 2. Ce lecţii aţi mai frecventat deja? 3. Când el a intrat în cameră, oaspeţii mai dansau încă. 4. Cine încă a mai intrat la universitate anul trecut? 5. La excursia noastră s-au mai alăturat încă cinci oameni. 6. Încă ce sărbătoare vă mai place? 7. Eu încă nu v-am prezentat toţi oaspeţii mei. 8. „Acum eu vă voi cânta încă un cântec”, a spus cântăreţul. 9. Eu l-am văzut fix la ora nouă. El încă mai lucra. 10. Fiul meu încă nu a intrat la universitate. El încă învaţă la şcoală. 11. Daţi-mi, vă rog, încă o farfurie de supă. 12. Mai daţi-mi nişte supă, vă rog. 13. Pe cine încă mai doriţi dă-l invitaţi la ziua dumneavoastră de naştere?

16. Choose the necessary verb and put it in the right tense form.

1. Who (to tell, to speak) you this story? 2. Whom you (to say, to talk) to when I entered the room and went up to you? 3. Why are you silent? Can't you (to say, to tell) anything? 4. My friend's daughter (to speak, to say) that she has read some interesting English novels lately. 5. You won't be able (to tell, to speak) English at all if you do not learn grammar rules. 6. I did not understand the last word, (to say, to tell) it again, please. 7. Our grandfather likes (to tell, to say) us funny stories. 8. Who else (to speak, to tell) at the celebration meeting yesterday? 9. My mother (to say, to speak) that her childhood was very hard. 10. Who (to say, to tell) you about

our excursion? 11. I haven't seen Nick today, I (to tell, to speak) to him tomorrow. 12. We haven't seen this film yet. When we see it, we (to say, to tell) you what kind of film it is. 13. Who (to say, to talk,) over there? Keep silent. I shall not repeat this sentence any more. 14. (to speak, to say) it in English! (Not to speak, to say) Romanian at your English lesson. 15. Don't you want (to tell, to speak) to me? Don't you want (to tell, to speak) me what has happened to you? Are we no longer friends?


1. Unde veţi fi la întâi aprilie? – Intenţionez să plec la Londra. Nu am fost niciodată acolo şi vreau să văd acest oraş, mai ales în zilele de sărbătoare. 2. Unde veţi întâlni Anul Nou? – Am de gând să întâlnesc Anul Nou la familia Smith. 3. Nu aţi fost la noi de anul trecut şi încă nu aţi văzut grădina noastră. Veniţi să o vedeţi. Acum ea e plină cu flori. Acolo este foarte plăcut să te plimbi. – Cu plăcere. Pot să-l iau cu mine pe fiul mai mare? – Desigur. Vom fi foarte bucuroşi. 4. camera dumneavoastră arată ca o bibliotecă. Ea este plină de diferite cărţi şi reviste. 5. Cine dintre studenţii noştri va merge la această prelegere? – Toţi în afară de Nick. El trebuie să rămână la bibliotecă. 6. Prelegerea într-adevăr se începe fix la ora unu? – Da. Nu întârziaţi. 7. Mă scuzaţi, eu încă nu v-am prezentat soţiei mele. 8. Când aţi intrat la universitate? – În anul 1998. – Dar când aţi absolvit-o? – În anul 2003. – Aţi mai întâlnit pe cineva dintre studenţii noştri de atunci? 9. Cineva dintre oaspeţii dumneavoastră cântă la pian? Să dansăm puţin. 10. Nu v-am văzut de o veşnicie, dar arătaţi la fel de tânăr ca şi zece ani în urmă. 11. Dacă vă veţi hotărî să mergeţi la cinema deseară, telefonaţi-ne, noi ne vom alătura dumneavoastră cu plăcere. 12. De ce nu mai dansaţi? – Nu mai pot dansa. 13. De ce nu aţi îmbrăcat vestonul? Azi este un timp aşa de rău! – Când ieşeam din casă nu ploua. Soarele strălucea şi era destul de cald. 14. Fratele meu mai mare încă nu a absolvit universitatea, dar el este în ultimul an, iar cel mai mic învaţă la şcoală. 15. Ce aniversare a independenţei o vom sărbători anul acesta? 16. Nu putem să-l mai aşteptăm pe Sam. Este deja prea târziu, şi ne va fi foarte greu să ajungem acasă. 17. Aceasta este cea mai frumoasă pasăre pe care am văzut-o vreodată.


Odată o englezoaică bogată, pe care o chema doamna Johnson, a hotărât să-şi sărbătorească ziua de naştere cât mai vesel. Ea a invitat mulţi oaspeţi şi pe un cântăreţ bun. Cântăreţul era sărac, dar avea o voce foarte bună. La ora şase fix cântăreţul a venit la casa doamnei Johnson. Când a intrat, sala era plină de oaspeţi, care stăteau la o mare masă în centrul sălii.

Oaspeţii mâncau, glumeau, râdeau şi vorbeau tare. Cântăreţul el i-a salutat şi era gata să li se alăture, dar doamna Johnson a spus următoarele:

„Suntem bucuroşi, domnule, că aţi venit. Veţi cânta după ce se va termina masa. Eu vă voi chema, când vom fi gata să vă ascultăm. Şi acum mergeţi la bucătărie şi luaţi masa.”

Cântăreţul s-a supărat foarte tare, dar nu a spus nimic şi a ieşit din sală. El a vrut să plece din casa doamnei Johnson, dar mai apoi a hotărât să rămână şi să le dea oaspeţilor ei bogaţi o lecţie bună. Când cântăreţul a apărut la bucătărie, servitorii luau masa. Cântăreţul a mâncat împreună cu ei trei feluri de mâncare, le-a mulţumit tuturor şi a spus: „Iar acum eu voi cânta pentru voi...” El a început să cânte şi a cântat multe cântece frumoase. În curând doamna Johnson l-a chemat pe cântăreţ în sală.

— Ei, domnule, noi suntem gata.— Sunteţi gata? — a întrebat cântăreţul. Şi ce sunteţi gata să faceţi?— Să vă ascultăm. — a spus doamna Johnson cu voce supărată.— Să mă ascultaţi? Dar eu deja am cântat. Nu voi mai putea cânta astăzi.— Unde aţi cântat? — a întrebat ea şi mai supărată.— La bucătărie. Eu întotdeauna cânt pentru cei cu care iau masa.

19. Write an essay on the topic: At My Friend's Birthday Party. Use the words given below

to invite, holiday, a party, to spend, a birthday party, to have a good time, to enjoy, dinner, sweets, to buy, flowers, guests, to introduce, to play the piano, to sing, loudly, to dance, to knock, to appear, to enter, forks, knives, spoons, a table-cloth, ice-cream, pleasant, especially.

LESSON TWENTY (THE TWENTIETH LESSON)

RED HAND LINE

We came to the port early in the morning."Do you want to see the port?" John White asked me. "Of coarse, I do," I answered. "Then

let's begin with the ships. Look at their emblems!"I examined the emblems with great interest. I saw different stars and letters, flags, and golden

keys...Suddenly I noticed a very strange emblem. We stopped in front of it to examine it better. It

was a picture of a cut-off hand. "It's the emblem of the British Company Red Hand Line," John said. "There is a legend that explains the origin of this terrible emblem. I can tell you this legend if you like".

"Certainly," I answered. "It must be very interesting!" "It happened very long ago," John began. "There lived an old ship-owner in England. Once

he fell ill. He called his two sons and said, I feel that I shall soon die. I am not rich. I can leave you only one ship, but it must belong to only one of you. If you own it together, you won't be able to live in peace. Listen to me! You will have to go to the seashore, jump into the water and

swim towards the ship. As soon as one of you touches its side with his hand, he will become its owner!

The two brothers went to the shore and jumped into the water. When the ship was already near, the elder brother got tired and could no longer swim quickly. The younger brother was already reaching the ship. His brother saw this and a wild idea came to his mind. With a quick movement of his right hand he drew out his knife, cut off his left hand and threw it in the direction of the ship! His hand fell on the deck and a few moments later the sailors, lifted him on board and greeted him.

While the sailors were dressing his wound, he looked terribly pale, his lips hardly moved, but one could see triumph in his eyes and make out the words: I've done it! I've done it! I am its owner!'

For a while all those on board the ship forgot about the younger brother who was still down in the sea. He was so tired that he could not swim any longer.

'Let me have a rest on board the ship!' he cried out.'No,' answered his brother. 'You cannot have a rest on board my ship! I am its owner and I

shall own it alone!''I don't want anything!' the younger brother continued. 'I am tired, help me, I shan't be able to

get back if I don't have a rest!''No,' repeated his brother. 'I don't want you on board my ship'.The younger brother had nothing to do but turn back. It became more and more difficult for

him to swim and soon his head disappeared under the water...The elder brother became rich. He bought many ships and made a picture of a cut-off hand

the emblem of his company."John thought a little and added, "This story isn't true of course, but it shows what greediness

does to people."


of coarse – desigur a hand – o mânăa flag – un drapel to get tired – a obosia key – o cheie wild – sălbatecto notice – a observa to draw out – a scoatecut-off – tăiat to throw – a aruncaa company – o companie to lift – a ridicaa legend – o legendă on board – la bordan origin – o origine a wound – o ranăterrible – teribil to dress one’s wound – a pansa ranato belong – a aparţine a lip – o buzăto jump – a sări for a while – pentru puţin timptoward(s) – spre to add – a adăugato touch – a atinge true – adevărata side – o parte


1. Read aloud.

draw, saw, law, paw, pawn, lawn, dawn.find, kind, old, fold, cold, bay, explain, faint, stall, late, fix, lest, 'suburbs, fuse, tube, cat, cub, bulk, wrong, sight, bloom, cape, slack, seat, rice, cot, noun, whale, fare, stern, wring, knock, mile, switch.


1. When can one see many tricolor flags on the houses of our town?2. When can't one get into one's own flat?3. What do you like better: to see off or to meet your friends?4. What kind of story do we call a legend?5. What legendary heroes of our country do you know?6. Why can't you read any English books in the original yet?7. Whom do universities in our country belong to?8. What synonym to the word combination in the direction of sth. do you know?9. What does one usually do if one is tired?10. What kind of animals do we call wild?11. What kind of things are difficult to lift?12. Why is it sometimes difficult to cut bread or other things with a knife?13. Have you ever travelled on board a ship (a plane)? When was it?14. Do you know how to dress a wound?15. What kind of friends do we call true?16. Why does one like people who always tell the truth?


(a line, to get tired, to lift, to throw, legendary, in triumph, to belong, to dress, a key, true, to be tired, a legend, in the original, to tell the truth.)

1. Uncle Sam is a _______ hero of the Civil War. 2. If one owns a thing (is the owner of a thing), we say this things _______ to him. 3. After an army defeats its enemy, it returns home _______. 4. I have lost the _______ to my flat and cannot get into it now. 5. Is it a _______ story or _______? 6. I am sure this man _______, I believe every word of his. 7. We shall be able to read books by English and American writers _______ when we know enough English words to understand these books well. 8. Your wound in the leg is rather bad. You must _______ it as soon as possible. 9. Don't _______ these boxes alone. They are too heavy. You will soon _______. 10. "Why are you________ stones at the birds? Don't you know that they are our friends?", a young man said to the boys. 11. I hope you'll write me a few _______. I'll be very glad to have a word from you. 12. I am sorry, I cannot go for a walk now. I _______ very _______ and must have a rest.

Word Formation

dis- [dis] — this prefix is used to form antonyms:to appear to disappear to continue to discontinue appearance disappearance

4. Choose the necessary word and put it in the right form.

1. I am terribly sorry I quite (to forget, to leave) this legend. I only remember that it is very beautiful. 2. Don't (to forget, to leave) your key behind. There won't be anybody at home to open the door for you when you return. 3. The old ship owner (to speak, to say) to his two sons and (to speak, to say) that the ship must belong to only one of them. 4. (To say, to tell) us this: Do you intend (to touch, to touch upon) many questions in your report? 5. We heard a shot and went (towards, in the direction of) the sound. 6. I am afraid you won't be able to find the book you are looking for (among, between) these books. 7. These books belong to my (older, elder) sister. 8. Your report was rather poor. You didn't speak about our work (quite, at all). You didn't touch upon other important questions (also, either). 9. George (to say, to tell) his young friend a legend that explained the (origin, original) of the Red Hand Line emblem. 10. Is it (true, truth) that Mary has fallen ill? 11. — There are very (few, little) stars in the sky now! 12. Did Professor Spenser (to say, to tell) anything new in his report yesterday? — Oh, yes, he touched upon (few, a few) very interesting questions. 13. I think we'll have to ask someone to give us a lift. We have very (few, little) time left before the train starts off. 14. To tell you the truth, I am (little, a little) tired. 15. Everybody has already gone on board (besides, except) Smith and Brown. 16. Is there another doctor on board the ship (besides, except) you?


to cut, to throw, to draw out, to do, to cry, to swim, to become, to touch, to teach, to buy, to begin, to see off, to stop, to know, to fall, to add, to get tired, to die, to lie.


1. Will you give me the key ____ this book-case? I want to read David Copperfield ____ Dickens ____ the original. 2. I shan't touch ____ this subject. Everybody already knows all ____ it. 3. Don't touch ____ this knife. It is very sharp. 4. Mary introduced me her family when we were ____ board ____ the car last summer. 5. Is there anything I can do ____ you? — Thank you, I feel better now. Leave me alone ____ a while. I'll try to sleep. 6. The children jumped ____ joy when they saw their mother. 7. I have nothing to add ____ what you have already said. 8. When you go ____ the university, put ____ your coat. The weather is rather bad today. 9. I am sorry, I cannot take ____ my coat. I feel rather bad today and I am not at all hot. 10. When will you start ____ the station? I want to see you ____. 11. I have never read this book, but I think I shall read it ____ great interest, because I like books ____ this subject. 12. ____ our house there is a small beautiful garden, where we often have a rest. 13. Whom did this building belong ____ before 1998? 14. What is the matter? Why hasn't our mother come back yet? Has anything happened ____ her? 15. Pete, will you be able to explain this rule ____ Michael? 16. Please, don't be angry ____ me; I am sorry, but I have left your book ____ home. 17. Wait ____ me here, please. I'll be back ____ a minute. 18. Where will you see the New Year ____?


Long, long ago there lived ____ rich king. His name was ____ Midas. He was ____ greedy man and liked ____ gold very much. One day he asked the gods of ____ Greece to give him more gold. ____ gods decided to punish him and said: "Very well; in ____ morning anything that you touch with your hand will become ____ gold". ____ Midas was very happy when he heard this. "I shall be ____ richest man in ____ world", he thought.

When he got up early ____ next morning and touched his bed, it became ____ gold. He began to dress, and his clothes became ____ gold too. Midas loved ____ flowers very much, and

he had ____ beautiful garden. Before ____ breakfast he went out into ____ garden to have ____ look at his flowers. ____ day was fine, ____ sun was shining brightly in ____ blue sky, ____ trees were in ____ blossom and ____ flowers looked beautiful. ____ king took one of ____ flowers, but it became ____ gold in his hand. He was sorry that ____ flowers changed as soon as he touched them. ____ king went to have ____ breakfast. He took ____ cup of ____ sweet milk, but ____ milk became ____ gold at once. Then he took ____ piece of ____ bread, and ____ bread also became ____ gold. Midas now felt unhappy. It was good to be ____ richest man in ____ world, but he was hungry, and he could not eat ____ gold.

Midas went out into ____ garden again. His little daughter was playing there. When she saw her father, she ran up to him. Midas kissed his daughter and ____ little girl became ____ gold statue.

Midas was very unhappy now. His eyes were full of ____ tears, but ____ tears also became ____ gold. He asked ____ gods to take away this "Golden Touch". "It was very foolish to love ____ gold so much," he said. "Take all my gold and give me back my daughter." "Go," said ____ gods, "and wash your hands in ____ river which is near your garden, and ____ water will take away ____ "Golden Touch".

Midas went to ____ river and washed his hands in it. Then he quickly ran up to ____ gold statue of his little daughter and kissed her again. She at once changed back into ____ beautiful little girl. Midas cried with ____ joy. He never forgot this lesson. He knew that ____ gold did not give ____ happiness.


to add, a legendary hero, in triumph, side by side, to throw, a flag, a key, to explain, to notice, to belong, to be (to get) tired, to jump, to see off, true, to have a rest, to cut off, in the original, on board the ship, in the company of ..., for a while.


1. voi fi bucuros, dacă îmi veţi scrie câteva rânduri, când voi fi în munţi. 2. Tom numai ce a ieşit din cameră. Aşteptaţi o clipă. Nu puneţi receptorul, îl voi chema. 3. De ce pe străzi sunt aşa de mulţi oameni? 4. Priveşte ce multe stele sunt pe cer! Noaptea va fi frig. 5. Nu ai văzut cheia de la camera mea? Mi se pare că am pierdut-o pe undeva. Acum nu voi putea intra în apartament până când sora mea nu va veni acasă. 6. Priveşte acest tablou. Oare nu observi în el nimic straniu? 7. „Voi putea tăia pâine dacă îmi veţi da un cuţit mare şi ascuţit”, a spus pasagerul vecinului său. 8. Ultima zi înainte de plecare eu am petrecut-o în compania prietenilor mei, care au venit să mă petreacă. 9. Oare nu ştiţi originea acestei legende interesante? Să v-o povestesc acum. 10. Aţi citit ceva cărţi engleze în original în ultimul timp? 11. Al cui copil sare acolo? Opriţi-l imediat, el poate să cadă şi să-şi rupă piciorul. 12. Ce gând sălbatic! 13. Când se va împlini visul meu şi eu voi deveni economist, eu voi lucra în oficiul meu. 14. Nu aţi atins deloc acest subiect în raportul dumneavoastră. 15. La drept vorbind, nu sunt deloc obosit. – Eu tot nu am obosit. Să mai traducem încă un articol. 16. Nu aşteptaţi plecarea vaporului, mergeţi acasă. Ştim că vă aşteaptă sora. – Eu mai am încă puţin timp. Voi pleca acasă îndată ce veţi urca pe vapor. 17. De ce nu doriţi să adăugaţi nimic la povestirea mea? – Nu am ce adăuga. Aţi spus deja totul. 18. Este adevărat că a trebuit să citiţi câteva cărţi engleze în original pentru a face raportul dumneavoastră? 19. La drept vorbind, acest articol nu este aşa de greu ca şi cel pe care l-am tradus la lecţia trecută. Nu ştiu de ce am făcut aşa de multe greşeli în traducerea mea. 20. Era foarte întuneric şi frig şi plou puternic când am ajuns în sat. 21. Eu cred că toate aceste întrebări trebuiesc atinse la adunarea noastră. 22. „Vino fix la ora şapte. Eu te voi aştepta acolo”, mi-a spus fratele mai mare. 23. Nu ştiu de ce am obosit aşa de tare astăzi. 24. Cu toate că aceasta este o carte veche, eu am citit-o cu mare plăcere.

10. Read, translate and retell the following text.

George, Harris and I were spending our holiday in a boat on the river. Once I woke up at six o'clock in the morning and decided to have a swim. But it was very cold, therefore I decided to wash only my hands and face. I touched the water with my hand, but it was very cold, and I decided not to wash at all. When I turned round to get into the boat, I suddenly fell into the river. "Look, George, Jerome is swimming," Harris cried. "I did not know that he was so brave," George answered. "Is the water warm?" Harris asked me. "Rather!" I answered, "Why don't you take a swim with me? Jump into the water!"

But George and Harris did not want to jump into the water at all. I was very cold when I got into the boat and began to dress. I took a shirt and hurried to put it on. But as I was in a hurry, the shirt fell into the water. George began to laugh, but I got angry. "What's so funny here?" I asked angrily. But he laughed still louder. I took a long stick and got the shirt out of the water. When I had the shirt back, I looked at it and saw that it did not belong to me. It was George's. Now I started to laugh too. I looked at George's shirt again, then at George who was still laughing and laughed so loudly that the shirt fell out of my hands into the water again. "Why are you throwing it into the water?" asked George who was still laughing. I couldn't explain it to him at once as I was also laughing, but a few minutes later I said at last, "It isn't my shirt. It is yours." George turned pale. "What?" he cried, "Is that really so? Why couldn't you dress on the bank?" and he added, "Give me the stick quickly. I'll get it out." It was all very funny, but this time George said in an angry voice, "There is nothing funny about it."

(After Three Men in a Boat by Jerome K. Jerome.)

11. Make an essay on one of the given topics.

1. How You Saw Your Friend Offto see off, to get tired, to have a rest, to be late, to hurry, to notice, to give sb. a lift, to come in time, to explain, in the company of ..., on board the ship, to go on board, to tell you the truth, to say good-bye.

2. My Trip to Englandafter the university, with interest, to explain, to belong, an owner, at 3 (4,5) o'clock sharp, to get on board a ship (a plane), to visit, to attend, to continue, to add, on board the ship, to make out, to go sightseeing, to be (to get) tired.

3. How I Met My Friendto happen, to examine, with interest, to touch, to recognize, to laugh with joy, to explain, haven't seen you for ages, for a while, to continue, to have a talk, to have a rest, to have a good time, to go sightseeing.

12. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given examples.

a) When did the teacher explain these rules to you?b) The teacher explained these rules to us last week (yesterday, two days ago, etc.).c) The teacher has explained these rules to us this week (this month, this year, etc.).d) The teacher has already explained these rules to us (just, never, not yet, etc.).e) How many new rules has the teacher explained to you since the first of September (since you

began to study, for the last two months, etc.)?f) The teacher was explaining a new rule when Pete asked him a question (at nine o'clock

yesterday).

ANNEX for Russian students

INTRODUCTORY COURSE

LESSON II

Vocabulary

a pen – ручка to find - находитьa tie – галстук to send - посылать, присылатьa name – имя to meet - встречатьmy - мой, моя, мое, мои to tell - сказать, расказатьa map – карта five - пятьa plan – план nine - девять

6. Translate (Переведите).

1. Это дом. Дом большой. 2. Мой друг - студент. Он учится в университете. 3. Этот карандаш чорный. 4. Этот портфель плохой. Дайте мне тот портфель, пожайлуста. 5. Дайте мне спичку, пожайлуста. 6. Это ручка. Это чорная ручка. Это ручка чорная. 7. Эта квартира чистая. 8. Дайте Тому эти карандаши. 9. Бен, возьми эту чорную ручку. 10. Моя сестра - преподаватель.

LESSON III

Vocabulary

economics – экономика to like - нравитьсяa student - студент(ка) large - большой(ая)a friend - друг, подруга clean - чистый(ая)a flat – квартира beautiful - красивый(ая)a town – город from - от, сto study - учиться, учить


1. Эта квартира большая. 2. Его зовут Пит? – Да. 3. Возьмите текст № 6. 4. Прочитайте этот текст. 5. Прочитайте шестую страницу. 6. Возьмите три книги. 7. Дайте Габриэлю эту чернильницу. 8. Это его карандаш? – Да. 9. Это ручка красная. 10. Этот город красивый. 11. Я первый в групе. 12. Какой номер у твоей квартиры? – № 10. 13. Где квартира Анны? 14. Возьмите второй текст и переведи его. 15. Он второй по чтению (at reading).

LESSON IV

Vocabulary

a friend - друг, подруга a cup - чашкаa doctor – врач a spoon - ложкаa student - удент(ка) to put - положить, поставитьa teacher – преподаватель to thank - благодаритьa room – комната now - сейчасa table - стол


a) 1. Вы преподаватель? – Нет. Я не преподаватель. Я студент. 2. Фред, дай этому мальчику твою книг, пожайлуста. 3. Этот галстук желтый или красный? – Он желтый. 4. Возьмите чашки с того стола. Положите, пожайлуста, чашки на этот стол. Спасибо. 5. Положите эту книгу в свой портфель. 6. Возьмите, пожайлуста, ложку у этого мальчика. 7. Пит - врач. Он мой друг. Он хороший врач. 8. Ваш друг преподаватель или врач?

b) Меня зовут Ник. Я студент. Фред мой друг. Он тоже студент. Он хороший студент. Его отмеки хорошие. Сейчас мы находимся в его квартире. Его квартира большая и чистая. – Фред, дай мне, пожайлуста, ручку и чернильницу.– Возьми ручку и чернильницу, пожайлуста.– Спосибо, Фред.– Ник, возьми мою книгу со стола, открой ее, найди третий текст и прочитай его.– Этот текст короткий или длинный?– Он длинный.

LESSON V

Vocabulary

English – английский at home - домаa class – урок small - маленкий(ая)a classroom - классная комната light - светлый(ая)a wall - стена clean - чистый(ая)a floor – пол new - новый(ая)a ceiling – потолок blue - синий(яя),голубой(ая)a door – дверь brown - коричневый(ая)a window – окно white - белый(ая)a chair – стул to take - брать, взятьa blackboard – доска to write - писатьa piece - кусок but - ноchalk – мел a newspaper - газетаa word – слово interesting - интересный(ая)a question – вопрос What kind of... ? - Какой, какая, какие?


Это наша классная комната. Какого цвета ее стены? – Они желтые. – Она большая или маленькая? – Она не большая, но светлая. 2. Какого цвета потолок? – Он белый. – Какого цвета пол? – Он коричневый. 3. Где ваш стол? – Он у окна. 4. Том, откройте книгу на восьмой странице. Не читайте текст. Прочитайте вопросы, пожайлуста. 5. Идите сюда, пожайлуста. 6. Возьмите кусок мела и напишите свой вопрос на доске. 7. Какого цвета ее тетрадь? – Она голубая. 8. Пришлите мне свою новую книгу, пожайлуста. 9. Дайте мне восемь новых карандашей. 10. Какого цвета стулья в вашей комнате? – Они коричневые. 11. Прочитайте новый текст дома.

BASIC COURSE

LESSON ONE (THE FIRST LESSON)


to study - учить, учиться often - частоforeign - инстранный(ая) seldom - редкоa language - язык always - всегдаto live - жить a textbook - учебник(the) centre - центр an exercise - упражнение

to work (at) - работать (в, на) an exercise-book - сборник упражненийan office - офис during - во времяalso - тоже, также a sentence - предложениеmany - много a dictation - диктантfew - мало to speak (to) - говоритьmorning – утро Romanian - румынский языкin the morning – утром French - французский языкin the evening – вечером after - послеevery evening - каждый вечер before - передusually - обычно when - когдаsometimes - иногда

* * *

6. Translate these sentences. Use the right tense form.

1. Откройте учебники, найдите восьмую страницу и прочитайте текст. 2. Куда вы ходите каждый день? 3. Что ваши студенты обычно читают? 4. Садитесь за стол, возьмите учебники, ручки и тетради и спишите текст номер пять. 5. Читают ли его друзья английские книги? — Да. 6. Не закрывайте книгу, читайте текст номер четыре. 7. Эти бизнессмены приходят сюда не каждый день. 8. Мои сестры не присылают мне книги и газеты. 9. Какие тексты вы обычно списываете дома? — Мы списываем новые тексты. 10. Какой это фильм? — Это хороший фильм. 11. Какие газеты читают студенты из вашей групы? 12. Эти ученики часто берут здесь книги? — Да. 13. Эти экономисты редко приходят сюда. 14. Куда вы обычно ходите вечером? 15. Часто ли вы встречаете этих экономистов?

* * *


1. В каком офисе работают эти экономисты? — Они тоже работают в нашем офисе. 2. Утром я вхожу в класс и сажусь за свой стол. 3. Во время урока мы читаем, пишем диктанты и упражнения и разговариваем по-английски. 4. Это упражнение очень (very) длинное. Напишите его дома. 5. На каком языке вы обычно разговариваете с вашими сестрами? — Мы обычно разговариваем по-румынски. Мы также разговариваем по-французски. Мои сестры изучают французский язык. 6. Я не говорю по-английски дома. Я говорю по-английски на уроках английского языка. 7. Не делайте первое упражнение сейчас. Сделайте его дома. 8. Вы читаете французские книги? — Нет, я не изучаю французский язык. 9. Ваши сестры живут в Кишинэу? — Нет, они не живут в Кишинэу. Они живут в Бэлць. Они там работают. 10. Что вы делаете после работы? — Мы иногда идем на урок. 11. Чьи это книги? — Это мои книги. — Это французские или английские книги? — Это английские книги. 12. Какие языки вы изучаете? 13. Много ли предложений вы обычно пишете на доске? — Мы обычно пишем пять или шесть предложений на доске. Иногда мы пишем семь или восемь предложений. 14. Я живу в Бэлць. Я учусь там. Бэлць — тихий (quiet) город. Он не очень большой. Я изучаю французский язык. Я хожу на уроки вечером. На уроках мы обычно пишем мало упражнений. Мы разговариваем по-французски со своим преподавателем. Иногда мы также разговариваем по-французски после уроков. 15. Где вы живете? — Я живу в Кишинэу в центре города. — Вы учитесь и работаете? — Да, яучусь и работаю. — Вы изучаете английский язык? — Да. — Где вы изучаете английский язык? — В своем офисе. — Когда вы ходите на уроки? — Вечером. — Что вы обычно делаете во время уроков? — Мы изучаем грамматику,

делаем упражнения, читаем и разговариваем. — Вы читаете много или мало английских книг? — Мы читаем мало английских книг. — Какие книги вы читаете? — Мы читаем свои учебники. — Вы разговариваете по-английски или по-румынски со своим преподавателем? — Обычно мы говорим по-английски, иногда по-румынски.

LESSON TWO (THE SECOND LESSON)


second - второй to get - получатьan economist -экономист time – времяtogether – вместе to be in time - вовремяalready – уже home - домаto know - знать a home-task - домашняя работаvery – очень a homework well - хорошо to prepare – приготовитьa magazine - журнал to prepare for – приготовить дляa letter - письмо to learn - учитьa firm - фирма to repeat - повторятьto translate - переводить a rule - правилоa telegram - телеграмма about - проGerman - немецкий язык how - как

* * *

5. Translate.

1. Где живет этот врач? 2. Эти рабочие не живут в Кишинэу. 3. Его сестра изучает английский и французский языки. 4. Где работает этот преподаватель? — Он работает в университете. 5. Ее сестры живут в Кишинэу или в Бэлць? — Они живут в Бэлць. 6. Его друг не работает, он учится. 7. Какие упражнения он обычно делает дома? 8. Их друзья не изучают английский язык. 9. Габриэль пишет много английских упражнений дома. Он изучает английский язык, но он не читает английских книг. 10. Эти экономисты часто приходят в ваш офис? — Нет. 11. Этот человек не говорит по-французски. 12. Какие книги читает этот экономист? 13. Вы делаете много упражнений дома? — Да. — Когда вы обычно занимаетесь? — Я обычно занимаюсь вечером. 14. Куда вы иногда посылаете письма и телеграммы? 15. Когда ваш друг обычно делает упражнения? 16. Его сестра не работают. Она учится.

11. Translate and pay attention to the bold words.

а) 1. Вы знаете свое домашнее задание? — Да, я хорошо знаю свое домашнее-задание. 2. Он часто пишет письма своим друзьям. 3. Мы часто разговариваем по-английски со своим преподавателем. 4. Они иногда разговаривают о новых книгах со своими друзьями. 5. Мой друг часто дает своим друзьям свои книги. 7. Расскажи мне о своей работе. 8. Напишите своим друзьям письмо. .

b) 1. Какой язык вы изучаете? 2. Мы выучиваем много новых слов. 3. Вы учите грамматические правила дома? 4. Я изучаю грамматику английского языка.

* * *

12. Translate.

1. Кто эта девушка? — Она моя сестра. — Кто ваша сестра (по профессии)? — Она экономист. 2. Kакой язык вы знаете очень хорошо? — Я очень хорошо знаю немецкий язык. 3. Когда ваш друг обычно готовит уроки? — Он обычно готовит уроки вечером. 4. Как ваш друг учится? — Он учится хорошо. 5. Ваша сестра изучает грамматику немецкого языка? 6. Он выучивает много новых английских слов из журналов. 7. Вы часто переводите тексты на уроках? — Нет. Мы обычно переводим тексты дома. 8. Я знаю этого человека. Он работает вместе со мной. 9. Не повторяйте упражнения второго урока сейчас. Сделайте это дома. 10. Габриэль знает уже много английских слов. Он уже читает английские журналы и газеты. 11. Каждый студент обычно читает на уроке по два-три предложения из каждого текста. 12. Не от правляйте эту телеграмму утром. Отправьте ее вечером. 13. Где работает этот экономист? — Он работает здесь, вместе со мной. 14. Анна хорошая студентка? Как она учится? — Она хорошо учится. 15. Где работает ваша сестра? — Она работает в этом офисе. — Часто ли она рассказывает вам о своей работе? — Да. 16. Этот студент обычно переводит много статей из иностранных журналов. 17. Когда вы обычно готовите уроки? — Я обычно готовлю уроки вечером. 18. Ваш друг получает хорошие или плохие отметки? — Он всегда получает хорошие отметки. Он учится очень хорошо. 19. Эти студенты приходят на уроки вовремя? 20. Повторите это предложение, пожалуйста. 21. Выучите это грамматическое правило дома. 22. Не разговаривайте с Анной по-немецки. Она очень плохо говорит на этом языке. 23. Вы не знаете этих слов. Повторите эти слова дома.

LESSON THREE (THE THIRD LESSON)


a working day - рабочий день to discuss - беседоватьMonday – понедельник to finish - закончитьTuesday – вторник to stay - оставатьсяWednesday – среда to return - - возвращатьсяThursday – четверг at five o’clock - в пять часовFriday – пятница in the afternoon - после полудняSaturday – суббота near (ant. far) - рядом (ант. далеко)Sunday – воскресенье hard - тяжелоarticle – статья other - другой, другая, другиеcolleague – колега only - толькоto walk - идти, гулять to last - продолжатьсяto answer - отвечать

* * *

6. Translate.

a) 1. Кто дает вам английские книги для чтения (читать)? – Мой преподаватель. 2. Кто из них работает в этом офисе? – Михай. 3. Кто из вас знает хорошо английский язык? – Габриэль. 4. Кто приходит в офис в восемь часов утра? – Мы. 5. Кто из вас обычно переводит статьи из иностранных газет? – Мистер Браун. 6. Кто пишет письма иностранным фирмам? – Я. 7. Чья сестра изучает французский язык? – Моя. 8. Чья эта книга? – Эта моя книга. 9. Чью книгу вы обычно берете на урок? 10. Кто изучает немецкий язык в нашем офисе? – Анна и Кейт. 11. Чей друг часто получает хорошие отметки? – Его друг.b) 1. Моя сестра очень много работает. 2. Они читают много английских книг. 3. Твой друг много работает? – Нет. 4. Преподаватель задает нам много вопросов. 5. Кто мало занимается в вашей групе? – Том. 6. Я читаю мало французских книг. 7. Ваши друзья занимаются много или мало? – Наши друзья много занимаются. 8. Мв очень много читаем и мало пишем на уроке. 9. Ваш сын много читает? – Да. Он много читает после уроков и по воскресным дням.

* * *12. Translate.

а) 1. Кого вы часто встречаете у себя в офисе? — Я часто встречаю там Михаила. 2 . Я живу недалеко от (близко от) своего офиса. Я обычно хожу туда пешком. 3. По каким дням вы работаете здесь? — Я работаю здесь по понедельникам, вторникам и четвергам. Я не прихожу сюда по средам и субботам. 4. Вы работаете по воскресеньям? — Нет. По воскресеньям я не работаю. 5. Сколько времени продолжается ваш рабочий день? Он продолжается восемь часов. Я обычно заканчиваю работу в шесть часов вечера. 6. Кто ваша сестра? — Моя сестра — врач. Она живет далеко от нас. Я часто получаю от нее письма. — О чем она пишет вам? — Она пишет о своей жизни. 7. Чей друг работает в фирме недалеко от Бэлць? — Наш друг. 8. Мы работаем в офисе восемь часов. Мы возвращаемся домой в шесть часов вечера. 9. Кто из них всегда переводит статьи из иностранных газет? — Габриэль. 10. Вы уходите в офис утром? — Да. — Кто остается с вашим сыном? — Моя сестра. Она не работает. — В котором часу вы обычно возвращаетесь домой? — Я обычно возвращаюсь домой в 7 часов вечера. 11. Вы часто остаетесь в офисе после работы? — Нет. Обычно я кончаю работать (работу) в 6 часов и ухожу домой. Я остаюсь там после шести часов только по четвергам. 12. Повторите ваш вопрос, пожалуйста. 13. Как занимается Том? — Он занимается очень хорошо. Он очень много (упорно) работает дома. 14. Не обсуждайте этот вопрос сейчас. 15. С кем вы обычно возвращаетесь домой? — Я возвращаюсь домой с друзьями. 16. В субботу и воскресенье я обычно не работаю. Утром я хожу в парк (park). Вечером я часто пишу электронные сообщения (e-mails) своим друзьям. Они живут в Лондоне. Это прекрасный большой город. Я очень редко (seldom) езжу туда. 17. Я иногда не работаю по будням, а учусь. 18. Я знаю только один иностранный язык.b) Сколько времени длится ваш рабочий день? — Он длится восемь часов. — Что вы делаете в офисе? — Я отвечаю на письма и электронные сообщения. Я читаю журналы, перевожу статьи из этих журналов и обсуждаю много вопросов с нашими колегами. — Когда вы обычно заканчиваете работу? — Я обычно заканчиваю работу в 5 ч. — Вы живете далеко от своего офиса? — Нет. Я живу близко от него и всегда хожу домой пешком. — Вы изучаете немецкий язык или вы уже знаете его хорошо? — Я изучаю немецкий язык. — Когда вы занимаетесь? — Мы занимаемся по понедельникам, средам и пятницам вечером, а по вторникам и четвергам утром. — Сколько времени длится ваш урок? — Два часа. Когда я прихожу домой, я обычно читаю журналы, готовлю уроки и пишу электронные сообщения. Я получаю много электронных сообщений и всегда

отвечаю на них. — Кто переводит статьи из иностранных журналов в вашем офисе? — Михаил. Он знает английский и французский языки. — Как он знает эти языки? – Он знает их хорошо. – Кто переводит письма с немецкого языка? – Я.

LESSON FOUR (THE FOURTH LESSON)


yesterday - вчераthe day before yesterday - позавчераlast night - прошлой ночьюlast month - в прошлом месяцеlast week - в прошлую неделюlast year - в прошлом годуlast time - (в) прошлый раз... days (years, months, etc.) ago - ... дня / дней (годов / лет, месяцев, и т.д.) тому назад

* * *

1. Translate into English and make the Past Indefinite Tense.

благодарить, открывать, смотреть, закрывать, жить, работать, понимать, изучать, переводить, летать, готовить, писать, учить, гулять (идти пешком), читать, возвращаться, оставаться, продолжаться, приходить, получать, взять, давать, идти, обсуждать, отвечать, повторять, видеть, переписывать.

* * *7. Translate. пятая страница, двенадцатое письмо, третья книга, двадцать третий урок, семнадцатая статья, пятнадцатое предложение, девятый урок, шестая дверь, сороковая газета, тринадцатый журнал.

* * *

11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses.

1. Когда вы вернулись в Кишинэу? — Я вернулся в Кишинэу в прошлом месяце. 2. Вы работали в этой фирме три года тому назад? — Да. — Сколько времени продолжался ваш рабочий день? — Мой рабочий день продолжался восемь часов. Мы кончали работу в пять часов вечера. 3. О чем это статья ? 4. Когда вы обсудили эти вопросы? — Мы обсудили их на прошлой неделе. 5. Когда вы ответили на электронное сообщение вашего друга? — Я ответил на него вчера. 6. Кто из вас перевел вчера эту статью? — Михаил. Он всегда переводит статьи из иностранных журналов. 7. Кто принимал колег из Германии две недели тому назад? — Анна. Она хорошо знает немецкий язык и всегда принимает немецких экономистов. 8. Кто из вас оставался вчера в офисе после шести часов? – Только мы с Ником. – Что вы там делали? – Мы занимались английским языком. Мы повторяли грамматические правила и новые слова. 9. Вы отвечали на вопросы позавчера на уроке? – Да. – Какую оценку вы получили? – Я получил хорошую оценку. Я отвечал хорошо, но не знал двух слов из третьего урока. 10. Габриэль хорошо пишет по-английски, но плохо говорит на этом языке. 11. Вы получаете английские журналы каждую неделю? – Да. –

Когда вы получили этот журнал? – Мы получили его на прошлой неделе. 12. Том – писатель (writer). Вчера мы обсудили его новую книгу. Она очень интересная. 13. С кем вы разговаривали вчера после работы? – Я разговаривал со своими друзьями о новом фильме. 14. Сколько времени продолжался этот фильм? – Он продолжался два часа.

* * *12. Translate the dialogues.

а) Вы жили в прошлом, году в Бэлць? — Нет. Я жил в Кишинэу.— Где вы работали? — Я работал в иностранной фирме.— Вы знаете много иностранных языков? — Нет. Я знаю только английский и французский. В прошлом году я изучал там немецкий язык, но я плохо знаю его.— Вы хорошо знаете английский язык? — Да. Я читаю, пишу и говорю по-английски. Я часто перевожу тексты с румынского языка на английский.— Ваша сестра тоже знает английский язык? — Нет. Она хорошо знает французский. Она читает много французских книг.b) Где вы работали четыре года тому назад? — Я работал в одном офисе.— По каким дням вы работали? — Мы работали в понедельник, вторник, среду, четверг и пятницу.— Вы работали в субботу или в воскресенье? — Иногда я работал по субботам а по воскресеньям я готовил свои домашние задания.— Что вы изучали? — Я изучал английский язык.— Вы брали уроки английского языка утром или после рабочего дня? — Я обычно занимался английским языком вечером.— Когда вы возвращались домой после уроков? — Я обычно возвращался домой в семь часов вечера, но иногда я оставался в офисе после урока, чтобы обсудить некоторые вопросы со своим преподавателем.— Вы хорошо говорили и читали по-английски? Какие отметки вы обычно получали? — Я часто получал хорошие отметки. Я очень много работал над английским язьжом дома.— Вы читаете много английских книг сейчас? — Да, сейчас я уже знаю этот язык хорошо и читаю много английских книг.— Где вы берете эти книги? — Я беру их у своих друзей. Я также читаю много статей из английских газет и журналов и иногда перевожу их на румынский язык.

LESSON FIVE (THE FIFTH LESSON)


to see - видеть a theatre - театрto go to see - навестить a cinema - кинотеатрto come to see - приходить в гости to like - нравитьсяa family - семья to want - хотетьto decide - решить weather - погодаto spend - проводить so - такой, такtill - пока today - сегодняto wake up - просыпаться to skate - кататься на конькахto get up - вставать to ski - ходить на лыжахlate – поздно to have a nice time - хорошо провести времяearly – рано to play – игратьto wash - мыть, умываться computer games - компютерные игрыto dress - одеваться interesting - интересный(ая)then - потом, затем to begin - начинать

to have breakfast - завтракать about nine - около девяти... dinner - обедать to be over - кончаться... supper - ужинать to be glad - радоватьсяto go to the country - ехать за город once – однажды

at once - немедленно, сразу

* * *2. Translate.

а) 1. Комната моего друга. 2. Комнаты моего друга. 3. Комната моих друзей. 4. Комнаты моих друзей. 5. Сын этого экономиста. 6. Экономисты нашего офиса. 7. Дочь этого преподавателя. 8. Диктант этого студента. 9. Письмо этих врачей. 10. Слова седьмого урока. 11. Дети этих преподавателей. 12. Друг Ника. 13. Письмо Габриэля. 14. Квартира моего другаb) 1. Имя сына моего друга. 2. Имя сестры Тома. 3. Книги друга моего сына. 4. Квартира сестры этого студента. 5. Имена детей этих врачей. 6. Тетради учеников преподавателя Смита. 7. Оценки сыновей этого экономиста.

* * *5. Translate paying attention to the use of possessive case.

1. Комната вашего друга большая? – Нет, она не большая. 2. Оценки этого студента обычно хорошие. 3. Вчера вы не ответили на вопрос Ника. 4. Когда вернулся домой сын вашей сестры вчера? – Вчера сын моей сестры вернулся домой поздно. 5. Жена вашего друга хорошо говорит по-английски? – Да, жена моего друга хорошо говорит по-английски. 6. Чьи эти тетради? – Это тетради этих студентов. 7. Это журналы? – Да. – Чьи это журналы? – Это журналы моего друга. 8. Когда вы прочитали электронное сообщение Габриэля? – Я прочитал его позавчера. 9. Вы знаете друзей вашего колеги? – Да, я их знаю. 10. Жена этого экономиста – врач или преподаватель? – Она врач.

* * *

12. Translate paying attention to the pronouns in object case.

1. Я взял его книги и прочитал их. 2. Я не видел его вчера. 3. На прошлой неделе их навестили их друзья. 4. Мы спросили его: „Как тебя зовут?" 5. С кем вы разговаривали после завтрака? — Мы говорили с его сыном. 6. Его сестры решили навестить его и на прошлой неделе поехали в Кишинэу. 7. Погода была прекрасная и я попросил его взять меня в парк. 8. Где вы его видели в прошлом месяце? Мы его видели в театре. 9. Его друзья спросили его о его работе и он ответил на их вопросы. 10. Возьмите эти журналы и прочитайте их дома.

* * *15. Translate.

1. Кто навестил вас вчера? — Друзья моего сына. Мы были очень рады видеть их. Они пробыли (оставались) с нами до вечера. 2. Где вы провели свой последний выходной день? — Мы провели его за городом. Мы вернулись в город поздно вечером. 3. Где вы были позавчера? — Я был в кино. — Вам понравился фильм? — Да, мне он очень понравился. — Когда вы вернулись домой? — Я вернулся домой поздно и тотчас же лег

спать. 4. Вчера на уроке мы читали новый текст. Затем преподаватель задавал нам вопросы, и мы отвечали на них. Преподаватель задал нам три упражнения на дом. 5. В котором часу вы сегодня обедали? — Я обедал в три часа дня. 6. Вы любите играть на компютере? — Да. Но я не очень часто в этом году (this year). Я часто играл в прошлом году. 7. В воскресенье ко мне обычно приходят мои товарищи. Мы обсуждаем много вопросов и ходим в парк. 8. Обычно я провожу свой выходной день с семьей. Прошлое воскресенье мы решили провести за городом. Мы поехали туда утром. Погода была прекрасная. Мы вернулись в город поздно вечером. 9. Вечером я обычно занимаюсь, но иногда я хожу в кино или в театр. 10. Моя сестра любит задавать мне много вопросов, и я всегда отвечаю на них. 11. Вашей сестре нравится английский язык? — Да, очень. Она много занимается и знает английский язык хорошо. 12. Кто в вашей семье хорошо знает французкий язык? — Сын моей сестры. 13. Где вы были вчера? Я приходил к вам, но вас не было дома. — Я ходил в кино. Мне очень понравился фильм. 14. Мой друг спал до десяти часов утра в прошлое воскресенье. Когда он проснулся, он решил не ездить за город. Он встал, оделся, умылся, позавтракал и пошел в парк. Он гулял там до обеда. В три часа он пообедал. После обеда он пришел навестить меня. Мы поиграли на компютере, потом поговорили немного (a little). Мы хотели пойти в кино, но потом решили остаться дома. В девять часов мой друг пошел домой. В десять часов он поужинал, почитал немного и лег спать. 15. Когда вы начали работать вчера? — Я начал работать в десять часов, после урока английского языка. 16. Моя сестра живет возле меня. Ее зовут Анна. Она тоже студентка. Мы ходим в университет вместе. После уроков мы обычно приходим домой или идем в парк.

LESSON SIX (THE SIXTH LESSON)


large – большой(ая) a son - сынa wife - жена to be born - родитьсяchildren – дети kindergarten - детский садyoung – молодой(ая) soon - скороold - старый, пожилой to graduate (from) - окончитьa woman - женщина parents - родитель(и)an university - университет a husband - мужa daughter - дочь a brother - братa girl of ten - десятилетняя девочка summer - летоprimary school - начальная школа in (the) summer - летомto work at school - работать в школе winter - зимаto go to school - ходить в школу spring - веснаa subject - предмет autumn - осеньto make - делать a grandmother - бабушка

a mistake - ошибка a grandfather - дедушкаas a rule - как правило... a grandchild - внукbad – плохой(ая) again - вновь, опятьa pupil - ученик / ученица in a week - через неделюto help - помогать tomorrow - завтраa mother - мать the day after tomorrow - полезавтраa father - отец

* * *5. Translate paying attention to the use of Future Indefinite Tense.

1. Через неделю я поеду в Кишинэу. 2. Сын моей сестры напишет письма его друзьям завтра. 3. Его новая работа будет очень интересной. 4. Моя бабушка скоро не будет работать. В будущем году ей будет 60 лет. 5. Завтра мой друг не пойдет в кино. Он пойдет на урок английского языка вечером. 6. Когда вы будете дома? — Я буду дома после сьми часов вечера. 7. Скоро студенты будут хорошо говорить по-английски. 8. Что вы будете делать сегодня вечером? — Мы навестим наших друзей. 9. Приходите к нам завтра вечером. Мы будем дома после восьми часов вечера. 10. В котором часу вы встанете завтра? — Я встану в шесть часов утра. 11. Когда вы начнете переводить эти статьи? — Я начну переводить их через час. 12. С кем вы будете повторять новые слова? — Я буду повторять их вместе с моими друзьями. 13. Мы выучим много новых слов на будущей неделе. 14. Через три года мой друг не будет жить в Лондоне. Он будет экономистом и будет работать далеко от Лондона. 15. Центральный парк находится далеко от моего дома. Я пойду туда сегодня пешком. 16. Когда вы обсудите эти вопросы? — Мы их обсудим через три дня. 17. Эти студенты будут изучать немецкий язык, а те студенты будут изучать французский язык. 18. Скоро мы прочтем новый текст на английском языке. 19. Вы сегодня останетесь в офисе после работы? — Да. 20. Когда вы уедете за город? – Мы поедем за город в следующем месяце.

* * *

13. Translate. Pay attention to the meaning of the given words.

a) to make, to do.1. Мой друг сделал вчера интересный доклад. Он нам очень понравился. 2. Этот студент опять сделал мало ошибок в своей работе и получил плохую оценку. 3. Кто сделал эту работу в прошлом году? Она очень хорошая. 4. Какие упражнения вы обычно делаете дома? 5. Кто будет делать доклад по этой теме (on this subject)? — Питер.

b) to tell, to speak.1. Моя сестра хорошо говорит по-английски. 2. Наш преподаватель часто говорит нам о наших ошибках. 3. Мы часто говорим о нашей работе. 4. Поговори с ней об этом вечером. 5. Расскажите ей об этом. 6. Послезавтра мой друг Джон придет ко мне, и мы поговорим о новом фильме.

c) many, much, few, little1. Сколько статей вы перевели вчера? 2. Сколько времени вы потратите на эту работу? 3. Мы сделали мало упражнений на последнем уроке. 4. Когда у вас много работы? 5. У него мало или много хорошей бумаги? 6. Его дети прочтут много интересных книг в

следующем месяце. 7. Кто задавал вам много вопросов? 8. Сколько месяцев твой друг жил у вас (оставался с вами)? — Он жил у нас три месяца. 9. Сколько времени его сестра учит английский язык?

* * *16. Translate.

1. Сын моей сестры — ученик. Он хорошо учится. У него нет плохих отметок. Дома он часто помогает своей матери. 2. У меня нет сестер, но у меня есть два брата. 3. Пит окончил университет четыре года тому назад. Он экономист. Теперь он живет в Лондоне. У него большая квартира. 4. Эта женщина — преподаватель. Она работает в школе. У нее много учеников. Каждое утро она отводит своего маленького сына в детский сад. Вечером после работы она берет его домой. 5. Не приезжайте ко мне в воскресенье. Меня не будет дома. Я уеду за город к своим родителям. 6. У вас есть сестра? — Да. Пять лет тому назад она окончила университет. Она работает сейчас в одном офисе в Кишинэу. 7. Сколько детей у вашего друга? — У него двое детей: сын и дочь. 8. Господин Смит старый инженер. У него нет внуков, но у него есть две внучки. Первая внучка родилась семь дет тому назад. 9. В прошлом году я не занимался английским языком. У меня не было английского учебника. Сейчас у меня много английских книг. Я, как правило, читаю вечером. Моя сестра тоже знает этот язык, и иногда мы разговариваем по-английски. В будущем году мы будем изучать французский язык. 10. Пять лет назад я не жил в Бэлць, я жил в Кишинэу. У меня была там хорошая квартира. В выходные дни меня часто навещали мои друзья. Летом и зимой мы часто ездили с ними за город. 11. У моей сестры есть две дочери. Дочери моей сестры хорошо учатся и всегда помогают своей матери дома. 12. У моих родителей есть дом за городом. Дом моих родителей очень большой. У них три комнаты, они чистые и светлые. Я часто навещаю их осенью. 13. На будущей неделе у меня будет много работы. 14. Дочь моего брата скоро будет студенткой. Она будет изучать немецкий язык. У нее много немецких книг. 15. В следующую субботу у моего друга будет мало работы, и он пойдет в кино вместе с нами. 16. Как зовут вашего друга? — Его зовут Габриэль. — Сколько ему лет? — Ему двадцать три года. 17. Где и когда вы родились? — Я родился в 1986 году в Орхей. 18. У меня было много работы на той неделе. 19. В какие дни у вас, как правило, были уроки английского языка в прошлом году? 20. Сколько времени вы, как правило, тратите на свою домашнюю работу? — Я обычно трачу на нее два часа. 21. Сколько английских книг вы прочитали в прошлом месяце? — Я прочитал три английских книги. 22. У моего колеги было мало времени, чтобы подготовить доклад, но он сделал его вовремя (in time). 23. Не помогайте своему сыну готовить домашние задания.

* * *17. Translate the following text and retell it.

Я живу с родителями в Кишинэу. Мои родители не старые. Отцу 40 лет, матери — 35. Мой отец инженер. Он работает на большом заводе (factory). Он очень любит свою работу и работает много. Моя мать преподаватель. Она работает в школе. Дети очень любят ее. Они хорошо учатся. Они всегда готовят уроки и хорошо отвечают на вопросы своего преподавателя. У нас есть дом за городом. Летом мы часто ездим туда. Я люблю там отдыхать. Я помогаю родителям работать в саду (a garden). Скоро я опять туда поеду.

LESSON SEVEN (THE SEVENTH LESSON)


a manager - руководитель a bookcase - книжный шкафa company - компания adjustable - приспосабливающийсяto move - передвигаться, перейти a shelf - полкаcomfortable - удобный(ая) (the) middle - серединаa building - дом, здание in the middle - в серединеthe third floor - третий этаж round - круглый(ая)a picture - картина, фотография important - важный(ая)too – слишком a meeting - встреча, совещаниеenough - достаточно tablecloth - скатертьworkspace - рабочее место a vase - вазаa window - окно a flower - цветокopposite - напротив an armchair - креслоa balcony - балкон a chair - стулa view - зрелище a sofa - диванa street - улица a study - кабинет (рабочий)the main street - главная улица a thing - вещь, предметgreenish – зеленоватый a kitchen - кухняa poster - постер, афиша a bedroom - спальняfurniture – мебель a bathroom - ваннаяa desk - рабочий стол a dining room - гостинаяa fax - факс a writing table - письменный столa telephone - телефон a radio set - радиоприемникa desk lamp - настольная лампа a television set - телевизорright - правый paperwork - работа с бумагамиto the right - паправо to prepare - приготовитьleft - левый different - разный(ая)to the left - налево a project - проектa corner - угол

* * *

4. Translate using There is or There are.

а) 1. В нашем городе много школ. 2. В нашей группе (a group) было десять студентов, теперь в ней будет шесть студентов. 3. На этом столе много журналов и газет? — Нет, не много. 4. В нашей классной комнате нет доски. 5. В этой комнате три окна. 6. Какие книги лежат на этой полке? — Там много английских книг. 7. В вашей группе было много студентов в прошлом году? — Нет. Сколько студентов было в вашей группе? — В ней было десять студентов. 8. Какие компании имеются в вашем городе? — В нашем городе есть много иностранных компаний. 9. В Кишинэу много университетов? — Да, там много университетов 10. В нашем офисе мало мебели. 11. На этом столе нет английских журналов.

b) 1. У меня есть интересная книга.На столе есть интересная книга.У меня в портфеле есть интересная книга.

2. У него в последнем диктанте нет ошибок.В этой работе нет ошибок.

У него нет ошибок.

3. В этой газете много интересных статей.У неe много интересных статей.У нее в журнале много интересных статей.

4. У них на столе мало английских журналов.У них мало английских журналов.На столе мало английских журналов.

5. У нас не было бумаги вчера.На письменном столе не было бумаги вчера.У нас на письменном столе не было бумаги вчера.

c) 1. Около моего дома есть новая школа. 2. Новая школа около моего дома. 3. В центре города театр. 4. Театр находится в центре города. 5. Ошибка в пятом предложении. 6. В пятом предложении есть ошибка. 7. Учебник на столе. 8. На столе лежат книги. 9. В этом журнале мало интересных статей. 10. Интересная статья на десятой странице. 11. В этой английской статье нет новых слов. 12. Новые слова на доске.

* * *16. Translate

1. Где белая скатерть? — Она на круглом столе в середине комнаты. 2. Какая скатерть на круглом столе? — На на круглом столе белая скатерть. 3. В углу моей комнаты стоит диван. 4. В этой газете мало интересного. 5. Что будет стоять в левом углу той комнаты? — Там будет стоять письменный стол. 6. Ваш телефон на письменном столе или на телевизоре? — Он на письменном столе. — Ваш радиоприемник тоже там? — Да. — А где стоит телевизор? — Он стоит в гостиной. 7. Вчера я получил письмо от своего брата. Там было много интересного. В нем были две фотографии его дочери. Она уже большая. Ей уже три года. 8. В этой комнате много вещей. В ней восемь стульев и пять кресел, стол и диван. Что еще есть в этой комнате? — В ней есть книжный шкаф. — Какого цвета книжный шкаф? — Он коричневый. 9. В квартире моего брата очень удобная кухня, но там нет балкона. 10. Где находится ваш компютер? — Он в моем кабинете. 11. На этой фотографии много студентов из нашей группы. Кого из них вы знаете? 12. В этом журнале мало интересного. Не читайте его. 13. Что на стене вашего офиса? — Там карта (map) нашего города. — Что еще будет на той стене? — На ней будут три постера. 14. В нашем учебнике есть картинки, но в нем нет карт. 15. У моего брата очень удобный офис. Он перешел туда три месяца тому назад. 16. Посмотрите на эти фотографии нашего города. Он вам нравится? — Да, ваш город очень красивый. Я был там несколько лет тому назад. 17. На прошлой неделе мой приятель купил себе новую квартиру. Вчера мы ходили к нему. Квартира удобная. Она нам очень понравилась. В ней две комнаты, ванная и кухня. 18. Откройте книги на 100-й странице и посмотрите на картинку. Что вы видите на ней? — Там новое здание. 19. Вправо от нашего университета находится красивый парк. В нем много цветов. 20. Вы часто открываете окна в своей комнате? — Да. Они всегда открыты утром. — А вечером они тоже открыты? — Нет, вечером они обычно закрыты. 21. У меня много работы с бумагами и я хочу закончить ее сегодня. 22. У вас есть настольная лампа в офисе? – Да. 23. У вас будет много работы завтра? – Да. Завтра я приготовлю проект и переведу разные статьи. 24. В офисе твоего отца много мебели? – Нет, там есть письменный стол и книжный шкаф с приспосабливающимися полками. 25. На этой полке много английских книг и журналов. 26. Квартира моей сестры не слишком большая. Но у нее есть большой балкон с прекрасным зрелищем на главную улицу. 27. Стены нашего

класса зеленоватые. На них много постеров. 28. Напротив школы моего брата находится новое здание где много офисов.

LESSON EIGHT (THE EIGHTH LESSON)


a library - библиотека wrong - неправильноa librarian - библиотекарь all right - хорошо!people - люди, народ all - всеto attend - посещать to show - показыватьso - поэтому (итак) a TV show - телевизионная передачаliterature – литература to bring - принестиhistory – история to go away - уходитьgeography – география to be sorry (of) - жалеть (о/об)a book by... - книга ... to advise - советоватьchildhood – детство to leave - оставлять, покидатьdifficult - трудный(ая) any - какой-нибудьeasy - легкий(ая) some - несколькоwith interest - с интересом one of - один / одна изright - правильно, правда some (any) of - некоторые из

* * *4. Translate using:

a) some or any.1. Через три года мой друг будет знать несколько иностранных языков. 2. Вы читаете какие-либо английские книги? — Да. 3. Я не вижу никаких ошибок в этом диктанте. 4. В этой комнате есть какие-либо постеры? — Да. Там есть несколько красивых постеров. 5. Вчера я перевел несколько текстов с румынского языка на английский. 6. Вчера сюда приходило несколько студентов. 7. Вы получали какие-нибудь письма в прошлом месяце? — Да, я получил в прошлом месяце несколько писем от своих друзей. 8. Некоторые студенты приходят в нашей библиотеке почитать. 9. Ваш отец говорит на каком-либо иностранном языке? — Нет. 10. Он не знает ни одного (никакого) иностранного языка. 11. В моем диктанте есть какие-нибудь ошибки? — Да, там есть несколько ошибок. 12. Мой брат знает некоторых экономистов из вашего офиса. 13. В прошлом месяце я не прочитал ни одной интересной книги.

b) one of or some of.1. Некоторые из наших колег изучают немецкий язык. Я изучаю английский. 2 . Я прочитал интересную статью в одной из этих газет на прошлой неделе. 3. В двух из этих упражнений нет новых слов. 4. В одном из своих писем мой друг писал о своей дочери. Ей три года. Она ходит в детский сад. 5. Некоторые из этих книг не интересные. 6. Моя мать — преподаватель. Она работает в одной из школ города. 7. Я знаю многих из этих маль-чиков. Их родители работают в нашем офисе. 8. Я хочу посмотреть некоторые из ваших книг. 9. Вчера я разговаривал о вас с одним из наших колег. 10. Наша семья очень большая. Трое из нас работают, а четверо (из нас) учатся. 11. В нашей конторе пять инженеров. Двое из них хорошо знают английский язык.

c) nouns denoting sciences or subjects.

1. Литература очень интересный предмет. Я ее очень любил в школе. 2. Вы посещаете лекции по (a lecture on) истории? — Да. 3.Мой друг изучает в историю историю, менеджмент и географию. 4. Наш преподаватель хорошо знает английскую литературу. 5. Что преподает ваш друг? — Он преподает экономику в нашем университете. 6. Какую оценку вы получили по английскому? — Я получил хорошую оценку. 7. Вчера я посетил очень интересную лекцию по немецкой цивилизации.

* * *15. Translate.

1. В нашем офисе многие (люди) знают английский язык. 2. Сколько человек работает в вашем офисе? 3. Я хочу хорошо знать английский язык, поэтому я всегда посещаю уроки и готовлю домашние задания. 4. У меня много интересных книг дома, поэтому я редко хожу в библиотеку. 5. Моя подруга — библиотекарь. На прошлой неделе она посоветовала мне прочитать новую книгу одного молодого писателя. Эта книга мне очень понравилась. 6. Сколько уроков в неделю по географии и истории у вас в школе? 7. Моя сестра любит литературу. У нее много книг иностранных писателей. 8. Где вы провели свое детство? — Я провел свое детство недалеко от Кишинэу. 9. Вы читали какие-либо английские книги в прошлом месяце? — Нет. — Я советую вам прочитать эту книгу. Она очень легкая и интересная. 10. Когда ваш брат уедет из города? — Она уедет на будущей неделе. 11. Жаль, вас не было у меня вчера. Вчера приходил ко мне приятель из Бухареста и принес много интересных английских журналов. Я хотел показать их вам. 12. Кто-нибудь из экономистов вашего офиса уехал в Лондон в прошлом месяце? — Да, несколько наших экономистов уехали туда. Они вернутся через месяц. 13. Все эти книги очень интересные. Я хочу взять одну из них. 14. У вас есть какие-либо книги по истории Англии? — Да. 15. В прошлом году я не читал (никаких) книг этого писателя. Они были слишком трудны для меня. 16. Не забывайте тетради дома. Всегда приносите их на урок. 17. Вы изучали какой-либо иностранный язык в детстве? — Да. Я изучал немецкий язык. 18. Врачи не советуют маленким детям долго смотреть телевизор. 19. У вас есть какие-нибудь интересные журналы? Принесите мне, пожалуйста, почитать какой-нибудь журнал. — Хорошо, я принесу вам один из моих журналов. 20. На полке есть какие-либо книги? — Нет. Там только газеты. 21. Люди из этого дома получили новые квартиры.

* * *16. Translate and retell the following text.

В нашем городе много библиотек. Люди любят читать интересные книги. Дети с разных школ приходят в библиотеках города, чтобы взять книги. Здесь много книг иностранных писателей. Здесь также находится библиотека нашего университета. В этой библиотеке много читальных залов (a reading hall). Наши студенты ходят часто в библиотеку, чтобы читать или сделать домашние задания. На третьем этаже находится зал иностранной литературы. Он не большой но в ней много интересных книг. Здесь имеются книги на английском, французском, немецком, испанском языках. Студенты читают книги самых известных (the most known) английских и американских писателей: Дикенса, Уайлда, Твена, Лондона. Студенты хотят хорошо знать иностранные языки, поэтому они много читают. Они изучают много новых слов. На полках нашей библиотеки имеются также разные журналы и газеты. В них много интересных статей.

LESSON NINE (THE NINTH LESSON)


a talk - разговор can - мочьhallo - здраствуй must - долженwhy - почему may - можноbecause, as - потому что certainly - конечноa lecture - лекция a place - местоto feel - чувствовать to come to his place – приходить ко мнеa to feel bad - чувствовать себя плохо at my place - у меня (него...) домаto feel well - чувствовать себя хорошо to get to a place - добраться до местаeven - даже a trolley bus - тролейбусhigh - высокий(ая) to go by trolley bus - ехать тролейбусомa high temperature - высокая температураa trolley bus stop - тролейбусная ост.low - низкий(ая) a bus - автобусtall - высокий(ая) - рост a station - остановкаnote - заметки to hurry - спешитьto make notes - делать заметки to forget - забыватьthat – что to remember - вспомнитьif – если to ring up - звонитьill - больной(ая) good-bye - до свидания!sick - больной(ая) so long - всего хорошего!

* * *4. Translate paying attention to the use of modal verbs.

а) 1. Мой друг умеет хорошо говорить по-английски. Он окончил университет три года тому назад. 2. Я не могу дать вам эту книгу. Я должен приготовить уроки. 3. Можно убрать эти цветы со стола? – Да, конечно. 4. Я знаю немецкий язык плохо, но я могу переводить легкие тексты. 5. Я не смог прочитать эту книгу. Она слишком трудна для меня. 6. Вы умеете играть на рояле? 7. Кто должен прийти на наш урок? – Господин директор. 8. Какую книгу вы можете посоветовать для чтения (reading)? 9. Простите, я не могу отдать вам отдать ваш журнал сейчас. Я забыл его вчера в офисе. 10. Вы можете перевести это предложение? Оно очень легкое. 11. В детстве мой брат хорошо умел гоаорить по-английски. Теперь он не умеет говорить ни на одном иностранном языке. Он должен снова начать изучать английский язык. 12. Кто может ответить на мой вопрос? – Михаил. Он много читает и знает много вещей.b) 1. Можно войти? (Разрешение войти) 2. Можете ли вы прийти к нам вечером? 3. Могу ли я курить здесь? 4. Я не умею кататься на коньках, но я хорошо умею кататься на лыжах. 5. Можно мне открыть окно? 6. Я не могу открыть это окно. Помогите мне, пожайлуста. 7. Можно мне поговорить с вами сейчас? 8. Мой брат умеет говорить на трех иностранных языках.

* * *6. Translate using if, that, as, because.

1. Почему вы не знаете этих слов? – Я не знаю этих слов потому, что у меня вчера не было времени выучить их. 2. Почему вы не были на уроке менеджмента? – Я не был на уроке, так как был болен. 3. Почему ваша дочь не играет на рояле? – Она не играет на рояле потому, что не умеет. 4. Как видете, я пришел во время на урок. 5. Вчера я навестил своего друга, так как и хотел. 6. Если вы не знаете этих слов, я могу вам помочь перевести их. 7. Я могу дать вам свои конспекты, если вы можете скоро мне их вернуть. 8. Я возьму в

библиотеке эту книгу Диккенса, если она не очень трудная. 9. Если хочешь навестить Ника, приходи ко мне в субботу. 10. Не берите эту книгу, если она слишком трудная для вас. 11. Я знаю, что мой брат получил плохую оценку по истории. 12. Знаете ли вы, что Джон знает несколько иностранных языков? 13. Я вижу, что в вашем диктанте нет ошибок. 14. Мои друзья знают что я скоро уеду в Париж. 15. Нам жаль, что наших родителей нет сейчас с нами.

* * *15. Translate using it takes.

1. Пит живет за городом. Ему требуется два часа, чтобы доехать до офиса. 2. Сколько времени вам потребуется, чтобы приготовить ваш доклад? — Мне потребуется на это две недели. 3. Сколько времени ушло у него на то, чтобы ответить на эти письма? — У него ушел на это час. 4. Сколько у вас ушло вчера времени на то, чтобы выучить новые слова? — У меня ушло на это два часа. 5. Сколько времени им потребуется, чтобы закончить свою работу? — Им потребуется десять дней.

* * *17. Translate paying attention to the meaning of the following words.

а) good, well, bad, badly.1. Хорошо ли вы знаете все новые слова последнего урока? 2. Мой товарищ хорошо знает два иностранных языка. 3. У вас хорошие дети. Они всегда хорошо отвечают на вопросы преподавателя, потому что всегда хорошо готовят уроки. 4. Я не могу хорошо перевести этот текст, так как я не знаю этих слов. 5. Его отец плохо себя чувствует сегодня. 6. Вчера вы плохо читали этот урок. 7. Вчера была очень плохая погода. 8. Вчера моя подруга чувствовала себя хорошо, а сегодня опять плохо. 9. Я не могу прийти к вам, так как мой отец плохо себя чувствует.

b) very, very much.1. Вы очень хорошо играете на рояле. 2. Этот фильм очень хороший. Мне он очень понравился. 3. Я очень хочу повидать нашего друга. 4. Сегодня очень хороший день. 5. Пит очень плохо чувствует себя. Он не может разговаривать с вами.

c) can, may.1. Можно мне взять ваш конспект по истории? 2. Вы можете перевести эти письма с румынского на английский. Они не очень трудные. 3. Он может посещать лекции по английской литературе в следующем месяце? — Нет, у него будет много работы по вечерам. 4. Вашему сыну можно поехать за город с нами? 5. Почему вы не можете прийти к нам сегодня вечером? – Я не могу прийти к вам, так как плохо себя чувствую. 6. Можно доехать к вам автобусом? 7. Можно открыть окно? 8. Я не могу забыть об этом. 9. Можно выйти? Я плохо себя чувствую. 10. Он не умеет говорить по-французски, но он умеет читать на этом языке.

* * *18. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. Здравствуйте! Как поживаете? — Здравствуйте. Хорошо, спасибо. — Вы были вчера на лекции по литературе? — К сожалению (жаль), я не был. Я чувствовал себя плохо и остался дома. 2. Что с вами? Вы плохо себя чувствуете? Пойдите к врачу. В нашем университете есть очень хороший врач. 3. Как вы обычно ездите в университет? — Иногда я езжу на тролейбусе, но обычно — на автобусе. — Сколько времени у вас

уходит на дорогу до университета ? — На автобусе — 20 минут. 4. Вы можете дать мне ваши конспекты по литературе? — Конечно. Приходите ко мне завтра. — Хорошо, спасибо. 5. Не забудьте позвонить мне вечером. 6. Я не могу вспомнить это грамматическое правило. 7. Лекция начинается в восемь часов. Мы должны поспешить в университет. 8. У вас очень высокая температура. Вы должны остаться дома. 9. Вы вчера делали доклад? — Нет. Я не был в университете. Я был болен. 10. Я не могу зайти к вам сегодня. Я должен идти в библиотеку готовиться к докладу. 11. Сколько времени вам требуется, чтобы хорошо приготовить домашнее задание? — Обычно мне требуется один или два часа, если задание не очень трудное. 12. Посмотрите на этого высокого человека. Вы помните его? Мы учились вместе с ним в университете.

LESSON TEN (THE TENTH LESSON)


dear – дорогой health – здоровьеat last – наконец still – пока, ещеto be busy – быть занятым poor – бедный to be free – быть свободным rich – богатыйan examination – экгзамен to hope – надеятьсяto take an examination – сдать экзамен to intend – собиратьсяto pass an examination a river – рекаto examine – анализировать a forest – лесquite – довольно (the) beginning – начало at all – совсем (the) end – конецa rest-home – дом отдыха at the beginning – в начале a holiday – каникулы at the end – в концеto have a good time – хорошо провести время a university-year – учебный годa sea – море to think – думатьto swim – плавать a visit – визит(the) sun – солнце to visit – навеститьto lie – лежать to hear – слышатьto lie in the sun – загорать to hear from – получить известиеeither – тоже (отр.) a departure – отъезд

* * *

6. Translate into English paying attention to the following word combinations:

а) То take an examination, to pass an examination.1. Когда вы сдавали последний экзамен? — Я сдавал последний экзамен три дня тому, назад. — Как вы его сдали ? — Хорошо. Я получил хорошую опенку. 2. Почему вы не сдавали вчера экзамен по литературе? — Я не сдавал экзамен, потому что чувствовал себя плохо. У меня была очень высокая температура. 3. Кто должен сдавать экзамен по истории в три часа? — Я. — Вы можете сдавать экзамен сейчас. Джон сдал экзамен в два часа. Преподаватель сейчас свободен. 4. Как наши студенты сдали вчера экзамен по английскому языку? — Хорошо. Только один из них не сдал экзамена. Он получил плохую отметку. Он мало работает над английским языком. 5. Где они обычно сдают экзамены по истории? — В 40-й комнате. 6. Вы должны много работать, если вы хотите хорошо сдать экзамен по немецкому языку.

b) Else, still1. Что еще вы хотите написать в своем письме? 2. Кто еще должен прийти сюда? 3. Вы все еще дома? 4. Ваш друг все еще в нашем городе? Попросите его прийти к нам. 5. Что еще вы видели вчера в театре? 6. Вы еще учитесь в университете? 7. Где еще вы видели Тома вчера? 8. Почему вы все еще здесь? Вы должны идти на лекцию. 9. Что еще вы приготовили вчера? 10. Пит все еще очень болен. 11. Вы все еще чувствуете себя плохо? 12. Куда еще вы намереваетесь пойти сегодня? 13. Кому еще дать эту книгу? 14. Майкл все еще в городе? — Нет, он вчера уехал в село. 15. Кто еще может сделать эту работу? — Мы.

c) То visit, to attend.1. Когда вы обычно посещаете лекции по истории? — По средам и пятницам. 2. Когда мы были в Лондоне, мы посетили несколько театров и музеев. 3. Моя жена не посещает лекции по литературе. Она сдала экзамен по этому предмету в прошлом году. 4. Если вы хотите много знать о своей стране, вы должны много ездить, посещать музеи, много читать. 5. Вчера несколько иностранных инженеров посетили наш завод. 6. Ник хорошо учится. Он всегда готовит домашние задания и всегда посещает уроки.

d) Quite, at all.1. Я совсем не хочу ехать за город. 2. Я уже совсем свободен и могу пойти с вами в кино. 3. Я совсем не умею плавать. 4. Мой отец уже совсем старый, ему семьдесят пять лет. 5. Моя дочь совсем не может загорать (лежать на солнце). 6. Мой друг живет совсем близко от меня. 7. Этот перевод совершенно не трудный. 8. Я совсем здоров. Почему вы думаете, что я болен? 9. Вы совсем не знаете этих правил. Выучите их. 10. Простите, но я вас совсем не знаю.

e) Too, also, either.1. Мой сын тоже не умеет играть на рояле. 2. Ваш сын тоже сдал все экзамены на прошлой неделе? 3. Вы тоже не получаете от него писем? 4. Вы тоже вернетесь в конце сентября? 5. Они тоже все еще здесь? 6. Они тоже не любят загорать. 7. Мы тоже не собираемся ехать в дом отдыха в этом году. 8. Мои друзья тоже не едут сегодня за город, так как у них больна дочь. 9. Я тоже не советую вам идти на эту лекцию. 10. Этот текст тоже не трудный.

f) In, for, on, at, to.1. Вчера утром я сдал экзамен по румынскому языку и получил хорошую оценку. 2. Летом мы обычно уезжаем в село на каникулы. 3. Завтра я уеду в Кишинэу. Я думаю, что вернусь через три дня. 4. В прошлое воскресенье мы были за городом. Мы пробыли (оставались) там три часа. Мы пошли на реку, плавали там и загорали. 5. Эта книга слишком трудна для меня. 6. Какие упражнения нам задал преподаватель на дом? 7. Наш урок обычно начинается в девять часов. 8. Эта женщина работает в университете, а ее муж работает на заводе. 9. Мы закончим свою работу в начале 2000 года. 10. Сколько часов в день вы работаете над английским языком? — Я обычно работаю над английским языком два часа в день. 11. Посмотрите на эту картину! Что вы видите на ней? 12. Один из наших студентов совсем не работает над английским языком. — У нас тоже есть студент, который тоже не работает над английским языком. 13. Есть ли какие-либо картины на стенах этой комнаты? 14. У нас будет диктант в четверг. 15. Куда вы поедете в выходной день? 16. Я собираюсь навестить своих друзей десятого ноября. 17. Сколько времени вы потратили на свой доклад? 18. Сколько лекций по истории посетили эти студенты в прошлом месяце?

* * *

8. Translate into English the following verbs and give their three forms.

учиться, спешить, играть, начинать, звонить по телефону, плавать, лежать, думать, приносить, слушать, учить, забывать, чувствовать, добираться, покидать, видеть, кататься ка лыжах, знать, говорить.


а) 1. Когда вы будете держать экзамен по английскому языку? — Я думаю, что буду держать его в конце июня. 2. Мы поедем в выходной день за город. Надеюсь, мы там хорошо проведем время. Мы можем пойти в лес или на реку. 3. Когда ваша сестра собирается уехать в село? — Я думаю, что она еще (yet) нe уедет на этой неделе (this week). Мы тоже не уедем. 4. Когда вы будете обсуждать последний вопрос? — Мы его будем обсуждать через час. 5. Какой врач будет осматривать вашу больную сестру? — Доктор Смит. 6. Приходите к нам сегодня вечером. Мы будем свободны и хорошо проведем время вместе. 7. Вы будете очень заняты в понедельник? Я хочу показать вам нашу новую работу по истории. — Приходите, пожалуйста. Я совсем не буду занят. 8. Мой брат обычно проводит свои каникулы в доме отдыха. 9. Ваш друг все еще учится? — Нет. Он окончил университет в прошлом году. Я тоже не учусь сейчас. Я работаю. 10. Что еще мы должны приготовить? 11. Когда вы собираетесь уехать в дом отдыха? — Я надеюсь, что уеду в дом отдыха через неделю. Сейчас я не могу ехать туда, потому что очень занят. Моя жена тоже не может уехать сейчас. 12. Я уеду в Великобританию в начале апреля. До моего отъезда я должен закончить свою работу и отдать ее Габриэлю. 13. Сколько раз в неделю вы занимаетесь английским языком? — Мы занимаемся английским языком четыре раза в неделю. 14. Сколько часов в день у вас уходит на подготовку к экзамену по английской литературе?

b) Наши студенты умеют хорошо работать и учиться. Они также умеют (знают как) хорошо отдыхать. Когда у них есть свободное время, они ходят в кино, в театр, посещают интересные лекции или отдыхают дома вместе со своими друзьями. Многие (студенты) проводят свои каникулы на море, где летом можно (студенты могут) хорошо проводить время: гулять, плавать, загорать.

c) Дорогая Анна,Ты знаешь, что я тоже не могла написать тебе письмо сразу, потому что в прошлом месяце была очень занята. Три дня тому назад я, наконец, закончила свою работу. Сейчас я совсем свободна и могу писать письма своим друзьям. Мои дети скоро сдадут экзамены, и мы поедем на каникулы за город.Мы будем жить на даче (country-house), где мы жили в прошлом году. Я не люблю жить в местах, которые я совсем не знаю. А это место очень хорошее. Оно нам всем очень понравилось. Там есть лес и река. Мы будем купаться (плавать) и загорать по два или три часа в день. Моя сестра провела в этом месте прошлое лето со своим сыном. Ты знаешь, что у него плохое здоровье. Сейчас он чувствует себя совсем хорошо. Ты не собираешься приехать к нам? Приезжай в начале июля со своей семьей, мы хорошо проведем время вместе.Мне хочется получить от тебя весточку до отъезда.Привет мужу и детям, твоя Мария.

LESSON ELEVEN (THE ELEVENTH LESSON)


clever – умный a weather – времяfellow – парень to rain – дождь (идет)to show – показать nearly – почьтиkind (adj.) – добрый beautiful – красивыйto retire on a pension – выйти на пенсию a journey – поездкаa non-governmental organization – непрвительственая организацияto help – помочь to recognize – узнатьthat’s why – вот почему straight – прямоa reputation – репутация wide – широкийas (prep.) – как a square – площадьa delegate – делегат, представитель a garden – садan exhibition – выставка a hospital – больницаto listen to – слушать a hotel – гостиницаa story – расказ an underground – метроa capital – столица a suburb – окраина городаto try – пробовать in the suburbs – на окраинахa place – место dirty – грязныйa lot of – множество narrow – узкийamazing – восхитительный important – важныйa tourist – турист financial – финансовый

industrial – индустриальный

* * *5. Translate paying attention to the use of the verbs to go and to come.

1. Я не хочу входить в комнату. Дайте мне, пожалуйста, мой портфель. Я оставил его вчера в кресле около окна. 2. Когда я вышел из комнаты, я увидел Ника в коридоре (corridor). Он хотел поговорить со мной, но не хотел входить в комнату. 3. Идите в класс и принесите свои тетради и книги. 4. Идите сюда. Ваша ручка на моем столе. Вы оставили ее здесь в субботу. 5. Войдите. Мы поговорим с вами сейчас. 6. Войдите в комнату. Я не могу разговаривать с вами, когда вы в коридоре. 7. Сходите к Тому домой. Он очень болен и не может прийти сегодня. 8. Приходите ко мне сегодня вечером. У меня будет мой друг. Он расскажет нам много интересного. 9. Пойдите в комнату № 49 и принесите стул. 10. Не ходите к нему завтра. Его не будет дома.

* * *10. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.

1. Вы вчера работали в новом или старом здании городской библиотеки? 2. Моя сестра работает на центральной выставке. Она работает там экономистом (в качестве экономиста). 3. Где они будут строить новую школу? — Они будут строить новую школу на этой улице. 4. В прошлом году я провел свои каникулы в деревне со своими родителями. Иногда я работал вместе с ними. Мне это очень нравилось. Сейчас я очень хорошо себя чувствую. Сегодня я хочу послать письмо своим друзьям из деревни. 5. Мы слушали ее рассказ с интересом. 6. Делегаты на выставку в Лондоне слушали вчера доклад господина Смита о работе их фирмы. 7. Моя бабушка знает много интересных историй. Ока часто рассказывает нам эти исторги. Мы очень любим слушать ее. 8. Мне понравились все эти книги. Постарайтесь их прочитать. 9. Постарайтесь сделать эту работу сегодня. 10. Пит попытался открыть дверь, но не мог. Я тоже не смог открыть ее.

11. Вы пытались перевести эту статью? Она совсем нетрудная. 12. Я пытался поговорить с ним об этом несколько раз, но он не хотел меня слушать. Я попытаюсь поговорить с ним завтра снова. 13. На какой улице вы живете? — Я живу на улице Свободы. 14. На площади Алксандри есть театр. 15. В нашей республике мало важных промышленных центров. 16. Этот вопрос очень важный. Мы его снова обсудим завтра. 17. Детство Диккенса было очень тяжелым. 18. Этот молодой писатель много (упорно) работает над своими книгами. 19. Разве вы не узнаете этого человека? Мы работали вместе пять лет тому назад. 20. Вчера я не мог узнать вас. Вы тоже не могли узнать меня. 21. Лондон — столица Англии (England).


Один из моих хороших друзей живет в Бухаресте. У него большая квартира в новом здании на главной улице. У него нет семьи. Он живет с братом, который учится в Университете. Брату 20 лет. Мой друг и я учились вместе в школе в Бэлць в 1998 году. В 2004 г., когда мы окончили школу, я начал учиться в университете, а он уехал в Бухарест. Он там тоже учится в одном из больших университетов. Когда у нас каникулы, мы часто встречаемся. В этом году мы намереваемся провести каникулы опять вместе. Он приедет в Бэлць, проведет здесь несколько дней с нами, а затем мы отправимся в Сороку. В Сороке много прекрасных мест. Мы были там в прошлом году, и нам очень понравился этот город.

LESSON TWELVE (THE TWELFTH LESSON)


meal – блюдо ice-cream – мороженоеpast – после never – никогдаwithout – без coffee – кофеtea – чай sweet – сладкийa cup of tea – чашка чая enough – достаточноhungry – голодный salt – сольto be hungry – быть голодным sugar – сахарto be thirsty – хотеть пить to pass – датьalone – один bread – хлебto join – присоединиться brown bread – черный хлебa restaurant – ресторан white bread – белый хлебa waitress – официантка course – блюдоa waiter – официант sweets – сладостиto come up – подойти to buy – купить

a fork – вилка to sell – продатьa knife – нож to be back – возвратитьсяa plate – тарелка, блюдо a cake – пирогsoup – суп to talk – говоритьsalad – салат a little – малоmeat – мясо to smoke – куритьpotato(es) – картошка

when – когдаas soon as – как толькоtill, until (conj.) – покаbefore (conj.) – передafter (conj.) – послеwhile – покаlater – позже

* * *2. Translate in English.

1. Давайте откроем окно в комнате. 2. Пусть Tом расскажет своим друзьям о столице Англии. 3. Давайте я переведу эту статью. 4. Пусть они прочитают и обсудят эту книгу. 5. Пусть дети поедут за город в воскресенье. 6. Давайте поедем в университет на автобусе. 7. Джейн знает французский язык. Пусть она встретит эту делегацию. Я не умею говорить по-французски. 8. Давайте пойдем на лекцию по английской литературе. Я думаю, что она будет интересной. 9. Разрешите мне положить сюда книгу. 10. Простите, позвольте мне взять мои журналы.

* * *5. Translate paying attention to the use of Present Simple Tense in clauses of time and condition.

1. Куда вы поедете отдыхать после того, как сдадите экзамены? 2. Когда мы поедем в деревню, мы будем каждый день ходить в лес. 3. Я вам дам эту книгу, если я ее достану. 4. Мы можем почитать газету, до того как начнется урок. 5. Если в читальне (а reading-room) будет много народу, я буду заниматься дома. 6. Как только я буду свободен, я зайду к вам (навешу вас). 7. Вы можете заниматься в моей комнате, пока я не приду.

* * *7. Translate.

1. Вчера я пришел на автобусную остановку (bus-stop) в четверть восьмого, но автобуса не было, и я решил пойти домой пешком. 2. Пойдемте в кафе без десяти час. В это время там мало народу. 3. Приходите сюда в двадцать минут четвертого, мы вместе пойдем в библиотеку. 4. Вы всегда встаете в это время? — Да. Мы всегда встаем без четверти семь. 5. Мы придем на вокзал без двадцати пяти минут одиннадцать.


1. Если вы не пойдете в ресторан через полчаса, я пойду без вас. Я уже проголодался, я очень рано сегодня завтракал. 2. Вы можете закончить эту работу один? — Да, конечно. Она легкая. Как только я закончу ее, я скажу вам об этом. 3. Вы хотите есть? — Нет. Я

пообедал полчаса тому назад. Дайте мне, пожалуйста, чашку чая, мне очень хочется пить. 4. Давайте сядем за этот стол. Я знаю эту официантку. Она очень хорошо работает, я думаю, у нас обед займет очень мало времени. 5. “Подойдите, пожалуйста, к нашему столу. На столе нет вилок”, сказал я официантке. 6. Кто приносит вилки и ножи? 7. Вам принести белого или черного хлеба? – Принесите, пожалуйста, черного. Я не люблю белый хлеб с супом. 8. Я не буду брать суп. Я не голоден. Я возьму только салати второе. 9. Я еще не хочу есть. Я обедал в четверть второго. 10. “Как только закончишь уроки, — сказала мать дочери, — пойди купи черного хлеба. У нас много белого хлеба, но недостаточно черного”. 11. “Не бери мороженое сейчас, я дам тебе мороженое после обеда”, — сказала мать сыну. 12. Я никогда не хожу в ресторан обедать один. 13. Вот соль, мясо недостаточно соленое. 14. Подайте, пожалуйста, сахар, кофе недостаточно сладкий (в кофе недостаточно сахара). 15. Если ваш маленький брат не будет есть суп, не давайте ему конфет. 16. Я буду есть пирожное, когда вы принесете кофе. 17. Где вы купили эти конфеты? Они мне очень нравятся. 18. Когда урок закончится, мы поговорим с вами немного, а потом вы пойдете домой. 19. Пойдемте курить в сад. Я никогда не курю в комнате. 20. Сколько времени уйдет у вас на обед? — Я думаю, что если я не буду есть первое, обед у меня займет только полчаса. 21. Вы уже умеете читать по-английски? — Да, немного.

LESSON THIRTEEN (THE THIRTEENTH LESSON)


a friend of mine – мой друг food – едаnative – родной to go shopping – идти за покупкамиto pack – упаковать to do some shopping – делать покупкиa box – коробка an address – адресto smile – улыбаться to be in a hurry – торопитьсяa face – лицо to wait (for) – ждатьhappy – счастливый to say good-bye – прошатьсяto travel – путешествовать fruitful – плодотворныйdifferent – другой, разный fruitless (ant.) – неплодотворныйa shirt – рубашка a salesman – продавецtrousers – брюки a saleswoman – продавщицаa dress – платъе to try on – примеритьa hat – шляпа to be out – отсутствоватьa suit – костюм to be in – быть дома

a coat – пальто to cost – стоитьa shoe – туфля to pay – платитьother (another) – другой dear – дорогойa suit-case – чемодан expensive – дорогойbesides (adv.) – кроме этого cheap – дешовыйa shop – магазин


а) спрашивающий, одевающийся, дающий, помогающий, делающий ошибки, рассказывающий, показывающий, уходящий (покидающий), спешащий, сдающий экзамены, плавающий, лежащий, отдыхающий, строящий, слушающий, пытающийся.b) разговаривающий человек, улыбающаяся девушка, играющие дети.

* * *6. Translate paying attention to the verb tense form.

а) 1. Где ваш сын? — Час тому назад он пошел к другу. Они там играют сейчас в шахматы. 2. Не входите, пожалуйста, сейчас в комнату. Там один из наших студентов сдает экзамен по английскому языку. Через несколько минут экзамен окончится. 3. Ваш дедушка работает? — Нет. Он уже старый. Ему 75 лет. 4. Посмотрите, кто работает за тем столом? Я не могу узнать этих людей. — Вы их не знаете. Это наши новые экономисты. 5. На что вы смотрите? — Я смотрю на это новое высокое здание. Мне оно очень нравится.b) Мы обычно отдыхаем (имеем каникулы) летом, но в этом году мы решили поехать в дом отдыха зимой. Три дня тому назад мы приехали в один из домов отдыха недалеко от нашего города. Мы живем в хорошей, теплой (warm) комнате. Мы хорошо отдыхаем (хорошо проводим время). Днем мы много гуляем, а вечера мы обычно проводим в большом зале (a hall) дома отдыха. Сейчас мы в зале. Я сижу за столом и пишу это письмо. Мой друг играет в шахматы со своим братом, а моя сестра смотрит телевизор. Мне очень нравится этот дом отдыха. На будущий год мы опять приедем сюда.

* * *8. Translate paying attention to the possessive pronouns.

1. Возьмите мое пальто. Ваше недостаточно теплое (warm). 2. Сколько вы заплатили за ваши новые ботинки и за ботинки, которые вы купили для своего сына? — Мои стоят 400 лей, а его — 350. 3. Ваш дом находится недалеко от остановки, а наш — очень далеко. 4. Бэлць — наш родной город, а Кишинэу — их. 5. На нашей улице есть больница, а на их улице — школа. 6. Ваш чай совсем холодный, возьмите мой. Я совсем не хочу пить сейчас. 7. Не берите его ручку. Она плохая. Возьмите мою. 8. Я заплатил 700 лей за свое пальто. А сколько вы заплатили за ваше? 9. Вчера они взяли наши журналы и оставили нам свои. 10. Ваш диктант плохой, а ее — хороший.


1. Если вы сможете, приезжайте к нам за город в воскресенье. Вся наша семья будет очень рада видеть вас. Вы отдохнете у нас немного. 2. Посмотрите! Пит разговаривает с продавцом. Давайте подойдем к нему. Что он покупает? 3. Летом я собираюсь поехать в свою родную деревню. Я уехал оттуда, когда мне было шестнадцать лет. Прошлым летом

я там не был. Моя сестра тоже не ездила туда. Если она пойдет в отпуск (будет иметь отпуск) летом, она тоже поедет со мной. 4. Пусть Анна расскажет нам, как она путешествовала в прошлом году. 5. Моя ручка очень плохая. Можно взять вашу? 6. Пойдемте сейчас в ресторан! — Простите, я сейчас не могу пойти. Я заканчиваю перевод очень важной статьи, кроме того, через полчаса сюда придет один из экономистов из Кишинэу, с которым я должен поговорить. 7. Я должна пойти за покупками, как только закончу эту работу. — Что ты хочешь купить? — У нас нет черного хлеба, а я не люблю есть суп с белым хлебом. Кроме того, я хочу купить каких-нибудь конфет к чаю. Подожди меня здесь, пока я не вернусь из магазина. 8. Пусть продавщица покажет нам тот костюм. Я думаю он недорогой. 9. Если вы не торопитесь, подождите меня, пожалуйста, мы поедем домой вместе на автобусе. 10. “Через несколько дней вы окончите университет и начнете работать. Я думаю, вы будете хорошими экономистами. Желаю вам плодотворной работы!” сказал студентам декан (dean) факультета. 11. Я почитаю газету, пока ты обедаешь. Я не хочу есть. 12. Покажите мне, пожалуйста, те ботинки. Сколько они стоят? — Они недорогие. Они стоят только 250 лей. Посмотрите на эти ботинки, они тоже недорогие. 13. Я не могу сейчас пойти с вами в магазин. Я укладываю вещи. Если вы подождете, пока я упакую их, мы пойдем за покупками вместе. 14. Вы можете показать мне другое платье? Мне не нравится этот цвет. — Конечно. В нашем магазине много платьев различных цветов. 15. Вчера моя сестра и я купили новые шляпы. Они не очень дорогие. Моя стоит 50 лей, а ее — 65.

LESSON FOURTEEN (THE FOURTEENTH LESSON)


a captain – капитан to sail – плаватьa voyage – путешествие the North – северto make a voyage – путешествовать the South – юг(the) following – следующий the West – западa ship – корабль the East – востокsuch – такой a direction – направлениеstrange – странный to excuse (for) – извинитьсяto sleep – спать that is why – вот почемуto be fast asleep – спать крепко to be angry (with sb) – быть сердитымto fall asleep – заснуть to order – приказыватьto fall ill – заболеть through – черезa night – ночь to look through – просматриватьat night – ночью a boat – лодкаin the daytime – днем to save – спасти

a voice – голос to reach – достичьin a loud (low) voice – громким голосом suddenly – вдругan ear – ухо to cry out – кричатьan eye – глаз loudly – громким голосом

* * *5. Translate in English paying attention to the use of tenses.

а) 1. Когда мы вошли в ресторан, официантка раскладывала (to put) на столе ложки, вилки и ножи. 2. Какие журналы вы читали, когда мы пришли в библиотеку? 3. Что вы покупали, когда я вошел в магазин? 4. Что вы делали в три часа дня вчера? — Я обедал.5. Я вас видел вчера в пять часов на улице. Куда вы торопились?b) 1. Не приходите к нам в одиннадцать часов утра завтра. Мы будем заняты. Мы будем обсуждать статью этого писателя. 2. Что вы будете делать завтра в пять часов? — Я буду отвечать иностранным фирмам на их письма. 3. Почитайте газету, пока я буду готовить обед. Через полчаса я буду свободна. 4. Пусть Ник придет сюда завтра без четверти восемь. Я буду ждать его здесь.

* * *12. Translate using:

а) such or so.1. Это было такое интересное путешествие! 2. Это путешествие было таким интересным! 3. Это такой короткий рассказ, что вы его очень скоро прочитаете. 4. Этот рассказ такой короткий, что вы его очень скоро прочитаете. 5. Это такой странный рассказ! 6. Этот рассказ такой странный! 7. Этот салат такой соленый (salty), что я не могу его есть. 8. Я не могу есть такой соленый салат! 9. Я так плохо себя чувствую, что не могу сейчас говорить с вами. 10. У вас такая плохая ручка! Возьмите мою, пожалуйста. 11. Разве вы не любите такие конфеты?

b) to hurry or to be in a hurry.1. Почему он так торопится? — Он торопится, потому что у него собрание. 2. Если вы будете спешить, вы сделаете много ошибок. 3. Мальчик поспешил к двери, когда увидел свою мать в окно. 4. Простите, я не могу разговаривать с вами сейчас, я тороплюсь навокзал. 5. Если вы торопитесь, попросите официантку принести вам суп и второе сразу. 6. Почему люди спешат в том направлении? — Они спешат в школу. Там будет лекция. 7. Этот ученик никогда не торопится, поэтому он делает очень мало ошибок.


1. Давайте я расскажу вам о своем первом морском путешествии, которое я совершил, когда мне было семь лет. 2. Ник, идите к доске и напишите следующее предложение: “Сын моего брата хочет быть капитаном.” 3. Кого вы здесь ждете? — Мы ждем делегатов, которые приедут сюда через полчаса. 4. Пусть Анна покажет вам свои цветы, они очень странные, они почти (almost) черные. 5. Какого цвета глаза у вашей сестры? 6. Почему вы разговариваете так тихо? – Мой маленький брат не спит. 7. Я проснулся в два часа ночи и до четырех часов не мог уснуть. 8. Мне очень нравится север. Когда я окончу университет, я поеду работать в какой-нибудь город на севере. 9. Какие большие города вы знаете на востоке США? 10. Пойдемте в этом направлении. Здесь много красивых зданий. 11. Простите, пожалуйста, но я не узнаю вас. В каком университете вы учились? 12. Почему вы рассердились на меня вчера? — Я не рассердился. Я был так занят, что не

мог поговорить с вами. Подождите меня немного, и мы обсудим все ваши вопросы, как только я закончу работу. 13. У сына вашей подруги такое странное имя, что я не могу его вспомнить. 14. Моя лодка слишком большая, давайте возьмем вашу. 15. Я никогда не забуду этого человека. Он спас мне жизнь. 16. Мы вышли из города в половине восьмого утра и добрались до (достигли) леса только через полтора часа. 17. Когда мы вернулись домой, сын крепко спал, мы ужинали, громко разговаривали, но он нас не слышал. 18. В понедельник я навещал своего товарища, который был болен, поэтому я не мог прийти к вам. 19. Разве вы не знаете, что Том вчера заболел? Вот почему его нет сегодня на уроке. Давайте позвоним ему после лекции. 20. Профессор Смит посоветовал мне отдыхать (спать) днем. Я несколько (several) раз пытался заснуть днем, но не мог. 21. Вы можете почитать эти журналы, пока я буду просматривать письма и телеграммы. 22. Моя сестра плохо себя чувствовала ночью. Вот почему я тоже не могла заснуть. 23. Идите в этом направлении до тех пор, пока вы не увидите большое серое здание. Библиотека находится направо от него.

19. Translate the text below and retell it.

Вчера меня навестил один из моих друзей. Мы разговаривали о детях. Я рассказал ему следующую историю о своем брате: „Когда мы были детьми, мы жили за городом. У моего брата была маленькая лодка, и он часто совершал на ней „путешествия" вместе со своими друзьями. Наша мать всегда сердилась на нас, когда мы уходили на реку. Во время одного из наших „путешествий" мы услышали незнакомый голос. Мы поплыли в этом направлении и вскоре увидели человека на середине реки. Он кричал: „Помогите! Помогите!" — „Мы должны спасти его", сказал мой брат. Вскоре мы добрались до (достигли) середины реки и привезли этого человека на берег (the bank) на своей лодке.

Мы пришли домой поздно. Мама не задавала нам вопросов, но сердитым голосом велела нам поужинать и идти спать. Я подошел к матери и сказал: “Послушай, мама, не сердись на нас". Но мама не хотела слушать нашу историю. „Ложитесь спать", повторила она. Мы легли спать в двенадцать часов, но не могли заснуть ...

Сейчас моему брату тридцать лет. Два года тому назад он стал (to become, became) капитаном большого судна. Несколько дней тому назад он вернулся со своим кораблем из Нью-Йорка и через две недели он приедет повидать нас.

LESSON FIFTEEN (THE FIFTEENTH LESSON)


to travel about – путешествовать по to turn over – перевернутьto travel in the mountains – … в горах down – внизto rise – восходить a language – языкto set – заходить (о солнце) world – мирbehind – за a settler – переселенецfrom behind – из за a region – регионa mountain – гора to differ – различатьсяa train – поезд to stop – остановить(ся)by train – на поезде a relative – родственикa tourist – турист to fly – лететьstill – еще, пока high – высокоin front of – перед over – через, надfamous – известный a lake – озероto be famous – быть известным

* * *2. Translate paying attention:

а) to the use of the definite article with geographical nouns.1. В Румынии много больших рек: Дунай, Сирет, Бистрица, Муреш, Сомеш и другие. 2. Прут уже Нистру, но он очень красивый. Он разделяет Республику Молдова от Румынии. 3. Я каждый год отдыхаю (провожу отпуск) в Карпатах, но на будущий год я не поеду туда, я поеду в один из домов отдыха на Дунае. 4. Муж моей сестры не ездит летом в Турцию. Там очень жарко летом. Он любит отдыхать в Румынии. 5. Мой друг очень любит Черное море, поэтому каждый год на каникулы он ездит в Констанцу. 6. На будущий год мы поедем на экскурсию в Карпатах. Наш учитель говорит, что мы увидим там много интересного. Затем мы поедем на море. 7. Какие города на Дунае вы знаете? — На Дунае много городов: Тулча, Галаць, Брэила, Джюрджиу и другие. 8. Где больше рек: на западе или на востоке Европы? 9. Где больше лесов: на юге или в центре нашей республики? — В центре. 10. Мы с другом живем в центре города: он — на улице Индепенденцей, а я — на площади В. Александри.

b) to the use of one.1. Нужно читать газеты каждый день. 2. В этой библиотеке можно взять любую книгу. 3. Этот фильм нельзя забыть. 4. Нужно много читать, чтобы хорошо знать литературу. 5. В Карпатах можно хорошо отдохнуть. 6. В Лондоне можно встретить людей из различных стран. 7. Нужно много заниматься, чтобы хорошо изучить английский язык. 8. Вчера нельзя было выйти на улицу: было очень холодно и шел сильный дождь.

* * *11. Translate using yet, still, else, other, some more or one more.

1. Я хочу купить еще один чемодан. 2. Кого еще вы ждете? 3. Что еще вам рассказал Том? 4. Я еще не знаю об этом. 5. Дождь все еще идет. 6. В каких еще городах вы побы-вали (посетили) в прошлом году? 7. Какой еще вопрос вы хотите задать мне? 8. Разве вы еще не знаете моего друга? 9. Пойди в магазин и купи еще хлеба. 10. Он все еще работал, когда мы вернулись. 11. Ему потребовалось еще немного времени, чтобы закончить свой доклад. 12. Какие еще реки в Европе вы знаете? 13. Дайте мне еще одну книгу по английской литературе. 14. Мой друг еще не работает, он учится. 15. Куда еще мы поедем на экскурсию? 16. Подождите меня немного. Я еще не готова. 17. Еще нет семи часов. Мы приедем на вокзал вовремя.


1. В прошлом году я отдыхал (провел свой отпуск) в одном из домов отдыха недалеко от моря. Это один из самых красивых курортов. Я там очень хорошо себя чувствовал, так как было совсем не жарко. 2. Давайте пойдем домой. Солнце уже садится, и становится холодно. 3. Летом солнце восходит раньше, чем зимой, а заходит позднее. 4. Вчера я навестил своего старого друга, и мы вспомнили свое детство, свой родной город и дом, в котором жили. Мы жили на окраине города, и прямо (right) за нашим домом начинался (был) лес. Перед домом был небольшой сад, где мы часто играли. 5. В прошлом году, когда мы путешествовали в горах, мы встретили крестьянина, которому было больше ста лет. „В горах много людей такого же возраста (таких же старых), как я и даже старше меня," сказал он. 6. Давайте поедем летом в Карпатах. Я знаю там одну красивую деревушку. Это место славится свежим горным воздухом и прекрасным озером. Там

можно очень хорошо провести время. 7. Вы полетите в Турцию самолетом или поедете автобусом? — Я поеду автобусом, хотя это и займет около двух дней. На самолете я всегда плохо себя чувствую. 8. Какая прекрасная песня и как хорошо они поют ее! 9. Я проведу свой отпуск в родной деревне. Как только я приеду туда, я начну работать в поле вместе с родителями. 10. В Карпатах много хороших домов отдыха. Я люблю Карпаты больше, чем море. Я лучше себя чувствую там. 11. Мой отец родился в маленькой деревне где он провел свое детство. Но когда ему было 16 лет, он поехал работать в город. Там он живет и сейчас. 12. Лондон — один из красивейших городов в мире. В прошлом году мы провели там несколько дней, когда путешествовали по Великобритании. 13. „Кто может показать на карте все города нашей республики?" спросил учитель учеников. 14. В прошлом году в Париже приезжало меньше туристов, чем в этом году. 15. – Включите (Turn on), пожалуйста, свет. Уже темно, и трудно читать. 16. Переверните страницу, пожайлуста. Давайте прочитаем этот рассказ. 17. Марк Твен, известный американский писатель, очень хорошо знал детей.

LESSON SIXTEEN (THE SIXTEENTH LESSON)


youth – молодость besides (prep.) – кромеpopular – известный several – большеa novel – роман to turn to sb. for sth. – обратиться к…a novelist – писатель money – деньгиnoisy – шумный except – кромеactive – активный to pay – платитьcapable – способный to earn one's living – зарабатывать …at the age (of) – в возрасте British – британскийat an early age – в раннем возрасте a way – образabout (adv.) – около by the way – между прочимown – собственный on one's way – по своемуready – готов an education – образованиеto be (get) ready (for) – быть готовым to describe – описатьto enjoy – наслаждаться such as – такой какa performance – представление to die – умеретьto move – переехать


1. Если завтра будет холодно, мы никуда не поедем. 2. Если кто-нибудь опоздает, мы не будем ждать. Все должны прийти вовремя. 3. Здесь темнее, чем в той комнате. Я ничего не вижу. 4. Все крепко заснут, как только доберутся до своих постелей. 5. Расскажите нам что-нибудь интересное о своей жизни. 6. Пойдем в магазин. Мне нужно купить что-нибудь к ужину. 7. Кто-то ждет вас в вашей комнате. 8. Я тоже ничего не слышу. Говорите громче. 9. Почему вы улыбаетесь? Разве в моем рассказе есть что-нибудь смешное? 10. Если вы не будете работать над своими ошибками, ничто не поможет вам. 11. Вас кто-нибудь приглашал вчера на этот вечер? 12. Дети сейчас загорают где-нибудь на берегу моря. 13. Почему вы не соглашаетесь поехать куда-нибудь в отпуск? 14. Этот человек никогда никого не боится. 15. Кто-нибудь еще хочет принять участие в нашей экскурсии? 16. Почему никто из вас не слушает рассказ? Разве он не интересный? 17. „Каждый из вас

должен помнить эти слова", сказала мать своим детям. 18. Может ли кто-нибудь из вас спеть эту песню? 19. Никто не забудет этого человека.

* * *12. Translate using to speak, to talk, to tell, to say.

1. Вчера Пит говорил не долго, но сказал много интересного. 2. Скажите вашему другу, что мы получили большое удовольствие от его доклада вчера. 3. „Опишите ваш рабочий день", сказал преподаватель студентам. 4. Я поговорю об этом с нашими инженерами. Я расскажу им о вашей работе. 5. О чем они разговаривают? — Они обсуждают новую пьесу этого писателя. 6. Преподаватели говорят, что этот мальчик очень способный. 7. Что вы сказали? Повторите, пожалуйста. Не говорите так быстро. 8. Говорите громче, здесь очень шумно, и нам очень трудно вас слушать. 9. Расскажите нам что-нибудь о своем родном городе. 10. Скажите ему, пожалуйста, что он неправ. 11. Мы поговорим об этом спектакле завтра после урока. 12. Кто-нибудь из ваших друзей говорит по-английски? 13. Они сказали вам что-нибудь об этом? 14. Ничего не говори ему о нашем отъезде. 15. Не разговаривайте на уроке. Слушайте своих колег, когда они говорят по-английски. 16. Все, кроме вас, говорят, что спектакль был прекрасный. 17. Кому вы сказали об этом? 18. Вы говорили кому-нибудь что-нибудь об этом? 19. Этот писатель говорит, что он написал свою собственную пьесу примерно в пятнадцатилетнем возрасте. 20. С кем вы так громко разговаривали по телефону, когда мы вошли? 21. Почему вы ничего не сказали нам вчера о последнем матче (match)? 22. Мистер Смит говорит, что он начал зарабатывать себе на жизнь в раннем возрасте, так как его отцу было очень трудно прокормить (to keep) семью одному.


1. „Кто-нибудь из вас может мне рассказать о детстве и юности великого американского писателя Марка Твена?" — спросила мать своих мальчиков. — „Да, конечно, мама. Наш учитель литературы рассказывал нам много интересного о ранних годах его жизни". 2. Когда мы пришли в сад, там было много детей. Они играли в какую-то шумную игру и смеялись. 3. Если здесь будет шумно, вы можете работать в моей комнате. Через несколько минут я уйду в университет, и здесь никого не будет. 4. Все говорят, что сын моего брата — очень способный мальчик. Он один из самых хороших учеников в школе, хорошо играет на рояле и всегда принимает активное участие в жизни школы. 5. В раннем возрасте я жил в деревне. Позднее мы переехали в один маленький город, где я провел свою юность. 6. Отцу моего приятеля около семидесяти лет, но он все еще работает и получает большое удовольствие от своей работы. 7. Кто-нибудь пойдет со мной в ресторан? Мы скоро вернемся. На обед уйдет примерно 25 или 30 минут. 8. Дети, все готовы писать диктант? 9. Подождите меня немного, если вы не спешите. Я еще не готов. 10. Когда вы переехали в Бэлць? — Примерно лет десять тому назад. 11. Если вы посмотрите новую пьесу, вы получите большое удовольствие. Все говорят, что это одна из лучших пьес нашего театра. 12. Вам понравился вчера новый фильм? — Нет. Никому из наших студентов этот фильм не понравился. 13. Кроме вас, никто в нашем офисе сейчас не изучает французский язык. 14. Я сейчас очень занят. Много работаю, изучаю английский язык, кроме того учусь в университете. 15. Все пойдут на спектакль, кроме Ника. Он будет занят. Кроме того, он не совсем хорошо себя чувствует. 16. Я не могу пойти сейчас в магазин с вами. Я сделаю покупки по пути домой. 17. В каком романе Диккенс описал свое детство? Какой роман Диккенса самый популярный? 18. Жаль что вы не можете дать мне адреса Джона. Но если вы опишете мне его дом, я его легко найду. 19. Этот роман такой же интересный, как и тот, который вы читали в прошлом месяце? —

Нет. Этот роман менее интересен, хотя я не могу сказать, что он плохой. 20. Как только я прочитаю этот роман, я дам его вам, если хотите. Думаю, он вам тоже очень понравится. 21. Если есть хорошие друзья, всегда можно обратиться к ним за помощью.

LESSON SEVENTEEN (THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON)


to forget – забыть to explain (to) – объяснитьquiet – тихий to tremble – дрожатьrather – довольно to hide – прятатьto keep – держать, хранить to be silent – сидеть молчаto redo – переделать a sound – звукwrong – не в порядке a whisper – шепотbrilliant – прекрасный until – покаan idea – идея to understand – пониматьto obey – слушать to make out – разобратьto look for – искать entire – целыйan escape – выход sad – грустныйto allow – разрешить gay – веселыйa prisoner – узник to give up – броситьa conversation – разговор, беседа true – настоящий, правдаto take breath – отдыхать


1. Вы сможете принять участие в нашей экскурсии? — Боюсь, что не смогу. Мне придется работать над докладом. 2. Я думаю, что Пит сможет приехать в Лондон вовремя, только он должен будет лететь туда самолетом. 3. Она не сможет получить удовольствие от прогулки, если она не наденет теплое пальто, потому что будет очень холодно. 4. Вам придется поторопиться на вокзал, если вы не хотите опоздать. 5. Так как никто мне не ответил, я должен был повторить свой вопрос громче. 6. Я думаю, что он не сможет пригласить так много людей. Его квартира такая же маленькая, как ваша. 7. Вчера мы хотели пойти в лес, но шел дождь, и нам пришлось остаться дома. 8. Когда Диккенсу было девять лет, его родители должны были переехать в Лондон. 9. Я уверен, что Джон сможет сделать хороший доклад; но ему придется прочитать очень много книг. 10. Я не мог уйти домой, потому что шел сильный дождь и мне пришлось остаться на работе позже, чем обычно. 11. В воскресенье мы провели много времени на открытом воздухе, но нам не пришлось надевать теплых вещей, так как погода была хорошая и солнце ярко (brightly) светило. 12. Ваш сын сможет присоединиться к нам вечером? — Да, я думаю, он будет свободен и сможет к вам прийти. 13. Мне не пришлось ни к кому обращаться за помощью. Я смог сделать эту работу сам (один). 14. Они не смогли обсудить этот серьезный вопрос вчера. Им придется сделать это сегодня. 15. Мне не пришлось потратить много времени на этот текст. Он очень легкий.


1. Что-то случилось (was wrong with) вчера с моими часами. Утром они на пять минут спешили, а вечером на пять минут отставали. 2. Я не смогу узнать вашего сына, там столько мальчиков его возраста. — Вы его легко узнаете. Он похож на меня. 3. Вы сможете поискать эту книгу у себя дома сегодня вечером? Я нигде не могу ее найти. 4. Что вы возьмете на завтрак: кофе или молоко? — Я возьму молоко. — Если у вас грипп, возьмите кофе. Молоко слишком холодное. 5. Я не могу пить чай быстро. Он очень горячий. Вы сможете меня немного подождать? 6. Разрешите мне, пожалуйста, пойти немного погулять. — А вы сможете пойти один? — Да, конечно, сегодня я себя чувствую лучше. 7. Я не смогу поехать за город в следующее воскресенье. Мне врач не разрешает выходить из дому, пока я не поправлюсь. 8. Вы ищете дом № 23? Идите в этом направ-лении, затем поверните налево. Понятно? — Да! Спасибо. 9. Я всегда получаю большое удовольствие, слушая эту песню (от этой песни). Я думаю, что она самая веселая и самая красивая из всех песен, которые вы обычно поете. 10. Если вы мне не поможете, я ничего не смогу разобрать в этом письме. 11. Что вы ищете? — Я ищу свой маленький чемодан. — Вот он. Я должна была спрятать его здесь от детей. 12. Я ничего не буду вам объяснять до тех пор, пока вы не успокоитесь. Мне трудно говорить, когда вы так шумите. 13. Мы обсуждали новую книгу одного из наших молодых писателей, когда пришел мой отец. Он тоже принял участие в нашей беседе. Когда он говорил, все сидели молча (молчали). Он рассказал нам много интересного.

LESSON EIGHTEEN (THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON)


a neighbour – сосед to admit – допуститьa member – член to defeat – победитьlocal – месный anxiously – с нетерпениемto use – использовать to hand in – датьto call – звать, называть a triumph – триумфto fight – сражаться an enemy – врагto believe – верить to turn (to) – превратитьсяcorrectly – правильно a shock – шокamong – среди hate - ненавистьto defend – защитить to kill – убитьbravely – мужественно to turn round – повернуиьсяa soldier – солдат to return – возвратитьсяfierce – жестокий himself – он самa battle – сражение to risk – рискнутьto liberate – освободить to destroy – разрушить

* * *

3. Translate.

b) into English.проданная вещь, забытая мелодия (tune), данный уроk, недочитанная книга, обсужденный вопрос, спасенный ребенок, хорошо исполненная пьеса, хорошо одетый мужчина.

4. Translate using Past Indefinite Tense or Present Perfect Tense.

1. Я никогда не был в Альпах, но я видел много других горных местностей. 2. Когда вы были на море? — Я был там пять лет тому назад. 3. Что мне делать? Я потерял ключ от квартиры и не могу попасть домой. 4. Я нигде не могу найти телеграмму своего друга. Она была у меня в кармане пальто. Я думаю, я потерял ее, когда доставал из кармана перчатки.

11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses

а) 1. Солнце уже взошло, и мы можем отправляться на реку. Наши лодки уже там. 2. Почему вы не пригласили Джона принять участие в нашей работе? Он очень хорошо знает этот предмет и может нам помочь. 3. Сын моей сестры очень способный. Ему только четыре года, но он уже научился читать. 4. Почему ты остался дома? Доктор еще не разрешил тебе выходить? 5. Я тоже никогда не слышал этого рассказа. Поэтому я думаю, я тоже получу большое удовольствие слушая его (от него). 6. Что случилось с Питом? Почему он еще не пришел? 7. Я рад, что он присоединился к вам. Теперь вам будет легче закончить эту работу. 8. Я думаю, что нам придется остаться здесь до семи часов. 9. Где мои книги? Я только что оставил их здесь. Кто-нибудь был здесь?b) 1. Мы тоже еще не переехали на новую квартиру. Мы сможем это сделать только после того, как там все будет готово. 2. Я пришел домой, поужинал и начал заниматься: я выучил новый урок и просмотрел все старые. Вы тоже просмотрели все уроки ? 3. За последнее время я ничего нового не покупал. 4. Когда вы купили свой новый костюм? 5. Вчера я видел Джорджа, я окликнул (позвал) его, он посмотрел в мою сторону, но не узнал меня. 6. Извините, я вас совсем не узнал. 7. Ник еще ничего не рассказал мне о своем разговоре с директором. 8. „Наконец-то мы добрались до деревни!" сказал он. „Теперь мы сможем отдохнуть." 9. Мы добрались до города, когда было уже совсем темно, поэтому нам пришлось остаться там на ночь. 10. Вы сделали много ошибок в этом диктанте. Вам придется выучить все слова получше. 11. Когда он сделал свой доклад? — Он сделал его на прошлой неделе. Жаль, что вы его не слышали. Доклад был очень интересный. 12. Я никогда не слыхал такой смешной и веселой пеени. Кто написал слова?


1. Вы уже видели наших новых соседей? Они недавно переехали сюда из Кишинэу. 2. Кто это играет на рояле? — Сын наших соседей. 3. Вы уже проверили мой перевод? — Да. В нем совсем нет ошибок. Вы его очень хорошо сделали. 4. Я еще не разговаривал с Джоном, но я полагаю, он поймет, что он неправ. 5. Эта книга описывает время, когда весь мир храбро сражался против зла. 6. Что с вами случилось? Вы очень бледны. Вы заболели? 7. Среди членов делегации, которая приезжала к нам вчера, было несколько американских экономистов. 8. Я еще не проверила (не исправила) ваши тетради. Как только я их проверю, я смогу объяснить вам ваши ошибки. 9. Вы уже прочитали роман Лондона „Белый клык" ? — Да. Я получил большое удовольствие от этой книги. 10. Вы уже поступили в университет? Сколько вам лет? Вы выглядите очень молодо. — Да, я уже студент. Я поступил в университет в семнадцать лет. 11. Я полагаю, с ним ничего не случилось. Он просто не смог сесть в автобус. Сейчас на остановке очень много народу. 12. Сын обернулся и сказал матери: „Если со мной что-нибудь случится, я дам тебе знать". 13. „Это случилось, когда мы учились в школе ...", начал он. 14. Что с вами случилось? Почему вы молчите? Продолжайте ваш рассказ! 15. С ним что-нибудь случилось? Почему он не сдержал свое слово? 16. Кто так хорошо играет на рояле в той комнате? — Это радио. Я только что его включил. 17. Выключите, пожалуйста, газ, если вы уже приготовили обед. В кухне слишком жарко. 18. „Я полагаю, нам придется вернуться (повернуть назад). Мы не сможем добраться до ближайшей деревни до наступления

темноты (до того, как стемнеет)", сказал один из путешественников. 19. Попросите вашего соседа не включать сейчас радио. Я хочу немного отдохнуть.

LESSON NINETEEN (THE NINETEENTH LESSON)


a drummer – барабанщик pleasant - приятныйa band – група no more – не большеto make up one’s mind – решиться no longer – не дольшеboth of them – оба a hundred – стоupstairs – на верх to joke – шутитьespecially – особенно to dance – танцеватьto set up – уладить under – подa party – вечеринка since – с тех порto celebrate - праздновать for ages – целую вечностьan anniversary – юбилей for years – очень много летsharp – точно to see the New Year in – встретить Новый Годa guest – гость elder – старшийformer – прежний any more – больше (отр.)

* * *4. Translate

1. Я не видел своего друга с тех пор, как мы окончили университет. 2. Мой брат не был в театре с осени. 3. Мы не встречали Тома с тех пор, как отдыхали (были в отпуске) вместе на море. 4. Сколько английских книг вы прочитали с тех пор, как начали заниматься английским языком? 5. Этот актер не принимал участия ни в одном представлении с прошлой весны. 6. Мой брат выучился читать в прошлом году, и с тех пор прочитал много детских книг. 7. Я не получал никаких писем от своих друзей с 15-го августа. 8. Моя сестра посетила десять лекций по литературе с тех пор, как начала изучать этот предмет. 9. Этот писатель не написал ничего нового с 1995 г. 10. Вы очень бледны. Вы не отдыхали с утра! 11. Я не видел Пита три года. Он теперь совсем не приезжает сюда. 12. Сколько интересного они увидели с тех пор, как начали путешествовать! 13. Он не посмотрел ни одного нового фильма с прошлого месяца. 14. Я ничего им не писал с прошлого года. 15. Какие еще музеи вы посетили с тех пор, как мы были вместе в том музее?

* * *15. Translate paying attention to:

а) the use of it.1. Темнеет. Скоро пойдет дождь. Поторопитесь. 2. Посмотрите в окно. Идет снег? — Да. Очень сильный. 3. В это время года здесь часто идут дожди? — Да, очень часто. 4. Собирается дождь. Давайте вернемся домой. 5. Когда идет снег, я люблю гулять по улицам нашего города. 6. Если пойдет дождь, мы останемся дома. 7. Шел дождь, когда вы отправились на вокзал? 8. Когда здесь был дождь? 9. Когда идет дождь, приятно сидеть в теплой комнате и читать книгу. 10. Мне трудно узнать вас. Вы очень плохо выглядите. Вы больны? 11. Вам странно слышать такие слова? 12. Сегодня очень холодно. Может быть скоро пойдет дождь. Наденьте пальто! 13. У вас в комнате тепло? — О, да. У меня в комнате даже жарко. 14. В какое время здесь обычно темнеет в декабре? — В декабре

здесь темнеет очень рано. 15. Когда пойдет дождь, мы будем уже дома, если поспешим сейчас.

b) the use of more.1. Кто еще хочет принять участие в экскурсии? 2. Какие еще лекции вы уже посетили? 3. Когда он вошел в комнату, гости все еще танцевали. 4. Кто еще поступил в университет в прошлом году? 5. К нашей экскурсии присоединилось еще пять человек. 6. Какой еще праздник вам очень нравится? 7. Я еще не представил вам всех своих гостей. 8. „Сейчас я спою еще одну песню", сказал певец. 9. Я видел его ровно в восемь часов. Он все еще работал. 10. Мой сын еще не поступил в университет. Он еще учится в школе. 11. Дайте мне еще тарелку супа, пожалуйста. 12. Дайте мне еще супу, пожалуйста. 13. Кого еще вы собираетесь пригласить на свой день рождения?


1. Где вы будете первого апреля? — Я собираюсь поехать в Лондон. Я никогда не был там и очень хочу посмотреть этот город, особенно в праздничные дни. 2. Где вы будете встречать Новый год? — Я думаю встречать Новый год у Смитов. 3. Вы не были у нас с прошлого года и не видели еще нашего сада. Приходите посмотреть его. Теперь он полон цветов. Там очень приятно погулять. — С удовольствием. Можно мне взять с собой старшего сына? — Конечно. Мы будем очень рады. 4. Ваша комната похожа на библиотеку. Она полна разных книг и журналов. 5. Кто из наших студентов пойдет на эту лекцию? — Все, кроме Ника. Он должен будет остаться в библиотеке. 6. Лекция действительно начнется ровно в час? — Да. Не опаздывайте. 7. Простите, пожалуйста, я еше не представил вас своей жене. 8. Когда вы поступили в университет? — В 1998 г. — А окончили? — В 2003 г. — Вы встречали кого-нибудь из наших студентов с того времени? 9. Кто-нибудь из ваших гостей играет на рояле? Давайте потанцуем немного. 10. Я вас не видел целую вечность, но вы выглядите так же молодо, как и десять лет назад. 11. Если вы решите пойти сегодня вечером в кино, позвоните нам, мы с удовольствием к вам присоединимся. 12. Почему вы больше не танцуете? — Я не могу больше танцевать. 13. Почему вы не надели пальто? Сегодня такая плохая погода! — Когда мы выходили издому, дождя не было. Солнце ярко светило, и было совсем тепло. 14. Мой старший брат еще не окончил университет, но он учится уже на последнем курсе, а младший — учится в школе. 15. Какую годовщину независимости мы будем праздновать в этом году? 16. Мы не можем больше ждать Сэма. Уже слишком поздно, и нам будет очень трудно добираться до дому. 17. Это самая красивая птица, которую мы когда-либо видели.


Однажды богатая англичанка, которую звали миссис Джонсон, решила как можно веселее отпраздновать свой день рождения. Она пригласила много гостей и хорошего певца. Певец был беден, но у него был очень хороший голос. Ровно в шесть часов певец приехал в дом миссис Джонсон. Когда он вошел, зал был полон гостей, которые сидели за большим столом посредине зала.

Гости ели, шутили, смеялись и громко разговаривали. Певец приветствовал их и готов был присоединиться к ним, но миссис Джонсон сказала следующее:

„Мы рады, сэр, что вы приехали. Вы будете петь после того, как закончится обед. Я позову вас, когда мы будем готовы вас слушать. А сейчас идите на кухню и тоже пообедайте."

Певец очень рассердился, но ничего не сказал и вышел из зала. Он хотел уехать из дома миссис Джонсон, но потом решил остаться и дать ее богатым гостям хороший урок.

Когда певец появился в кухне, слуги обедали. Певец вместе с ними съел обед из трех блюд, поблагодарил всех и сказал: „Ну, а теперь я спою для вас ..." Он начал петь и спел много прекрасных песен. Вскоре миссис Джонсон позвала певца в зал.

— Ну, сэр, мы готовы.— Вы готовы? — спросил певец. Что же вы готовы делать?— Слушать вас. — сказала миссис Джонсон сердитым голосом.— Слушать меня? Но я уже пел. Я больше не смогу петь сегодня.— Где вы пели? — спросила она еще более сердито.— В кухне. Я всегда пою для тех, с кем обедаю.

LESSON TWENTY (THE TWENTIETH LESSON)


of coarse – конечно a hand – рукаa flag – флаг to get tired – устатьa key – ключ wild – дикийto notice – заметить to draw out – вытащитьcut-off – отрезанный to throw – броситьa company – компания to lift – поднятьa legend – легенда on board – на палубуan origin – происхождение a wound – ранаterrible – страшный to dress one’s wound – перевезать рануto belong – принадлежать a lip – губаto jump – прыгать for a while – на времяtoward(s) – к to add – добавитьto touch – дотронуться true – правдивыйa side – сторона

* * *


1. Я буду очень рад, если вы напишите мне несколько строк, когда я буду в горах. 2. Том только что вышел из комнаты. Подождите минутку. Не кладите трубку, я пойду (и) позову его. 3. Почему на улицах так много людей? 4. Посмотри, как много звезд на небе! Ночью будет холодно. 5. Ты не видел ключа от моей комнаты? Мне кажется, я его где-то потерял. Теперь я не смогу попасть в квартиру, пока моя сестра не придет домой. 6. Посмотри на эту картину. Неужели ты не замечаешь в ней ничего странного. 7. ,,Я смогу отрезать хлеба, если вы дадите мне более острый нож", сказал пассажир своему соседу. 8. Послед-ний день перед отъездом я провел в обществе (компании) своих друзей, которые пришли проводить меня. 9. Неужели вы не знаете происхождения этой интересной легенды? Давайте я расскажу вам о ней сейчас. 10. Вы прочитали какие-либо английские книги в оригинале за последнее время? 11. Чей ребенок прыгает там? Остановите его сейчас же, он может упасть и сломать себе ногу. 12. Какая дикая мысль! 13. Когда сбудется моя мечта, и я стану экономистом, я буду работать в своем офисе. 14. Вы совсем не коснулись этой темы в вашем докладе. 15. По правде говоря, я совсем не устал. — Я тоже не устал. Давайте переведем еще одну статью. 16. Не ждите отплытия (отхода) парохода, идите

домой. Мы знаем, что вас ждет сестра. — У меня еще есть немного времени. Я пойду домой, как только вы сядете на пароход. 17. Почему вы ничего не хотите добавить к моему рассказу? — Мне нечего добавить. Вы уже все сказали. 18. Это правда, что вам пришлось прочитать несколько английских книг в оригинале, чтобы сделать свой доклад? 19. По правде говоря, эта статья не такая трудная, как та, которую мы переводили на прошлом занятии. Я не знаю, почему я сделал так много ошибок в моем переводе. 20. Было очень темно и холодно, и шел сильный дождь, когда мы доехали до деревне. 21. Я думаю, что все эти вопросы необходимо затронуть на нашем собрании. 22. ,,Приходи к театру ровно в семь. Я буду тебя там ждать", сказал мне старший брат. 23. Я не знаю, почему я так устал сегодня. 24. Хотя это и старая книга, я прочитал ее с большим удовольствием.

Documents

V. Prisacaru Basic Course